D115, D116 Service Manual (SPANISH)

More Service Manuals at www.service-manual.
net
Modelo S-C4.5
Cdigo de mquina: D115/D116
Manual de Servicio
Noviembre, 2010
WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET
Advertencias importantes sobre seguridad

Prevencin de daos fsicos
1. Asegrese de que el cable de alimentacin est desenchufado antes de desmontar o montar
piezas de la copiadora o de perifricos.
2. La toma de corriente debe encontrarse cerca de la copiadora y ser de fcil acceso.
3. Tenga en cuenta que algunos componentes de la copiadora y la unidad de bandeja de papel
reciben tensin elctrica incluso cuando el interruptor de alimentacin principal est apagado.
4. Si fuera necesario llevar a cabo algn ajuste o reparacin en las tapas exteriores desmontadas o
abiertas mientras el interruptor principal est encendido, mantenga las manos apartadas de los
componentes con alimentacin elctrica o que se accionan mecnicamente.
5. Si se inicia un trabajo antes de que la copiadora complete el periodo de calentamiento o
inicializacin, mantenga las manos apartadas de los componentes mecnicos o elctricos hasta
que el trabajo haya finalizado. La copiadora empieza a realizar copias en cuanto finaliza el
periodo de calentamiento o inicializacin.
6. Las piezas metlicas y las piezas internas de la unidad de fusin alcanzan temperaturas muy
elevadas durante el funcionamiento de la copiadora. Evite tocar estos componentes con las manos
descubiertas.
Condiciones de seguridad sanitarias

El tner y el revelador no son txicos, pero si accidentalmente entran en los ojos, pueden provocar
molestias oculares temporales. Trate de eliminarlos con colirio o lavndose los ojos con abundante
agua. Si no lo consigue o contina sintiendo molestias, acuda a un mdico.
Cumplimiento de las normas de seguridad elctricas

La instalacin y el mantenimiento de la copiadora y sus perifricos deben estar a cargo de personal de
servicio que haya realizado los cursos de formacin sobre los modelos en cuestin.
Mantenga la mquina alejada de lquidos inflamables, gases y aerosoles. Si no se observan estas
precauciones, podra producirse un incendio o una explosin.
Pilas de litio
Una colocacin incorrecta de las pilas de litio en la FCU, circuito del controlador y unidad de placa de
memoria puede provocar un riesgo de explosin. Sustituya las pilas slo con el mismo tipo de pilas o un
tipo equivalente recomendado por el fabricante. Deseche las pilas usadas de acuerdo con las
instrucciones del fabricante.
Eliminacin segura y ecolgica

1. No queme las botellas de tner ni el tner residual. No queme las botellas de tner ni el tner
usado. El polvo de tner puede incendiarse repentinamente al exponerse al fuego.
2. Deshgase del tner utilizado, revelador y los fotoconductores orgnicos de acuerdo con las
normativas locales. (Estos materiales no son txicos.)
3. Deseche las piezas sustituidas de acuerdo con la normativa local vigente.
4. Al mantener bateras de litio utilizadas para deshacerse de ellas ms tarde, no ponga ms de 100
bateras por caja sellada. Almacenar grandes cantidades o no sellarlas por separado podra
causar reacciones qumicas y condensacin de calor.
Seguridad lser
El organismo norteamericano Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH: Centro de
Dispositivos y Salud Radiolgica) prohbe la reparacin de unidades pticas lser fuera de las
instalaciones del fabricante. La unidad de carcasa ptica slo se puede reparar en la fbrica o en un
centro que disponga del equipo exigido. El subsistema del lser puede ser sustituido sobre el terreno
por un ingeniero cualificado para la asistencia al cliente. El chasis del lser no se puede reparar en las
instalaciones finales. Por lo tanto, los ingenieros de asistencia al cliente tienen instrucciones de remitir
todos los chasis y subsistemas lser a la fbrica o al almacn cuando sea necesario sustituir el
subsistema ptico.
El uso de controles o la ejecucin de procedimientos o ajustes distintos de los especificados en este
lugar pueden dar lugar a una peligrosa exposicin a la radiacin.
ADVERTENCIA PARA LA UNIDAD DE LSER
Apague el interruptor principal antes de comenzar a realizar cualquiera de los procedimientos

descritos en la seccin Unidad de lser. Los rayos lser pueden provocar graves lesiones
oculares.
SMBOLO DE PRECAUCIN:
Smbolos y abreviaturas
Este manual utiliza varios smbolos y abreviaturas. Su significado es el siguiente:
Consultar
Arandela de sujecin
Anillo en E
Tornillo
Conector
Abrazadera
SEF
Alimentacin a lo largo
LEF
Alimentacin a lo ancho
Manual de tecnologa Core
Precaucin, Notas, etc.

Los siguientes mensajes ofrecen informacin especial:
La inobservancia de la informacin de advertencia podra dar lugar a lesiones graves e incluso a
la muerte.
Siga estas instrucciones para garantizar un funcionamiento seguro y evitar lesiones menores.
Esta informacin ofrece sugerencias y consejos sobre la mejor manera de mantener el aparato.
CONTENIDO
Advertencias importantes sobre seguridad......................................................................................................1
Prevencin de daos fsicos..........................................................................................................................1
Condiciones de seguridad sanitarias...........................................................................................................1
Cumplimiento de las normas de seguridad elctricas.................................................................................1
Pilas de litio.....................................................................................................................................................2
Eliminacin segura y ecolgica....................................................................................................................2
Seguridad lser..............................................................................................................................................2
Smbolos y abreviaturas.....................................................................................................................................4
1. Informacin del producto

Especificaciones...............................................................................................................................................11
Configuracin de la mquina.........................................................................................................................12
Equipo principal...........................................................................................................................................12
Componentes del sistema...........................................................................................................................13
Aspectos generales..........................................................................................................................................14
Disposicin de los componentes................................................................................................................14
Componentes elctricos..............................................................................................................................16
Trayecto del papel.......................................................................................................................................19
Disposicin de los elementos motores.......................................................................................................20
Orientacin para aquellos que estn familiarizados con los productos predecesores............................22
2. Instalacin
Precauciones de instalacin............................................................................................................................23
Requisitos de instalacin..................................................................................................................................24
Entorno..........................................................................................................................................................24
Nivel de la mquina....................................................................................................................................24
Requisitos mnimos de espacio operativo..................................................................................................25
Requisitos de alimentacin..........................................................................................................................26
Copiadora........................................................................................................................................................27
Comprobacin de accesorios....................................................................................................................27
Auricular opcional.......................................................................................................................................34
Unidad de bandeja de papel (D567)...........................................................................................................37
Procedimiento de instalacin......................................................................................................................37
Calefactor de la unidad de bandeja de papel.............................................................................................40
Ranura USB 2.0/SD Tipo B............................................................................................................................48
Comprobacin de la ranura de tarjeta SD/USB......................................................................................54
Asa para la bandeja de papel opcional.......................................................................................................56
Accesorios....................................................................................................................................................56
Opciones del controlador...............................................................................................................................59
Aspectos generales......................................................................................................................................59
Instalacin de LAN inalmbrica (IEEE 802.11a/g)................................................................................59
Instalacin de IEEE 1284...........................................................................................................................61
Tarjeta VM de tipo L (D467)......................................................................................................................62
Gigabit Ethernet...........................................................................................................................................63
Disco duro opcional (D577)......................................................................................................................65
3. Mantenimiento preventivo
Tablas de mantenimiento.................................................................................................................................71
Cmo poner a cero el contador de mantenimiento preventivo...................................................................72
4. Sustitucin y ajuste
Precauciones.....................................................................................................................................................73
General.........................................................................................................................................................73
Pilas de litio...................................................................................................................................................73
Cable libre de halgeno.............................................................................................................................73
Electricidad esttica.....................................................................................................................................74
Herramientas especiales y lubricantes...........................................................................................................75
Tapas exteriores y panel de mandos.............................................................................................................76
Tapa trasera.................................................................................................................................................76
Bandeja de copias.......................................................................................................................................76
Panel de mandos y cubiertas superiores...................................................................................................77
Puerta derecha.............................................................................................................................................78
Bandeja bypass...........................................................................................................................................79
Sensor de la tapa del cristal de exposicin...............................................................................................79
Unidad del escner..........................................................................................................................................80
Cristal de exposicin...................................................................................................................................80
Bloque de lentes...........................................................................................................................................80
Lmpara de exposicin, circuito estabilizador de la lmpara................................................................81
Motor del escner.......................................................................................................................................82
Sensor de posicin inicial del escner.......................................................................................................84
Ajuste de la alineacin del escner...........................................................................................................84
Fusin................................................................................................................................................................86
Unidad de fusin..........................................................................................................................................86
Sensor de salida..........................................................................................................................................87
Uas del expulsor del rodillo de calor.......................................................................................................87
Rodillo de calor y lmpara de fusin.........................................................................................................88
Termointerruptor y termistor........................................................................................................................90
Rodillo de presin........................................................................................................................................91
Comprobacin de la banda de contacto..................................................................................................92
PCU y lmpara de extincin...........................................................................................................................93
PCU...............................................................................................................................................................93
Lmpara de extincin..................................................................................................................................94
Extractor y motor principal..............................................................................................................................95
Extractor........................................................................................................................................................95
Motor principal............................................................................................................................................96
Alimentacin del papel....................................................................................................................................97
Rodillo de alimentacin de papel y almohadilla de friccin...................................................................97
Sensor de fin de papel................................................................................................................................98
Sensor de registro........................................................................................................................................98
Sensor de papel agotado en bypass.........................................................................................................99
Rodillo de alimentacin bypass...............................................................................................................100
Embrague de alimentacin bypass y almohadilla de friccin..............................................................101
Embragues de registro y alimentacin de papel....................................................................................102
Transferencia de imgenes...........................................................................................................................104
Rodillo de transferencia............................................................................................................................104
Sensor ID y rodillo dplex........................................................................................................................105
Placa de descarga....................................................................................................................................106
BICU y circuito del controlador....................................................................................................................107
BICU...........................................................................................................................................................107
Circuito del controlador............................................................................................................................108
Otras sustituciones.........................................................................................................................................114
Motor dplex.............................................................................................................................................114
Circuito de alimentacin de alta tensin ................................................................................................115
PSU.............................................................................................................................................................116
Solenoide de liberacin de contacto......................................................................................................117
Embrague de suministro de tner.............................................................................................................117
FCU.............................................................................................................................................................118
Unidad lser...................................................................................................................................................121
Ubicacin de la etiqueta de Precaucin.................................................................................................121
Unidad lser..............................................................................................................................................121
Unidad LD y motor del espejo poligonal................................................................................................122
ARDF...............................................................................................................................................................123
ARDF...........................................................................................................................................................123
Tapa trasera del DF...................................................................................................................................124
Unidad de alimentacin de originales....................................................................................................124
Rodillo de separacin...............................................................................................................................125
Placa de accionamiento del DF...............................................................................................................125
Sensor de inversin y presencia de original del DF...............................................................................126
Sensor de registro y salida del DF...........................................................................................................127
Motor de alimentacin del DF.................................................................................................................128
Motor de transporte del DF......................................................................................................................129
Embrague de alimentacin del DF..........................................................................................................130
Ajuste del rea de imagen de la copia.......................................................................................................131
Impresin....................................................................................................................................................131
Escaneo......................................................................................................................................................133
Ajuste de la imagen en el alimentador automtico de documentos (DF).............................................136
5. Manual de referencia del mantenimiento del sistema

Programa de servicio....................................................................................................................................139
Tablas SP....................................................................................................................................................139
Uso de los modos SP y SSP......................................................................................................................139
Uso del modo SP...........................................................................................................................................142
Carga/descarga de los datos de la NVRAM........................................................................................142

Procedimiento de actualizacin del firmware........................................................................................143
Impresin del patrn de prueba (SP5-902-001)..................................................................................148
Borrado de memoria.................................................................................................................................151
Ajuste de nmero de mquina (SP5-811-001).....................................................................................153
Impresin de SMC (SP5-990).................................................................................................................153
Anlisis de errores del sensor ID (SP2-221)...........................................................................................154
Tablas de servicios de fax.............................................................................................................................155
6. Localizacin de averas
Tablas de SC..................................................................................................................................................157
Resumen.....................................................................................................................................................157
Descripciones de los cdigos SC del motor...........................................................................................158
Descripciones de los cdigos SC GW....................................................................................................167
Defectos de los componentes elctricos......................................................................................................186
Sensor/switch............................................................................................................................................186
Condiciones de fusibles fundidos.............................................................................................................187
Presentacin de LED de BICU..................................................................................................................188
Funcin Guardar tarjeta (Card Save)..........................................................................................................189
Aspectos generales...................................................................................................................................189
Procedimiento............................................................................................................................................189
Gua de solucin de problemas del fax......................................................................................................192
7. Ahorro de energa
Ahorro de energa.........................................................................................................................................193
Modos ahorro de energa........................................................................................................................193
Eficacia de ahorro de energa.................................................................................................................194
Ahorro de papel............................................................................................................................................197
Eficacia de la funcin Dplex/Combinar...............................................................................................197
10

Especificaciones
Consulte "Apndices" para obtener la siguiente informacin:

Especificaciones generales
Formatos de papel admitidos
11
Configuracin de la mquina
1
Equipo principal
Componente estndar
D115/D116
Notas
Copiadora [A]
Placa del controlador GW [C]
Estndar
ARDF [D]
Estndar
Unidad de fax [E]
Estndar
12
Cdigo de la
mquina
Componentes opcionales
Cdigo de la
mquina
Unidad de alimentacin de papel, 500

hojas [B]
D567
Notas
Se pueden utilizar dos.
Configuracin de la mquina
Auricular [F]
B433
Slo para Norteamrica
Componentes del sistema
tem
Cdigo de la
mquina
Notas
Caja del controlador
[A]
Estndar
Ranura USB 2.0/SD
D467
[B]
Opcional slo para D115
[C]
Tarjeta SD para la unidad de impresora/

escner
Unidad de impresora/
escner
D468
Tarjeta VM
D467
[D]
IEEE 1284
B679
[E]
Red LAN inalmbrica
M344
[E]
Placa Ethernet Gigabit
G874
[E]
Disco duro con tarjeta de

seguridad
D577
[F]
Estndar slo para D115

En la ranura 2 para SD (inferior)
Uno de los cuatro
Una la tarjeta de seguridad a la tarjeta SD de

la impresora/escner.
13
Aspectos generales
1
Disposicin de los componentes

Equipo principal
14
1. Lmpara de exposicin
20. Sensor de densidad de imagen (ID)
2. Primer escner
21. Rodillo de registro
3. CCD (en la SBU)
22. Sensor de registro
4. Bloque de lentes
23. Bandeja bypass
5. Segundo escner
24. Rodillo de alimentacin de papel bypass
6. Segundo espejo
25. Sensor de papel agotado en bypass
7. Tercer espejo
26. Almohadilla de friccin bypass
Aspectos generales
8. Sensor de la tapa del cristal de exposicin
27. Sinfines de mezclado
9. Cristal de exposicin
28. Almohadilla de friccin (principal)
10. Rodillo de salida
29. Rodillo de alimentacin de papel
11. Sensor de salida
30. Sensor de fin de papel
12. Motor del escner
31. Sensor TD (densidad de tner)
13. Rodillo de calor
32. Placa inferior
14. Rodillo de presin
33. Motor del espejo poligonal
15. Lmina de limpieza
34. Unidad lser
16. Tambor OPC
35. Cartucho de suministro de tner (o cargador

de tolva de tner)
17. Placa de descarga
36. Sinfn de recogida de tner
18. Rodillo de transferencia
37. Sensor de posicin inicial del escner
19. Rodillo de revelado
ARDF
1. Rodillo de separacin
2. Rodillo de alimentacin de papel
8. Sensor de salida
3. Rodillo de captacin
4. Sensor de presencia de original
15
5. Rodillo de inversin
11. Sensor de inversin
6. Compuerta de unin
12. Rodillo de transporte
Componentes elctricos
Componentes elctricos 1
16
1. Bloque de lentes
11. Sensor de densidad de imagen (ID)
2. Lmpara de exposicin
3. Circuito estabilizador de lmpara
4. Sensor de posicin inicial del escner
14. Sensor de densidad del tner
Aspectos generales
5. Sensor de la tapa del cristal de exposicin
15. Sensor de papel agotado en bypass
6. Motor del escner
16. Conmutador de seguridad de la puerta

derecha
7. Contador mecnico
17. Conmutador de seguridad de la puerta

frontal
8. Motor del espejo poligonal
18. Lmpara de extincin
9. Unidad LD
19. Circuito de alimentacin de alta tensin
10. Sensor de salida
20. Circuito del panel de mandos
Componentes elctricos 2
1. Motor dplex
7. Embrague de alimentacin del papel
2. Extractor
8. Embrague de suministro de tner
3. PSU
9. Embrague de alimentacin bypass
4. Placa del controlador (GW)
10. Embrague de registro
5. BICU
11. Solenoide de fusin
17
6. Motor principal
18
ARDF
1. Embrague de alimentacin del DF
6. Motor de alimentacin del DF
7. Sensor de inversin
3. Sensor de salida
8. Placa de accionamiento del DF
4. Sensor de tapa izquierda
9. Solenoide de compuerta de unin
5. Motor de transporte del DF
10. Sensor de presencia de original
Aspectos generales
Trayecto del papel
1. Sensor de registro de originales (alimentador de documentos)

2. Sensor de salida (alimentador de documentos)
3. Sensor de inversin (alimentador de documentos)
4. Sensor de ajuste de originales (alimentador de documentos)
5. Sensor de salida
6. Sensor de trayecto del papel
8. Sensor de fin de papel bypass
9. Sensor de alimentacin de papel (bandeja opcional)
19
10. Sensor de fin de papel (bandeja opcional)

Disposicin de los elementos motores

Equipo principal
20
1. Motor del escner
7. Embrague de alimentacin bypass (bandeja

bypass)
2. Motor dplex
8. Embrague de registro
9. Engranaje motriz del revelador
4. Embrague de la botella de tner
10. Engranaje motriz del tambor
5. Motor principal
11. Engranaje unidireccional (unidad dplex)
6. Embrague de alimentacin del papel
12. Engranaje de accionamiento de fusin
Aspectos generales
ARDF
1. Motor de alimentacin del DF
6. Rodillo de separacin
2. Rodillo de alimentacin
7. Rodillo de transporte
3. Rodillo de captacin
8. Motor de transporte del DF
4. Rodillo de inversin
5. Embrague de alimentacin del DF
Motor de alimentacin del DF: Acciona los rodillos de alimentacin y separacin, captacin,
transporte e inversin.
Motor de transporte del DF: Acciona los rodillos de registro y salida.
21
Orientacin para aquellos que estn

familiarizados con los productos predecesores
La gama de mquinas D115/D116 es el modelo que sucede a la gama de mquinas D068/D069. Si
tiene experiencia con la lnea anterior, la siguiente informacin puede servirle de ayuda cuando lea
este manual.
Diferencias con los productos anteriores
D115/D116
Tarjeta de seguridad
(cifrado de disco duro y
unidad de seguridad de
sobrescritura de datos)
Velocidad de copia
D068/D069
Estndar slo para D115
Opcional slo para D069
20 cpm: Copia de memoria
17 ppm: Copia de memoria
16 cpm: ADF 1 a 1
16 cpm: ADF 1 a 1
Las piezas siguientes son exclusivas para D115/D116. Al reemplazar las piezas siguientes, utilice
las piezas especificadas para cada modelo. No mezcle las piezas siguientes para D067/D068/
D069/D072 y D115/D116. De lo contrario, no se garantiza el funcionamiento de la mquina ni
la calidad del resultado.
1. BICU con unidad controladora
Si se instala una pieza incorrecta, una imagen no se copia correctamente en la impresin con
la copia DF una a una.
2. Unidad lser (unidad de escritura)
Si se instala una pieza incorrecta, la imagen copiada podra quedar demasiado oscura o
demasiado clara en la impresin.
3. Motor de escner poligonal (parte de la unidad lser)
Si se instala una pieza incorrecta, la imagen copiada podra quedar demasiado oscura o
demasiado clara en la impresin o podra producirse un SC.
4. Placa de nombre de modelo
5. Contador mecnico (S-C4: instalado, S-C4.5: pieza opcional de servicio)
22
2. Instalacin
Precauciones de instalacin
Antes de instalar una unidad opcional, siga estos pasos:
Imprima todos los mensajes almacenados en la memoria, las listas de elementos programados por
el usuario y la lista de parmetros del sistema.
Si la mquina tiene una impresora opcional, imprima toda la informacin que contenga el buffer
de la impresora.
Apague el interruptor principal y desconecte el cable de alimentacin, la lnea de telfono y el
cable de red.
23
2. Instalacin
Requisitos de instalacin
Entorno
Cuadro de valores de temperatura y humedad
Intervalo de temperatura: 10C a 32C (50F a 89,6F)

Intervalo de humedad: 15% a 80% HR
Iluminacin ambiente: menos de 1500 lux (no exponer a la luz solar directa).
Ventilacin: Debe renovarse el aire ambiental como mnimo a razn de tres veces/hora/persona
Polvo ambiental: menos de 0,1 mg/m3
No coloque la mquina en lugares en los que pueda estar expuesta a la luz solar directa ni al aire
directo (procedente de un ventilador, acondicionador de aire, purificador, etc.).
No site la mquina en lugares en los que pueda estar expuesta a gases corrosivos.
Coloque la mquina sobre una superficie resistente y uniforme.
No coloque la mquina en un lugar donde pueda estar sometida a vibraciones fuertes.
Nivel de la mquina
De delante atrs:
24
Desnivel mximo de 5 mm (0,2")
Requisitos de instalacin
De derecha a
izquierda:
Desnivel mximo de 5 mm (0,2")
Requisitos mnimos de espacio operativo

Coloque la mquina cerca de una fuente de alimentacin, dejando alrededor el espacio libre que se
indica a continuacin.
A: Delante 750 mm (29,6")

B: Izquierda 100 mm (3,9")
C: Detrs 100 mm (3,9")
D: Derecha 100 mm (3,9")
E: Profundidad - 450 mm (17,7")
F: Anchura - 485 mm (19,1")
25
2. Instalacin
El espacio recomendado de 750 mm por delante es suficiente para poder extraer la bandeja de
papel. Para que pueda trabajar un operario, se requiere ms espacio por delante de la mquina.
El espacio mnimo real requerido para los lados izquierdo, derecho y trasero es de 10 mm (0,4")
por cada uno, pero no quedar espacio para abrir la bandeja bypass, la puerta derecha ni la
unidad ARDF.
Requisitos de alimentacin
Compruebe que la toma de corriente de la pared est cerca de la mquina y sea de fcil acceso.
Una vez terminada la instalacin, asegrese de que el enchufe se ajusta firmemente a la toma.
Evite mltiples conexiones en la misma toma de alimentacin.
Compruebe que la mquina est conectada a tierra.
Tensin de entrada:
Norteamrica:
110 120 V, 60 Hz, 8 A
Europa:
220 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 4 A
Calidad de imagen garantizada a la tensin nominal de 10%.

Funcionamiento garantizado a la tensin nominal de 15%.
26
Copiadora
Copiadora
Comprobacin de accesorios
Impresora/escner y modelo de fax (D115)/ modelo de fax (D116)

Descripcin
Cantidad
NECR (-17)
Hoja de seguridad de la UE (-27)
Etiqueta adhesiva de tamao de papel (-17, -27, -29)
Instrucciones de uso Libro (-17, -29)
1 juego
Instrucciones de uso CD ROM (-17, -29)
1 juego
Soporte del auricular (-17)
Tornillo para el soporte del auricular (-17)
Cable modular (-17)
Cubierta del conector para telfono (-17)
Ncleo de ferrita para la lnea de telfono
Ncleo de ferrita (-17, -27, -29)
Hoja de precaucin EMC (-27)
Pgina - CLUF (Contrato de licencia de usuario final) (-17, -27, -29)
Etiqueta adhesiva de precaucin (-17, -27, -29)
Procedimiento de instalacin
Asegrese de que la copiadora est desenchufada durante la instalacin.
27
2. Instalacin
1. Retire todas las tiras de cinta adhesiva.

2. Quite la bolsa [A], SMC y hoja de papel A3 del cristal de exposicin.
3. Quite la cua espaciadora [B].
28
Copiadora
4. Extraiga los tres pasadores de bloqueo del escner. (Cada pasador tiene una etiqueta). Para ello,
agarre el pin por la base [C], grelo 90 grados y tire de l hacia abajo.
5. Quite las etiquetas de los pins.
6. Separe cada pin de la base [C].
7. Deshgase del pin [D].
8. Vuelva a colocar cada base [C] en su orificio original, girndola 90 para bloquearla en su
posicin. (Asegrese de hacerlo con los tres pasadores).
9. Abra la puerta delantera [E].

10. Levante la palanca [F], presione sobre la lengeta [G] y tire del soporte de botella [H] hasta
extraerlo. (No es necesario extraerlo completamente de la mquina).
11. Tome una nueva botella de tner y agtela varias veces.
29
2. Instalacin
12. Retire el tapn exterior [I].

No quite el tapn interior [J].
13. Cargue la botella en el soporte.
No gire a la fuerza la botella de tner en el soporte. Cuando encienda el interruptor de
alimentacin, la copiadora pondr la botella en su sitio
14. Introduzca el soporte de la botella en la mquina.
15. Baje el pestillo [K] para bloquear el soporte.
16. Quite la proteccin [L].

30
Copiadora
17. Saque las lengetas [M] de la PCU con una mano, sujetando la PCU con la otra.
No tire de ambas lengetas al mismo tiempo, ya que podra daar la PCU.
18. Cierre la puerta delantera.
19. Saque la bandeja de papel y quite la cinta adhesiva que fija la gua del extremo en el
compartimento.
20. Empuje la placa inferior hacia abajo y a continuacin cargue el papel.
21. Ajuste las guas laterales. Si carga un papel ms pequeo que A4, coloque la gua del extremo en
la posicin correcta.
22. Introduzca de nuevo la bandeja en la copiadora.
31
2. Instalacin
23. Pegue la etiqueta adhesiva de la marca correspondiente en el centro de la puerta delantera [N] si
es necesario.
24. Pegue en la bandeja de papel [O] la etiqueta adhesiva con el nmero de bandeja y la etiqueta
adhesiva con el tamao del papel.
25. Instale las unidades opcionales (si procede).
26. Instale el ncleo de ferrita [P] en el cable de red cuando conecte el cable.
27. Conecte el ncleo de ferrita a la linea de telfono igual que en el paso 26.
28. Conecte la lnea de telfono a la clavija "LINE".
El extremo del ncleo de ferrita debe estar a unos 10 cm (4") del extremo del cable.
29. Enchufe la mquina y encienda el interruptor de alimentacin.
30. Seleccione el idioma que desea para el panel de mandos (
> Language [Idioma]).
Configuracin de la interfaz
Para D115:
1. Inicie el modo SP.
2. Seleccione SP5-985-001 (Ajuste de NIC) y cambie el valor de ajuste a "1" (Encendido).
3. Seleccione SP5-985-001 (Ajuste de USB) y cambie el valor de ajuste a "1" (Activado).
4. Apague y encienda el interruptor principal.
Para D116:
32
Copiadora
2. Seleccione SP5-985-001 (Ajuste de NIC) y cambie el valor de ajuste a "0" (Apagado).

3. Seleccione SP5-985-002 (Ajuste de USB) y cambie el valor de ajuste a "0" (Apagado).
Configuracin de la copiadora
2. Seleccione SP5-801-001 y ejecute la inicializacin.

3. Salga del modo SP y, a continuacin, inicie el modo UP.
4. Seleccione "@Remote Service" ("Herramientas de usuario" > "Configuracin del sistema>
Herramientas de administrador" > "Seguridad ampliada" > @Remote Service") y seleccione
"Prohibir".
5. Salga del modo UP y, a continuacin, inicie el modo SP.
6. Seleccione SP5-870-003 y ejecute la inicializacin para @Remote.
7. Seleccione SP5-907-001 y especifique "Plug & Play".
8. Seleccione SP5-870-001 y ejecute la certificacin de escritura para @Remote S.
9. Seleccione SP5-302-002 y especifique la zona horaria.
10. Seleccione SP5-307-001, 003 y 004, y especifique los ajustes de ahorro de energa.
11. Salga del modo SP y apague y encienda el interruptor principal.
12. Inicie el modo UP.
13. Especifique la fecha y la hora con "Configurar fecha" o "Configurar hora" (Herramientas de
usuario" > "Configuracin del sistema" > "Configurar fecha" o "Configurar hora").
15. Compruebe el funcionamiento.
16. Realice una copia a tamao completo y compruebe si los registros de extremo a extremo y de
borde anterior son correctos. De lo contrario, ajuste los registros.
Configuracin del fax

Inicializacin de la unidad de fax
Al pulsar por primera vez la tecla de fax tras la instalacin, aparecer en pantalla LCD el mensaje de
error "Se ha producido un problema con SRAM / Se ha formateado la SRAM" durante la inicializacin
del programa de la unidad de fax. Apague y encienda el interruptor principal para borrar el mensaje
de la pantalla.
33
2. Instalacin
Si se produjera otro error despus de la inicializacin, podra entonces tratarse de un error

funcional.
1. Seleccione fax SP1-101-016 y especifique el cdigo de pas.
2. Seleccione fax SP3-101-001 y especifique el centro de servicio.
Auricular opcional
Compruebe que tiene los componentes y accesorios.
N.
Descripcin
Cantidad
Auricular
Base del auricular
Tornillos
Manual del auricular
El soporte para el auricular no est incluido en el kit del auricular opcional. El soporte se suministra
como accesorio de la copiadora.
34
Copiadora
1. Monte la abrazadera del auricular [A] (
x 2)
2. Retire la etiqueta de la base del auricular [B].

3. Monte la base [B] sobre la abrazadera (
4. Monte la base sobre la abrazadera (
x 2).
x 2).
5. Vuelva a colocar la etiqueta.
35
2. Instalacin
La abrazadera es un accesorio de la copiadora.

6. Instale el auricular sobre su base.
7. Conecte el cable del auricular a la clavija TEL y conecte el cable de telfono [A] como se ha
indicado anteriormente.
36
Unidad de bandeja de papel (D567)

Confirme que dispone de todos estos accesorios.
Descripcin
1. Etiquetas adhesivas de tamao de papel
Cantidad
1 hoja
2. Procedimiento de instalacin (para el tcnico de servicio)
3. Procedimiento de instalacin (para el usuario)
4. Tornillo roscador: M3x10
5. Hoja de precaucin de EMC
Antes de iniciar este procedimiento, desenchufe el cable de alimentacin de la mquina principal.
1. Retire la cinta adhesiva de [A] y la cinta adhesiva y el cartn de [B].

2. Saque un poco la bandeja de papel de la unidad; quite la cinta adhesiva y el cartn de [C] y
vuelva a introducir la bandeja.
37
2. Instalacin
3. Coloque la mquina sobre la unidad de la bandeja de papel.

Al instalar la segunda unidad de bandeja de papel, colquela sobre la primera unidad antes
de colocar la copiadora sobre la pareja de unidades de bandeja de papel.
4. Quite la bandeja de papel de la unidad de bandeja de papel.
5. Cargue papel en la bandeja. Ajuste las guas laterales y finales segn sea necesario. Si va a
utilizar papel B4 1/2"x 14", quite la gua final y pngala en el compartimento especial.
6. Vuelva a poner la bandeja de papel en la unidad.
38
7. Pegue las etiquetas de nmero de bandeja y de tamao de papel apropiadas en las posiciones
indicadas en la ilustracin.
39
2. Instalacin
Calefactor de la unidad de bandeja de papel

El calefactor de la unidad de bandeja de papel se instala slo para la primera unidad de bandeja de
papel.
Compruebe que tiene los siguientes accesorios.
Descripcin
40
Cantidad
1. Cable de tierra
2. Mazo de rel
3. Abrazaderas
4. Ncleo de ferrita
5. Tornillos de fijacin del calefactor
6. Tornillos de fijacin de la PTU
7. Tornillo de tierra
8. Etiqueta adhesiva para la copiadora
9. Etiqueta adhesiva de la unidad de papel
10. Brida
Antes de iniciar este procedimiento, desenchufe el cable de alimentacin de la mquina principal.

1. Quite de la copiadora la unidad de la bandeja de papel si ya est instalada.
2. Quite las bandejas de papel de la copiadora y de la unidad de la bandeja de papel.
41
2. Instalacin
3. Quite el tornillo de conexin a tierra [1] de la parte trasera de la unidad de la bandeja de papel.
4. Fije el calefactor [2] y el cable de conexin a tierra suministrado [3] a la unidad de la bandeja de
papel ( x 3). El tornillo [1] es el tornillo de conexin a tierra quitado en el paso anterior; los
tornillos [4] y [5] son los dos tornillos de fijacin del calefactor suministrados.
Asegrese de colocar el cable de conexin a tierra [3] y el cableado del calefactor [6] de
forma que no queden atrapados por la copiadora cuando la coloque sobre la unidad de la
bandeja de papel.
5. Coloque la copiadora sobre la unidad de la bandeja de papel.
42
6. Atornille la unidad de la bandeja de papel en su sitio utilizando los tres tornillos de fijacin de la
PTU suministrados.
7. Abra la puerta delantera y quite la bandeja de copia [7] (
1).
8. Cierre la puerta delantera.
1. Retire la tapa derecha.

2. Retire la cubierta de interface [8] (
3. Retire la cubierta trasera [9] (
x 1).
x 5).
43
2. Instalacin
4. Retire la tapa superior izquierda [10].

5. Quite la caja del controlador [11] (
6. Retire el soporte [12] (
44
x 1,
x 6).
x 3).
7. Pase el cableado del calefactor por el orificio [15] de la parte trasera de la copiadora.
8. Pase el cableado de rel [16] por la abertura [17] (parte trasera de la PSU) y por la abertura
[15].
9. Conecte el cableado de rel al cableado del calefactor [18].
10. Vuelva a introducir el cableado de rel en la copiadora.
45
2. Instalacin
11. Coloque el ncleo de ferrita [19] por encima del cableado de rel.
12. Empuje el ncleo de ferrita de forma que quede sobre el cableado del calefactor.
13. Enrolle una vuelta el cableado del calefactor alrededor del ncleo [20].
14. Coloque el ncleo de ferrita en la parte trasera de la copiadora [24], detrs de las abrazaderas
traseras.
15. Sujete el ncleo de ferrita con la brida suministrada [21].

16. Corte el trozo de brida sobrante.
17. Conecte el conector del cableado de rel [22] al conector grande de la parte delantera central
de la PSU.
18. Atornille el cable de conexin a tierra [23] al soporte de la PSU utilizando el tornillo de conexin
a tierra incluido.
19. Fije las abrazaderas [24] al soporte de la PSU.
20. Fije el cableado del calefactor por las abrazaderas.
21. Coloque el cableado de forma que la abrazadera delantera quede entre los dos extremos [25]
del cableado.
22. Apriete las abrazaderas.
23. Saque el cableado sobrante del calefactor por el orificio de la parte trasera.
46
Asegrese de que el mazo de cables pasa por el lateral de la placa de conexin a tierra en
la parte inferior de la apertura. (La parte frontal de la placa de conexin a tierra debe
permanecer libre).
24. Disponga el cableado sobrante de forma que quede debajo de la placa de la cubierta de la FCU.
25. Pegue las etiquetas adhesivas de precaucin en las posiciones mostradas en la ilustracin.
26. Vuelva a montar la copiadora.

27. Enchufe el cable de alimentacin y compruebe el funcionamiento.
47
2. Instalacin
Ranura USB 2.0/SD Tipo B

Este procedimiento explica cmo instalar la ranura USB 2.0/SD para el modelo SPF (D115).
Compruebe, con la lista siguiente, la cantidad y el estado de los accesorios:
N.
Descripcin
Ranura USB 2.0/SD
Placa de masa
Cable USB
Tornillo: M3 x 6 azul
Tornillo: M3 x 8
Tornillo:
Abrazadera
Etiqueta
1. Retire la tapa del conector USB [A].
48
Cantidad
2. Retire la tapa de la interface [A].
3. Abra la puerta derecha [A].

4. Tapa trasera [B] (
x 5)
5. Retire la tapa superior izquierda [A] como se ha indicado anteriormente.
49
2. Instalacin
6. Realice tres orificios en la tapa superior izquierda con un destornillador como se ha indicado
anteriormente.
Alise los tres orificios en la tapa superior izquierda.
7. Conecte la placa de tierra [A]

8. Fije la ranura USB2.0/SD [B] sobre la tapa superior izquierda como se ha indicado anteriormente
( x 1: M3 x 6 azul,
x 2: M3 x 8).
50
2
9. Realice un orificio para la abrazadera en la tapa superior izquierda con un destornillador como
se ha indicado anteriormente.
Alise el orificio en la tapa superior izquierda.
10. Coloque la tapa superior izquierda [A] en la unidad principal.

11. Coloque la tapa trasera.
51
2. Instalacin
12. Coloque la brida del cable [A] en la tapa superior izquierda (

anteriormente.
x 1) como se ha indicado
13. Conecte el cable USB [A] a USB-A.

14. Coloque la tapa de interface.
15. Enchufe el aparato y encienda el interruptor principal.
16. Entre en modo SP y, a continuacin, cambie el ajuste de SP1013-001 de 0 a 1.
17. Pegue la etiqueta adhesiva [A] a la ranura USB2.0/SD como se ha indicado anteriormente.
Al instalar el auricular
1. Siga los pasos 1 - 8 en Procedimiento de instalacin.
52
2
2. Realice dos orificios en la tapa superior izquierda con un destornillador como se ha indicado
anteriormente.
Alise los orificios de la tapa superior izquierda.
3. Monte la abrazadera del auricular [A] (
x 2)
4. Monte la base [B] sobre el soporte del auricular (
x 2)
53
2. Instalacin
5. Coloque el auricular en su soporte.

6. Conecte el cable del auricular a la clavija TEL y conecte el cable de telfono [A] como se ha
indicado anteriormente.
7. Siga los pasos 13 - 17 en Procedimiento de instalacin.
Comprobacin de la ranura de tarjeta SD/USB

1. Inserte una tarjeta SD o un dispositivo de memoria USB en la ranura.
Puede conectar slo un dispositivo de memoria extrable cada vez.
2. Cierre la tapa de la ranura de la memoria.
Si deja la tapa abierta, la electricidad esttica conducida a travs de la tarjeta SD insertada
podra causar un malfuncionamiento del aparato.
3. Compruebe que los ajustes anteriores se han borrado.
Si an queda algn ajuste anterior, pulse la tecla [Borrar modos].
4. Coloque un original en el cristal de exposicin.
5. Pulse [Almacenar archivo].
6. Pulse [Almacenar en dispositivo de memoria].
7. Pulse [OK].
8. Pulse la tecla [Inicio].
Cuando haya finalizado la escritura, aparecer un mensaje de confirmacin.
54
9. Pulse [Salir].
10. Extraiga el dispositivo de memoria de la ranura de memoria.
No extraiga el dispositivo de memoria durante el proceso de escritura.
55
2. Instalacin
Asa para la bandeja de papel opcional

El siguiente procedimiento es para la bandeja de papel o la unidad de bandeja de papel opcional.
Accesorios
Compruebe los accesorios y sus cantidades comparndolos con la siguiente tabla.
N.
56
Descripcin
Cantidad
Asa
Tornillo (M3 x 10)
Asa para la bandeja de papel opcional
1. Quite la bandeja de papel [A] de la copiadora principal.
2. Gire la bandeja de papel al lado opuesto.

3. Baje el asa de agarre de la bandeja de papel [B] hasta la ranura de la bandeja de papel como se
indica a travs de la flecha en la ilustracin anterior.
4. Monte el asa en la bandeja de papel (
x 2).
Para acoplar el asa auxiliar (con dos tornillos en la parte inferior), mantenga presionada el
asa por la parte frontal del cajn de papel (y apriete los tornillos) para asegurarse de que
haya el menor espacio posible entre la parte posterior del asa y el frontal del cajn del
papel.
57
2. Instalacin
5. Vuelva a colocar la bandeja de papel en la mquina.
58
Opciones del controlador

Aspectos generales
Este aparato cuenta con ranuras para tarjetas de interface y para tarjetas SD destinadas a conexiones
de interface y aplicaciones opcionales.
Ranura de I/F de tarjeta

La ranura [A] se usa para una de las conexiones de interface opcionales: (IEEE1284,
IEEE802.11a/g (LAN inalmbrica) o Gigabit Ethernet).
Ranura para tarjeta SD
La ranura [1] se utiliza para las opciones incluidas en las tarjetas SD. La aplicacin de la tarjeta
SD (impresora/escner o tarjeta de seguridad) debera instalarse en la ranura 1. Si se desea
utilizar ms de una aplicacin, mueva las aplicaciones a la misma tarjeta SD con SP5873.
La ranura [2] se utiliza para las opciones incluidas en las tarjetas SD y el servicio tcnico. La tarjeta
VM debe instalarse en la ranura 2.
Instalacin de LAN inalmbrica (IEEE 802.11a/g)
Antes de iniciar el siguiente procedimiento, desenchufe el cable de alimentacin del aparato.
59
2. Instalacin
Accesorios
N.
Descripcin
Cantidad
Adaptador inalmbrico
Tarjeta de red LAN inalmbrica
Tapa de la tarjeta LAN
Pgina de precaucin
Etiqueta
1. Retire la tapa de la interface [A] (
x 2).
2. Instale el adaptador inalmbrico en la ranura de I/F [B] (
x 2).
3. Instale la tarjeta de red LAN inalmbrica en el adaptador inalmbrico.

4. Coloque la tapa de la antena sobre la tarjeta de red LAN inalmbrica.
5. Encienda el interruptor de alimentacin.
6. Imprima la pgina de configuracin (Herramientas usuario/Contador > Ajustes de impresora >
Imprimir lista/prueba) y, a continuacin, compruebe que se detecta este dispositivo.
Si la recepcin es pobre, es posible que tenga que cambiar el aparato de sitio:
Asegrese de que el aparato no est situado cerca de un electrodomstico o equipo de cualquier
tipo que genere campos magnticos fuertes.
60
Ponga el aparato lo ms cerca posible del punto de acceso.
Ajustes del modo SP para LAN inalmbrica IEEE 802.11a/g

Se pueden establecer los siguientes comandos SP para 802.11a/g
N. de SP
Nombre
Funcin
5840 004
SSID
Utilizado para confirmar la configuracin SSID actual.
5840 006
Canales MAX
Establece el intervalo mximo de los valores de canal para el

pas.
5840 007
Canales MIN
Establece el intervalo mnimo de los valores de canal

permitidos para su pas.
5840 011
Seleccin de clave
WEP
Utilizado para seleccionar la clave WEP (predeterminado:

00).
5840 018
Comprobacin de
SSID
Utilizado para confirmar el SSID.
5840 020
Modo WEP
Utilizado para mostrar la longitud mxima de la cadena que

se puede usar para la entrada de la clave WEP.
Instalacin de IEEE 1284
Antes de iniciar el siguiente procedimiento, desenchufe el cable de alimentacin del aparato.
Accesorios
N.
Descripcin
Cantidad
Unidad de interface de IEEE1284
Hoja de UL
Pgina de precaucin
61
2. Instalacin
x 2).
2. Instale la placa de IEEE 1284 en la ranura de I/F [B] (
x 2).

4. Imprima la pgina de configuracin (Herramientas usuario/Contador > Ajustes de impresora >
Imprimir lista/prueba) y, a continuacin, compruebe que se detecta este dispositivo.
Tarjeta VM de tipo L (D467)

Accesorios
Compruebe los accesorios y sus cantidades comparndolos con la siguiente tabla.Accesorios
N.
62
Descripcin
Cantidad
Tarjeta VM SD
Etiqueta
Instalacin
x 1).
2. Apague la mquina.
3. Inserte la tarjeta SD [A] en la ranura SD 2 (inferior).
Esta tarjeta SD debe instalarse en la ranura 2, la ranura inferior.
Gigabit Ethernet
Antes de realizar el siguiente procedimiento, desenchufe el cable de alimentacin de la mquina.
63
2. Instalacin
1. Retire la tapa de la ranura de interface [A] (
x 2).
2. Instale la placa de Gigabit Ethernet (tornillo moleteado x 2) en la ranura de la tarjeta de interface

[B].
3. Conecte un ncleo de ferrita [A] al cable de interface Ethernet y, a continuacin, conecte el otro
ncleo de ferrita [B] a unos 10 cm del extremo del cable de interface Ethernet.
4. Conecte el cable de interface Ethernet al puerto Gigabit Ethernet.
Compruebe que el aparato reconoce la opcin (consulte Comprobacin de todas las conexiones al
final de esta seccin).
64
Disco duro opcional (D577)

Comprobacin de componentes
N.
Descripcin
Cantidad
Unidad de disco duro
Tornillo
Tarjeta de seguridad
Hoja de precaucin de EMC
65
2. Instalacin

2. Tapa de interface [B] (
3. Tapa trasera [C] (
66
x 1)
x 5)
4. Tapa de la caja del control [A] (
x 13)
5. Retire el tornillo [A] del circuito del controlador.

6. Instale la unidad de disco duro [B] en el circuito del controlador (
x 3).
El tornillo [A] se utiliza en este paso.

7. Vuelva a instalar la tapa de la caja del controlador y la tapa trasera en la mquina.
Despus de instalar el nuevo disco duro

1. Ejecute SP5832-001 para formatear el disco duro.
2. Ejecute SP5832-001 para copiar los datos de sello prestablecido desde el firmware hasta el
disco duro.
3. Ejecute SP5846-040 para copiar la libreta de direcciones en el disco duro desde el circuito del
controlador.
4. Ejecute SP5846-041 para permitir que el usuario acceda a la libreta de direcciones.
Instalacin de la tarjeta de seguridad

1. Introduzca la tarjeta de seguridad en la ranura SD.
Para D115, utilice la ranura 2 (inferior) y una la tarjeta de seguridad con la tarjeta de la
impresora/escner con SP5-873-001. Saque la tarjeta de seguridad de la ranura SD 2
67
2. Instalacin
despus de eliminar las aplicaciones de seguridad y guarde la tarjeta de seguridad en un

lugar seguro.
Para D116, utilice la ranura 1 (superior).
2. Active el modo SP.
3. Introduzca el nmero de serie de la mquina con SP 5811-001.
4. Entre en modo SP y seleccione EJECUTAR con SP5-878-001.

5. Seleccione SP5878-002 y, a continuacin, pulse "Ejecutar" en la pantalla.
6. Salga del modo SP despus de que aparezca "Completed" (Finalizado) en la pantalla.
Activacin de las aplicaciones de seguridad

1. Asegrese de que los ajustes siguientes no estn configurados en sus valores predeterminados de
fbrica:
Contrasea de inicio de sesin del supervisor
Nombre de inicio de sesin del administrador
Contrasea de inicio de sesin del administrador
Si cualquiera de estos ajustes tiene el valor predeterminado de fbrica, indique al cliente que
debe cambiarlo para poder realizar el procedimiento de instalacin.
2. Compruebe si est activado el ajuste "Autenticacin de Admin.".
[System Settings] [Administrator Tools] [Administrator Authentication Management] - [Admin.
Authentication] ([Ajustes del sistema] [Herramientas del administrador] [Gestin de
autenticacin de administrador] [Autenticacin de administrador])
Si este ajuste est en OFF, indique al cliente que debe ponerlo en ON para poder realizar el
procedimiento de instalacin.
3. Asegrese de que Herramientas del administrador est activado (seleccionado).
[Configuracin del sistema] [Herramientas del administrador] [Gestin de autenticacin del
administrador] - [Ajustes disponibles]
Si este ajuste est desactivado (no seleccionado), indique al cliente que debe activarlo
(seleccionarlo) para poder realizar el procedimiento de instalacin.
4. Consulte el Manual de referencia de seguridad para obtener informacin sobre la activacin de
las aplicaciones de seguridad (unidad de cifrado del disco duro y DataOverwriteSecurity).
Recuperacin de Cifrado del disco duro de un problema del dispositivo

El siguiente diagrama de flujo muestra la posibilidad de recuperacin del Cifrado del disco duro si uno
de los dispositivos relacionados con l est defectuoso.
68
Restauracin de la clave de cifrado

Al sustituir el circuito del controlador por un modelo en el que se haya instalado la unidad de cifrado
del disco duro, es preciso actualizar la clave de cifrado.
1. Prepare una tarjeta SD que se haya inicializado.
2. Cree la carpeta "restore_key" en la tarjeta SD.
3. Cree un archivo con el nombre "nvram_key.txt" en la carpeta "restore_key" de la tarjeta SD.
4. Pida a un administrador que introduzca la clave de cifrado (impresa anteriormente por el usuario)
en el archivo "nvram_key.txt".
5. Retire slo la unidad de disco duro (
HDD).

7. Confirme que el mensaje que aparece en la pantalla LCD le indica que instale la tarjeta SD
(guardando la clave de cifrado) en la mquina.
8. Apague el interruptor de alimentacin.
9. Inserte la tarjeta SD que contiene la clave de cifrado en la ranura 1.
10. Encienda el interruptor de alimentacin principal para que la mquina restablezca
automticamente la clave de cifrado en la memoria flash de la placa del controlador.
11. Apague el interruptor de alimentacin principal una vez que la mquina haya vuelto al estado
normal.
12. Retire la tarjeta SD de la ranura 1.
69
2. Instalacin
13. Vuelva a instalar la unidad de disco duro.
Borrado de la NVRAM
Al sustituir la placa del controlador por un modelo en el que se haya instalado la unidad de cifrado del
disco duro y el cliente haya perdido la clave de cifrado, es preciso borrar la NVRAM para recuperar la
unidad de cifrado del disco duro.
1. Prepare una tarjeta SD que se haya inicializado.
2. Cree la carpeta "restore_key" en la tarjeta SD.
3. Cree un archivo con el nombre "nvram_key.txt" en la carpeta "restore_key" de la tarjeta SD.
4. Introduzca "nvclear" en el archivo "nvram_key.txt".
6. Confirme que el mensaje que aparece en la pantalla LCD le indica que instale la tarjeta SD
(guardando la clave de cifrado) en la mquina.
8. Inserte la tarjeta SD que contiene "nvclear" en la ranura 1.
9. Encienda el interruptor de alimentacin principal para que la mquina restablezca
automticamente la clave de cifrado en la memoria flash de la placa del controlador.
10. Apague el interruptor de alimentacin principal una vez que la mquina haya vuelto al estado
normal.
11. Retire la tarjeta SD de la ranura 1.
13. Inicialice la NVRAM (SP5801-001) y la unidad de disco duro (SP5832-001) con el modo SP.
14. El usuario debe activar la unidad de cifrado del disco duro con una herramienta del usuario.
70
Tablas de mantenimiento
Consulte "Apndices" para obtener la informacin siguiente:
Tablas de mantenimiento preventivo
71
Cmo poner a cero el contador de

mantenimiento preventivo
Reinicie el contador de mantenimiento preventivo despus del trabajo de mantenimiento.

2. Seleccione SP7-804-001.
3. Pulse la tecla EJECUTAR [A]. Cuando el programa finaliza con normalidad, se muestra el mensaje
"Completado". Si el programa no finaliza con normalidad, se muestra un mensaje de error.
4. Pulse la tecla Escape [B] para finalizar el programa.
72
Precauciones
General
Antes de la sustitucin, apague el interruptor principal y desenchufe la mquina.

Antes de apagar el interruptor principal, compruebe que no hay ningn componente mecnico en
funcionamiento. Si apaga el interruptor principal mientras hay componentes mecnicos funcionando,
estos pueden pararse fuera de sus posiciones de reposo. El componente en cuestin se daar si trata
de quitarlo cuando no est en la posicin de reposo.
Pilas de litio
Un cambio incorrecto de las pilas de litio en el controlador o en la unidad de fax supone un riesgo
de explosin. Sustituya las pilas slo con el mismo tipo de pilas o un tipo equivalente
recomendado por el fabricante. Deseche las bateras usadas de acuerdo con las instrucciones del
fabricante.
Cable libre de halgeno
Tenga especial cuidado cuando manipule cables.

De conformidad con la normativa local, en esta mquina se utilizan cables libres de halgeno. Los
cables libres de halgeno son ecolgicos pero son menos fuertes que los cables convencionales. Estos
cables pueden daarse en cualquiera de los siguientes casos:
Cuando el cable se queda atrapado entre objetos duros como abrazaderas, tornillos, placas de
circuito impreso y cubiertas exteriores.
Cuando el cable roza contra un objeto duro como abrazaderas, tornillos, placas de circuito
impreso y cubiertas exteriores.
Cuando el cable es araado por un objeto duro como abrazaderas, tornillos, placas de circuito
impreso, cubiertas exteriores destornilladores o uas.
73
Electricidad esttica
Toque siempre una superficie con conexin a tierra para descargar la electricidad esttica de las
manos antes de manipular tarjetas SD, placas de circuito impreso o placas de memoria.
74
Herramientas especiales y lubricantes
Herramientas especiales y lubricantes

Nmero de pieza
Descripcin
Cantidad
A1849501
Herramientas de ajuste del sistema ptico (2

unidades/juego)
1 juego
A2929500
Grfico de pruebas S5S (10 unidades/juego)
1 juego
VSSM9000
Multmetro digital - Fluke 87
N8036701
Tarjeta de memoria flash (4 MB)
N8031000
Estuche para la tarjeta de memoria flash
A2579300
Grasa Barrierta S552R
52039502
Grasa de silicona 501
75
Tapas exteriores y panel de mandos

Tapa trasera

2. Tapa de interface [B] (
x 1)

4. Tapa trasera [C] (
x 5)
Bandeja de copias
Asegrese de que los cables que hay debajo de la bandeja de copias estn en su sitio antes de
volver a montar la copiadora. Si quedan atrapados entre la bandeja de copias y la tapa interior,
pueden daarse gravemente.
76
4
1. Abra la puerta frontal [A].
2. Bandeja de copias [B] (
x1)
Reensamblaje:
Hay varios cables debajo del extremo delantero de la bandeja de copias. Para poner estos cables en
su sitio, tire suavemente de ellos hacia la izquierda (hacia la PSU) y sujtelos mientras coloca la
bandeja de copias.
Panel de mandos y cubiertas superiores
77
1. Desinstale el ARDF.
2. Tapa posterior (
Pg.76)
3. Deslice la tapa superior izquierda [A] hacia atrs.

4. Escala trasera [B] (
x 3)
5. Deslice la tapa superior derecha [C] hacia atrs.

6. Tapa delantera izquierda [D] (
7. Panel de operaciones [E] (
x 4,
x 2)
x 1)
8. Tapa delantera derecha [F]
Puerta derecha

2. Suelte la brida [B].
3. Puerta derecha (
78
x 1)
Bandeja bypass
4
1. Empuje hacia dentro las guas tope [A].
Sensor de la tapa del cristal de exposicin
1. Tapa posterior (
2. Escala posterior (
Pg.76)
Pg.77 "Panel de mandos y cubiertas superiores")
3. Sensor de la tapa del cristal de exposicin [A] (
x 1, gancho)
79
Unidad del escner

Para limpiar espejos y lentes, utilice un cepillo soplador o un algodn humedecido.
Cristal de exposicin
Para limpiar el cristal de exposicin, utilice alcohol o limpiacristales.
1. Tapa posterior (
Pg.76)
2. Escala posterior, tapa superior derecha (
3. Cristal de exposicin [A].

Reensamblaje
Asegrese de que la marca del cristal queda en la esquina trasera izquierda y que el borde izquierdo
del cristal est alineado con la arista de soporte [B] del bastidor.
Ajuste
Al sustituir la placa blanca, realice el ajuste automtico de escaneo (
SP4-428-001).
Bloque de lentes
No desmonte el bloque de lentes. El bloque de lentes se ajusta con precisin antes del envo.
No toque los tornillos del CCD. El CCD se ajusta con precisin antes del envo.
80
Unidad del escner
4
1. Cristal de exposicin (
Pg.80)
2. Tapa frontal izquierda, panel de mandos (
3. Suelte el cable de las cuatro abrazaderas [A].

4. Bloque de lentes [B] (
x 4, 1 cable plano)
No afloje los tornillos inmovilizados con pintura que mantienen fija la unidad de la lente.
Tras la instalacin de un bloque de lentes nuevo, realice ajustes de copia (
"Ajuste del rea de imagen de la copia").
Pg.131
Lmpara de exposicin, circuito estabilizador de la lmpara

No doble el cable de exposicin de la lmpara de exposicin.
81
Pg.80)
2. Tapa frontal izquierda, panel de mandos (
3. Deslice el primer escner hasta una posicin en la que las tapas metlicas no obstaculicen la
lmpara ni el escner.
4. Desenchufe el conector de la lmpara [A].
5. Retire lo siguiente (uno o ambos):
Lmpara de exposicin [B] (
x 1)
Circuito estabilizador de la lmpara [C] (
x 2, 1 cable plano)
Motor del escner

1. Tapa posterior (
Pg.76)
2. Escala posterior, tapa superior derecha (
82
Unidad del escner
3. Retire el refuerzo superior derecho [A] (
4. Motor del escner [B] (
x 3).
x 3, 1 resorte, 3 soportes de tornillo,
x 1)
Reinstalacin
Al volver a instalar, coloque los tornillos sin apretarlos; despus ponga el muelle en su sitio y apriete los
tornillos.
83
Sensor de posicin inicial del escner
4
1. Tapa posterior (
Pg.76)
2. Tapa frontal izquierda (
3. Sensor de posicin de reposo del escner [A] (
x 1, gancho)
Mueva el primer escner desde la posicin de reposo si le resulta difcil quitar el sensor.
Ajuste de la alineacin del escner

1. Tapa posterior (
Pg.76)
2. Escala posterior, tapa superior derecha, tapa frontal izquierda, panel de mandos (
"Panel de mandos y cubiertas superiores")
Pg.80)
4. Afloje los 2 tornillos que sujetan las correas del primer y segundo escner.
84
Pg.77
Unidad del escner
5. Deslice el primer y segundo escner de forma que los cuatro elementos siguientes queden ms o
menos alineados en los lados delantero y trasero:
El orificio de la tapa de la copiadora

El orificio en el primer escner
El orificio de la esquina derecha del segundo escner
El orificio de la base del escner
6. Introduzca las dos herramientas de ajuste del sistema ptico [A] y ajuste los escneres como sea
necesario hasta que las herramientas pasen por los cuatro orificios.
7. Apriete los dos tornillos aflojados en el paso 2 anterior, de forma que las correas queden
firmemente sujetas en su sitio.
8. Retire las herramientas de ajuste.
85
Fusin
Unidad de fusin
Antes de manipular la unidad de fusin, asegrese de que la unidad est suficientemente fra. La
unidad de fusin puede alcanzar temperaturas muy elevadas.
1. Bandeja de copias (
Pg.76)
2. Abra la puerta derecha.

3. Tapa del conector [A] (
x 1)
Al reinstalar, fije el cable de conexin a tierra.

4. Unidad de fusin [B] (
86
x 2,
x 4)
Fusin
Sensor de salida
4
1. Unidad de fusin (
2. Sensor de salida [A] (
Pg.86)
x 1)
Uas del expulsor del rodillo de calor
Tenga cuidado de no daar las uas del expulsor del rodillo de calor ni los muelles de tensin.
87
1. Unidad de fusin (
Pg.86)
2. Separe la unidad de fusin en dos secciones: la seccin del rodillo de calor [A] y la seccin del
rodillo de presin [B] ( x 2).
Despus de retirar los tornillos, baje hasta la mitad la seccin del rodillo de presin y deslcela
hacia la parte delantera para separarla.
3. Rodillos de soporte [C]
4. Uas de expulsin del rodillo de calor [D]
Quite el espaciador [E] ( x 1) si est quitando el conjunto del rodillo de calor (
88 "Rodillo de calor y lmpara de fusin").
Rodillo de calor y lmpara de fusin
No toque la lmpara de fusin ni los rodillos con las manos descubiertas.
88
Pg.
Fusin
4
1. Uas del expulsor del rodillo de calor y espaciadores (
2. Conjunto del rodillo de calor [A] (
Pg.87)
x 2)
3. Lmpara de fusin [B].

Durante el reensamblaje, compruebe que la direccin de la lmpara de fusin es correcta.
4. Rodillo de calor [C] (2 arandelas en C, 1 espaciador, 1 engranaje, 2 casquillos, 1 tapa [D]).

Reensamblaje
Asegrese de que:
La lmpara de fusin est correctamente colocada.
La lmpara de fusin no toca la parte interna del rodillo de calor.
89
Termointerruptor y termistor
4
1. Conjunto del rodillo de calor (
2. Termointerruptor (
3. Termistor (
Pg.88 "Rodillo de calor y lmpara de fusin")
x 2 para cada uno)
x 1)
Reensamblaje
Compruebe lo siguiente:
Que el termistor est en contacto con el rodillo de calor.
Que el rodillo de calor gira uniformemente.
No recicle un termointerruptor que ya se ha abierto. Si lo hace, no podremos garantizar su
seguridad.
90
Fusin
Rodillo de presin
4
1. Separe la unidad de fusin en dos secciones (
Pg.87).
2. Gua de entrada de fusin [A]
3. Dos muelles [B][C]

4. Dos brazos de presin [D][E]
5. Casquillo [F].
6. Rodillo de presin [G].
91
Comprobacin de la banda de contacto

Podr comprobar la banda de contacto para ver si la unidad de fusin est en buen estado,
especialmente si el rodillo de calor y el rodillo de presin estn correctamente instalados.
2. Seleccione SP1-109-001.
3. Especifique "1".
4. Pulse la tecla OK.
5. Pulse la tecla
. Se activa el modo de copia.
6. Coloque una hoja OHP en la bandeja bypass.

7. Pulse la tecla . La copiadora alimentar la hoja OHP y la detendr entre el rodillo de calor y el
rodillo de presin durante unos 20 segundos.
8. Espere hasta que salga la hoja OHP.
9. Pulse la tecla
10. Asegrese de que est seleccionado SP1-109-001.

11. Especifique "0".
13. Salga del modo SP.
Ver una lnea opaca en la hoja OHP. Es la marca de la banda de contacto. La banda de contacto
normal es simtrica respecto de la hoja OHP. Ambos extremos son ligeramente ms gruesos que el
centro.
No hay especificaciones ni normas para la banda de contacto de esta copiadora.
92
PCU y lmpara de extincin
PCU y lmpara de extincin

Al manipular la unidad del fotoconductor (PCU), tenga mucho cuidado:
No toque el tambor del OPC con las manos descubiertas. Cuando el tambor del OPC est sucio,
lmpielo con un pao seco o con un algodn humedecido y despus con un pao seco.
No utilice alcohol ni otros productos qumicos para limpiar el tambor del OPC. Estas sustancias
daan la superficie del tambor del OPC
Guarde las PCU en un lugar fresco y seco.
No exponga el OPC a ningn gas corrosivo, como el amonaco.
No agite una PCU usada. El tner y el revelador restantes pueden derramarse.
Deseche las PCU usadas de acuerdo con la normativa local.
PCU

La PCU puede quedarse atascada si intenta quitarla mientras la puerta delantera est
cerrada.
2. Abra la puerta delantera.
3. Retire el soporte de la botella de tner.
Limpie el tner que se haya derramado por la zona de la botella de tner y el interior de la
puerta delantera.
4. Extraiga la PCU [A] (
x 1).
93
5. Al instalar una nueva PCU, retire la espuma de estireno y las etiquetas (

el captulo "Instalacin").
Pg.27 "Copiadora" en
Inicializacin
Cuando encienda el interruptor principal, la copiadora inicializar automticamente la nueva PCU.
Cuando la copiadora est ejecutando la inicializacin, es importante que:
No apague el interruptor principal.
No abra ni quite las cubiertas exteriores.
Lmpara de extincin
1. PCU (
Pg.93)
2. Lmpara de extincin [A] (
94
x 1)
Extractor y motor principal
Extractor y motor principal

Extractor
1. Tapa posterior (
2. Extractor [A] (
Pg.76)
x 2,
x 1)
Reensamblaje
Asegrese de que la flecha [B] del bastidor est orientada hacia atrs. La flecha indica la direccin del
flujo de aire.
95
Motor principal
1. Tapa posterior (
Pg.76)
2. Placa de alimentacin de alta tensin (

3. Placa de tierra [A] (
Pg.115)
x 1)
4. Motor principal con tapa de engranajes [B] (
x 1,
x 7,
x 2, 2 casquillos)
5. Todos los engranajes [C].

6. Motor principal [D] (
x 4)
Reensamblaje
Fije el motor principal antes de fijar los engranajes.
96
Alimentacin del papel

Rodillo de alimentacin de papel y almohadilla de friccin
Al manipular la bandeja de papel o el rodillo de alimentacin de papel, tenga mucho cuidado:
No toque la superficie de los rodillos de avance de papel.
Para evitar atascos de papel, ajuste correctamente las guas laterales y de extremo de la bandeja
de papel.
1. Bandeja de papel
2. Eje [A] (
x 1)
3. Retire lo siguiente (uno o ambos):

Rodillo de alimentacin de papel [B].
Almohadilla de friccin [C].
97
Sensor de fin de papel
4
1. Bandeja de papel
3. PCU (
Pg.93)
4. Sensor de fin de papel [A] (
x 1)
Sensor de registro
1. Bandeja de papel
3. Retire la gua de papel [A].
Retire la gua de papel (pinza x 1) si le resulta difcil quitar el sensor de registro.
98
4. Detector del sensor de registro [B].

5. Sensor de registro [C] (
x 1)
Desconecte el conector (CN127 [D]) si le resulta difcil quitar el sensor de registro.
Sensor de papel agotado en bypass
1. Puerta derecha (
Pg.78)
2. Compartimento del sensor [A].

3. Sensor de fin de papel bypass [B] (
x 1)
99
Rodillo de alimentacin bypass
4
1. Puerta derecha (
Pg.78)
2. D la vuelta al alojamiento del rodillo de alimentacin [A] (
x 2).
3. Eje del rodillo de alimentacin [B] (2 uas de retencin [C], 1 espaciador [D]).
4. Rodillo de alimentacin bypass [E].
100
Embrague de alimentacin bypass y almohadilla de friccin
4
1. Tapa posterior (
Pg.76)
2. Puerta derecha (
Pg.78)
3. Desconecte el conector del embrague de alimentacin bypass [A] (CN93).

4. Alojamiento del rodillo de alimentacin bypass [B] (
5. Embrague de alimentacin bypass [C] (
x 2)
x 1)
6. Almohadilla de friccin bypass [D].
101
Embragues de registro y alimentacin de papel
1. Bandeja de papel
3. Placa de tierra [A] (
Pg.115)
x 1)
4. Tapa del engranaje [B] (
x 1,
x 7,
x 2, 2 engranajes)
No quite el motor principal de la tapa de engranajes.
102
5. Placa de tierra [C] (
x 1)
6. Empuje lentamente el soporte del embrague [D] y quite el embrague de registro (
x 1,
x 1).
7. Embrague de alimentacin de papel [F].
103
Transferencia de imgenes
Rodillo de transferencia
No toque el rodillo de transferencia con las manos descubiertas.

No arae el rodillo de transferencia. El rodillo de transferencia se estropea con facilidad.
1. Puerta derecha (
Pg.78)
2. Levante las palancas [A] y [B] de los extremos del rodillo de transferencia de imgenes.
3. Suelte el rodillo de transferencia de imgenes [C].
Reensamblaje
Asegrese de que los muelles [D] estn en las posiciones originales.
104
Transferencia de imgenes
Sensor ID y rodillo dplex
1. Puerta derecha (
Pg.78)
2. Gua inferior [A].

3. Soportes del rodillo libre [B][C].
4. Rodillo libre [D].
5. Gua del rodillo [E].
6. Unidad de transferencia [F].
7. Engranaje unidireccional [G] (
8. Rodillo de dplex [H] (
x 1)
x 1, 3 casquillos)
105
4
9. Sensor ID [I] (
x 1)
Placa de descarga
1. Puerta derecha (
Pg.78)
2. Placa de descarga [A]
106
BICU y circuito del controlador

Antes de la sustitucin, apague el interruptor principal y desenchufe la mquina.
Antes de apagar el interruptor principal, compruebe que no hay ningn componente mecnico en
funcionamiento. Si apaga el interruptor principal mientras hay componentes mecnicos
funcionando, estos pueden pararse fuera de sus posiciones de reposo. El componente en cuestin
se daar si trata de quitarlo cuando no est en la posicin de reposo.
BICU
Preparacin
Antes de sustituir la NVRAM, asegrese de guardar los datos de la NVRAM.
Guardar desde la NVRAM de BICU a una tarjeta SD ( Pg.142 "Carga/descarga de los
datos de la NVRAM" en el "Modo de servicio del sistema" de los apndices de este manual).
Procedimiento
1. Tapa posterior (
Pg.76)
2. Tapa superior izquierda del escner (

3. Caja del controlador [A] (
x 6,
Pg.77)
x 1)
107
4. Placa de tierra [B] (

5. BICU [C] (todos
x 2)
, 2 cables planos,
x 6)
Al sustituir la BICU, quite la NVRAM [D] del circuito. Instale la NVRAM en el circuito nuevo.
6. Cuando haya sustituido la NVRAM, copie en ella los datos guardados.
Desde una tarjeta SD a la NVRAM ( Pg.142 "Carga/descarga de los datos de la
NVRAM" en el "Modo de servicio del sistema" de los apndices de este manual).
Circuito del controlador

Preparacin:
Antes de sustituir el circuito del controlador, asegrese de imprimir los datos SMC o guardar los
datos de la NVRAM.
Guardar desde la NVRAM del controlador a una tarjeta SD ( Pg.142 "Carga/descarga de
los datos de la NVRAM" en el "Modo de servicio del sistema" de los apndices de este manual).
Procedimiento
1. Tapa posterior (
Pg.76)
2. Tapa superior izquierda del escner (

108
Pg.77)
3. FCU (Unidad de control de fax) (
Pg.118)
4. Extraiga la tarjeta SD de la impresora/escner.

5. Retire la tapa de interface [A] (o las opciones de interface si se han instalado) (
6. Retire el soporte [B] (
x 2).
x 1).
7. Retire la tapa de USB [C].
109
8. Retire el conector de rel [A].

9. Retire la placa de tierra [B] (
x 1).
10. Retire el circuito del controlador con las guas [C] (
110
x 6).
11. Libere los ganchos y, a continuacin, extraiga las guas [A].

12. Extraiga la DIMM [B] si est instalada.
Al sustituir el circuito del controlador, retire las NVRAM del circuito. Instale las NVRAM en el
circuito nuevo.
Cuando instale una nueva placa del controlador

1. Instale la NVRAM de la vieja placa de controlador en una nueva placa de controlador.
1. Instale la nueva placa de controlador en la mquina.
2. Desconecte los cables del disco duro de la placa del controlador, si se ha instalado el disco duro
opcional.
Desconectar los cables del disco duro es muy importante. De lo contrario, el disco duro se
formatea automticamente y todos los datos que contiene se pierden debido a la limitacin
de seguridad.
3. Monte de nuevo la mquina.
4. Encienda el interruptor de alimentacin principal del aparato.
Si no se ha instalado el disco duro opcional, el procedimiento de instalacin se ha
completado.
111
Si se ha instalado el disco duro opcional, vaya al paso siguiente.

5. Apague la alimentacin principal de la mquina, y luego conecte los cables del disco duro de
nuevo.
No olvide imprimir los informes SMC ("Datos del modo SP" y "Datos de registro") antes de sustituir
las NVRAM.
Mantenga alejadas las NVRAM de cualquier objeto que pueda producir electricidad esttica. La
electricidad esttica puede daar los datos de la NVRAM.
Asegrese de que la NVRAM est correctamente instalada en la placa del controlador.
Al sustituir la NVRAM del circuito del controlador

1. Desconecte los cables del disco duro de la placa del controlador.
Desconectar los cables del disco duro es muy importante. De lo contrario, el disco duro se
formatea automticamente y todos los datos que contiene se pierden debido a la limitacin
de seguridad.
2. Instale una nueva NVRAM en el controlador. Monte de nuevo la mquina.

Al sustituir la NVRAM [A], asegrese de que queda correctamente instalada.
La marca [B] en la NVRAM debera estar orientada hacia abajo (vista desde la parte
posterior de la mquina).
112
3. Extraiga la tarjeta de seguridad o la tarjeta de la impresora/escner de la ranura SD 1.

4. Instale una nueva tarjeta de seguridad en la ranura SD 1.
5. Encienda el interruptor principal.
6. Se produce un SC995-02.
7. Apague la mquina.
8. Conecte los cables del disco duro a la placa del controlador.
9. Vuelva a ensamblar la mquina, y encindala.
10. Haga la autocomprobacin del control de proceso
11. Realice el ACC para el programa de aplicacin de la copiadora.
12. Realice el ACC para el programa de aplicacin de la impresora.
13. Ejecute SP5-878-001 para instalar la aplicacin DataOverwriteSecurity.
14. Ejecute SP5878-002 para instalar la aplicacin de Cifrado del disco duro.
15. Si es necesario, una todas las aplicaciones en una tarjeta SD en la ranura SD 1 con SP5831-001.
16. Copie los datos antiguos de la NVRAM en la nueva NVRAM con SP5-825 o introduzca los datos
SMC en el aparato. (Para obtener ms detalles, consulte Pg.142 "Carga/descarga de los datos
de la NVRAM" en el "Modo de servicio del sistema" de los apndices de este manual)
113
Otras sustituciones
Motor dplex
1. Tapa posterior (
Pg.76)
2. Motor dplex [A] ( x 1,
114
x 2)
Otras sustituciones
Circuito de alimentacin de alta tensin
1. Tapa posterior (
Pg.76)
2. Placa de alimentacin de alta tensin [A] (todos
x 4)
Si va a extraer el solenoide de liberacin por contacto, retire el panel de aislamiento [B] (

Pg.117) o la tapa del engranaje ( Pg.102 "Embragues de registro y alimentacin de
papel").
115
PSU
1. Abra la puerta delantera.

Pg.76)
3. Conjunto de la PSU [A] (
4. PSU [B] (
116
x 4,
x 4,
x 8)
x 6)
Otras sustituciones
Solenoide de liberacin de contacto
1. Tapa posterior (
Pg.76)
Pg.115)
3. Solenoide de liberacin de contacto [A] (1 resorte,
x 1)
Embrague de suministro de tner
1. Soporte de la botella de tner.
117
3. Tapa posterior (
Pg.76)
Pg.76)
4. Desconecte el conector de C19 de la BICU.

5. Empuje el acoplador del embrague [A] hacia el lado trasero, y quite la pinza de sujecin [B] de la
parte trasera de la copiadora.
6. Acoplador y muelle [C].
7. Levante el embrague de suministro de tner [D] y qutelo.
Al quitarlo, observe cmo el cable pasa por una abrazadera y tambin el lugar por donde
pasa en la parte trasera de la mquina.
4
FCU
Pilas de litio
Un cambio incorrecto de las pilas de litio en el controlador o en la unidad de fax supone un riesgo
de explosin. Sustituya las pilas slo con el mismo tipo de pilas o un tipo equivalente
recomendado por el fabricante. Deseche las bateras usadas de acuerdo con las instrucciones del
fabricante.
Procedimiento
118
Otras sustituciones
2. Tapa trasera [B] (
x 5).
3. Tapa superior izquierda del escner [C]
4. Tapa de la caja del control [A] (
5. FCU [A] (
x 4,
x 13)
x 1)
6. Cuando sustituya la placa FCU, retire la placa MBU de la FCU anterior e instlela en la nueva
FCU.
119
7. Configure la fecha y la hora correctas con Herramientas de usuario > Configuracin del sistema >
Configuracin del temporizador > Configurar fecha/Configurar hora.
No apague el interruptor de la batera (SW1).
Ejecute SP6-101 en el "Fax SP" para imprimir los parmetros del sistema y comprobar los
ajustes.
120
Unidad lser
Unidad lser
Antes de la sustitucin, apague el interruptor principal y desenchufe la copiadora. El rayo lser
puede provocar graves lesiones en la vista.
No toque los tornillos del circuito LD de la unidad LD. No intente ajustar ninguna pieza de la
unidad LD. La unidad LD se ajusta con precisin antes del envo.
No toque el espejo poligonal, el cristal protector ni las lentes con las manos descubiertas.
Ubicacin de la etiqueta de Precaucin
Unidad lser
1. Conjunto de fuente de alimentacin elctrica (PSU) (
Pg.116)
2. Soporte de la botella de tner.

3. Unidad lser [A] (
x 3,
x 2)
Reensamblaje
121
Asegrese de que el cable [B] pasa por debajo de la unidad.
Unidad LD y motor del espejo poligonal
1. Unidad lser (
Pg.121)
2. Tapa de la unidad lser [A] (

3. Unidad LD [B] (
x 2, 1 placa de tierra)
x 2)
4. Motor del espejo poligonal [C] (
x 4)
Reensamblaje
Compruebe que el espejo poligonal y la lente toroidal estn limpios. El polvo y otras sustancias
extraas pueden afectar al funcionamiento de la unidad LD.
122
ARDF
ARDF
ARDF
1. Tapa posterior (
Pg.76)
2. Retire los cables de interface del DF [A] (

3. Retire el cable de tierra [B] (
x 2, ganchos x 2).
x 1).
4. Quite el perno [C].

5. Retire el ARDF [D].
123
Tapa trasera del DF
4
1. Abra el ARDF [A].
2. Suelte los tres ganchos
3. Abra la tapa izquierda del DF [B].

4. Abra la bandeja de originales [C].
5. Cubierta trasera del DF [D] (
x 1, gancho x 4)
Unidad de alimentacin de originales

1. Abra la tapa izquierda del DF.
124
ARDF
2. Unidad de alimentacin de originales [A] (c x 1)
Rodillo de separacin
2. Unidad de alimentacin de originales (
Pg.124)
3. Tapa del rodillo de separacin [A] (gancho x 2)

4. Retn del rodillo de separacin [B] (gancho)
5. Rodillo de separacin [C]
Placa de accionamiento del DF

1. Tapa posterior del DF (
Pg.124)
125
4
2. Placa de accionamiento del DF [A] (
x 2,
x 4, cable de conexin a tierra x 1)
Sensor de inversin y presencia de original del DF

3. Embrague de alimentacin del DF (
Pg.124)
Pg.130)
4. Placa gua de alimentacin de originales [A] (

5. Sensor de presencia de original [B] (
6. Sensor de inversin del DF [C] (
126
x 2).
x 1, gancho)
x 1, gancho)
ARDF
Sensor de registro y salida del DF

3. Embrague de alimentacin del DF (
Pg.124)
Pg.130)
4. Placa gua de alimentacin de originales (

original del DF")
5. Motor de alimentacin del DF (
6. Motor de transporte del DF (
Pg.126 "Sensor de inversin y presencia de
Pg.128)
Pg.129)
7. Rodillo de transporte del DF [A] (
x 2, engranaje x 2, casquillo x 2)
8. Unidad del rodillo de separacin del DF [B] (
x 2, engranaje x 1, casquillo x 2)
9. Placa de transporte superior de inversin [C] (
x 4,
x 3,
x 4)
127
4
10. Placa de transporte inferior de inversin [D] (gancho x 2)
11. Sensor de registro del DF [E] (
12. Sensor de salida del DF [F] (
x 1, gancho)
x 1, gancho)
Reflector del sensor de registro del DF
Limpie el reflector del sensor de registro de SD [A] si fuera necesario.
Motor de alimentacin del DF

128
Pg.124)
ARDF
4
2. Tapa interior [A] (
x 1)
3. Motor de alimentacin del DF con soporte [B] (

4. Motor de alimentacin del DF [C] (
x 2,
x 4,
x 3, correa de sincronizacin)
x 2)
Motor de transporte del DF

Pg.124)
2. Motor de alimentacin del DF (
Pg.128)
3. Motor de transporte del DF con soporte [A] (
x 2, muelle x 1, correa de sincronizacin)
129
4. Motor de transporte del DF [B] (
x 2)
Embrague de alimentacin del DF

2. Tapa delantera del DF [A] (
3. Soporte [B] (
x 1,
x 1)
x 1)
4. Embrague de alimentacin del DF [C] (
130
x 1)
Ajuste del rea de imagen de la copia

Ajuste el rea de imagen de la copia en cualquiera de las siguientes condiciones:
1. Tras borrar datos del motor (SP5-801-002 o SP5-998-001).
2. Tras sustituir cualquiera de los siguientes componentes:
Primer o segundo escner.
Bloque de lentes
Motor del escner
Motor del espejo poligonal.
Bandeja de papel
Impresin
Asegrese de que el papel est correctamente cargado en cada bandeja antes de comenzar el
procedimiento de ajuste de esta seccin.
Ajuste del registro

Utilice Trimming Area Pattern (Patrn del rea de recorte, SP5-902-001 > 10) para hacer el ajuste.
1. Imprima el patrn de pruebas alimentando el papel desde la bandeja normal.
2. Imprima el patrn de pruebas alimentando el papel desde la bandeja bypass.
3. Imprima el papel de pruebas seleccionando la impresin dplex.
4. Mida la distancia entre el borde anterior del rea de la imagen y el borde anterior del papel [A].
En el diagrama se muestra el papel en la bandeja de copias. Observe que el papel sale
boca abajo.
131
SP
Especificacin
SP1-001-001 (Todas las bandejas)
0 2 mm
SP1-001-002 (Bypass)
0 2 mm
SP1-001-003 (Dplex)
0 4 mm
5. Ajuste el registro del borde anterior (SP1-001).

6. Mida la distancia entre el borde lateral del rea de la imagen y el borde lateral del papel [B].
SP
Especificacin
SP1-001-001 (Primera bandeja)
0 2 mm
SP1-001-001 (Segunda bandeja)
0 2 mm
SP1-002-005 (Bypass)
0 4 mm
SP1-002-006 (Dplex)
0 4 mm
7. Ajuste el registro de extremo a extremo (SP1-002).

8. Especifique "0" (cero) en SP5-902-001 despus de terminar el procedimiento de ajuste.
Ajuste del margen en blanco

Utilice Trimming Area Pattern (Patrn del rea de recorte, SP5-902-001 > 10) para hacer el ajuste.
1. Imprima el patrn de pruebas.
2. Mida la distancia entre los cuatro bordes del rea de la imagen y los cuatro bordes del papel [A]
[B][C][D].
132

boca abajo.
3. Ajuste el margen en blanco (SP2-101).
SP
Especificacin
SP2-101-001 (Borde anterior) [A]
2 1,5 mm
SP2-101-002 (Borde posterior) [B]
2 +2,5/-1,5 mm
SP2-101-003 (Lado izquierdo) [C]
2 1,5 mm
SP2-101-004 (Lado derecho) [D]
2 +2,5/-1,5 mm
El "Lado izquierdo" y el "Lado derecho" corresponden a su mano izquierda y derecha

respectivamente segn se mira la imagen copiada con el borde anterior hacia arriba.
Ajuste de la escala de reproduccin en el sentido de escaneo principal

Utilice "Grid Pattern (Single Dot)" [Cuadrcula (1 solo punto)] (SP5-902-001 > 5) para hacer el ajuste.
SP
Especificacin
SP2-998-001 (Escala repr. ppal.-impresora)
100 1%
1. Imprima el patrn de pruebas.

2. Mida los lados de los cuadrados. Cada lado debe tener 2,7 mm de largo.
3. Ajuste la escala de reproduccin en la direccin de escaneo principal (SP2-998-001: Escala repr.
ppal.-impresora).
Escaneo
Preparacin:
Antes de ajustar el escaneo, ajuste la impresin (
Pg.131).
Para ajustar el escaneo, utilice el grfico de pruebas A4.
133
Ajuste del registro

1. Coloque el grfico de pruebas sobre el cristal de exposicin. Asegrese de que el grfico de
pruebas est alineado con las regletas trasera e izquierda del cristal de exposicin.
2. Haga una copia.
4
3. Mida la distancia entre el borde anterior del rea de la imagen y el borde anterior del papel [A].
boca abajo.
4. Ajuste el registro de escaneo del borde delantero. (SP4-010-001).
SP
Especificacin
SP4-010-001 (Reg. escaneo borde anterior)
0 2 mm
5. Mida la distancia entre el borde lateral del rea de la imagen y el borde lateral del papel [B].
6. Ajuste el registro de extremo a extremo (SP4-011-001).
134
SP
Especificacin
SP4-011-001 (Reg. escaneo extremo a

extremo)
0 2 mm
Ajuste de la escala de reproduccin
1. Coloque el grfico de pruebas sobre el cristal de exposicin. Asegrese de que el grfico de

pruebas est alineado con las regletas trasera e izquierda del cristal de exposicin.
2. Haga una copia.
3. Compare la copia con el original.
4. Ajuste las escalas de reproduccin en los sentidos de escaneo principal y secundario. La imagen
original [A] se reproduce en la direccin de escaneo principal [B] o en la direccin de escaneo
secundario [C] al especificar un valor mayor.
En los diagramas se muestra el papel en la bandeja de copias. Observe que el papel sale boca
abajo.
SP
Especificacin
SP4-009-001 (Repr. escaneo principal)
1.0%
SP4-008-001 (Repr. escaneo

secundario)
1.0%
Ajuste automtico de escaneo

Con este procedimiento se ajusta el nivel de la densidad de blanco estndar. Ajuste la densidad de
blanco estndar despus de cualquiera de los siguientes trabajos de mantenimiento:
135
Sustitucin de la placa blanca estndar.

Sustitucin de la BICU.
Sustitucin del bloque de lentes.
Ejecucin de borrado de memoria (SP5-801-002 [modelo bsico], SP5-998-001 [otros
modelos]).
1. Coloque 10 hojas de nuevo papel A4 sobre el cristal de exposicin.
2. Cierre la tapa del cristal de exposicin.
4. Seleccione el SP4-428 de la copiadora.
5. Especifique "1" y pulse la tecla OK. La copiadora ajusta automticamente la densidad de blanco
estndar.
Ajuste de la imagen en el alimentador automtico de documentos (DF)
Realice el procedimiento de ajuste de esta seccin slo cuando haya un ARDF instalado en la
copiadora.
1. Haga un grfico de prueba provisional como se indica en el diagrama anterior. Para ello, utilice el
papel "A4/8,5 x 11".
2. Coloque el grfico de pruebas temporal sobre el ARDF.
3. Haga una copia.
136
4. Mida la distancia entre el borde lateral del rea de la imagen y el borde lateral del papel [A].
(El diagrama muestra el papel sobre la bandeja de copia. Observe que el papel sale boca
abajo).
5. Ajuste el registro de extremo a extremo (S to S/Front Regist: SP6-006-001, Registro de extremo a

extremo/reverso: SP6-006-004) El rea de la imagen se mueve al lado posterior de la copiadora
cuando se especifica un valor mayor.
6. Mida la distancia entre el borde anterior del rea del rea de la imagen y el borde anterior del
papel [B].
7. Ajuste el registro del borde anterior (Leading Regist: (SP6-006-002) [Reg. anterior]. El rea de la
imagen se mueve al lado derecho de la copiadora cuando se especifica un valor mayor.
8. Mida la distancia entre el borde posterior del rea de la imagen y el borde posterior del papel
[C].
9. Ajuste el rea borrada en el borde posterior (Trailing Erase: (SP6-006-003) [Supresin posterior].
10. Compare la copia con el original.
11. Ajuste la ampliacin de subescaneo (SP6-006-005). La especificacin es 1,0%.
137
138
5. Manual de referencia del

mantenimiento del sistema
Programa de servicio
No permita que el usuario acceda al modo SP ni al modo SSP. Slo los tcnicos de servicio
pueden utilizar estos modos. Si una persona que no pertenece al servicio tcnico accede al modo
SP o al modo SSP, no se garantiza la calidad de la mquina ni su funcionamiento.
Tablas SP
Tablas de modo de programa de servicio
Uso de los modos SP y SSP

Existen los dos modos siguientes:
Modo SP (Modo de programa de servicio): El modo SP incluye los programas necesarios para el
trabajo de mantenimiento estndar.
Modo SSP (modo SP especial): incluye programas del modo SP y algunos programas especiales.
Necesitar algunos conocimientos adicionales para utilizar estos programas especiales. Si desea
informacin detallada, consulte al supervisor.
139
5
Inicio del modo SP
Para obtener ms informacin, pngase en contacto con su supervisor.
Seleccin de programas
Cuando aparezca un signo de subrayado intermitente (o varios), podr escribir un nmero desde
el teclado numrico [D].
Cuando aparezca el signo /OK [A] en la esquina superior derecha, podr desplazarse por
el men al pulsar la tecla de flecha a la izquierda [B] o la tecla de flecha a la derecha [C]. Para
seleccionar un programa, pulse la tecla OK [F].
Especificacin de valores
1. Para seleccionar un programa, pulse la tecla OK. Un signo de subrayado intermitente (o varios)
indican el valor que desea cambiar. El valor entre parntesis es el valor predeterminado del men.
2. Escriba el valor necesario con el teclado numrico. Para cambiar entre valores positivos (ms) y
negativos (menos), pulse la tecla .
3. Para confirmar el valor, pulse la tecla OK. Para cancelar el valor, pulse la tecla Escape [E].
Activacin del modo de copia

Puede activar el modo copia mientras el modo SP est activo. Cuando lo haga, la copiadora imprimir
imgenes o patrones que le ayudarn a cambiar el ajuste SP.
140
Programa de servicio
1. Pulse la tecla
. Se activa el modo de copia.
2. Especifique los ajustes de copia y pulse la tecla

3. Para regresar al modo SP, pulse la tecla
No podr terminar el modo SP mientras el modo de copia est activado.
Salir de programas/terminar el modo (S)SP

Pulse la tecla
o la tecla Escape para salir del programa. Puede terminar el modo SP si pulsa una
de estas teclas varias veces.
Convenciones utilizadas en las tablas:

Asterisco (*): los ajustes se guardan en la NVRAM. La mayora recuperan sus valores
predeterminados al ejecutar SP5-801-002. CTL indica que los datos se almacenan en la NVRAM
del circuito del controlador.
DFU: el programa es slo para uso de diseo/fbrica. No cambie los ajustes.

Corchetes ([ ]): entre corchetes aparecen el rango de ajuste, el valor predeterminado y el paso
mnimo con unidades ([Mnimo a Mximo / Predeterminado / Paso]).
141
Uso del modo SP

Carga/descarga de los datos de la NVRAM
Carga del contenido de la NVRAM en una tarjeta SD
Realice el siguiente procedimiento para cargar la configuracin de cdigo SP de la NVRAM a una
tarjeta SD.
Estos datos deben cargarse siempre en una tarjeta SD antes de sustituir la NVRAM.
1. Antes de apagar el aparato, ejecute SP 5990-1 (Impresin de SMC). Utilice la tecla de flecha
para activar el Bit Switch 4 y utilice la tecla numrica "4" para activar el bit 4.
2. Apague el interruptor principal de la copiadora.
3. Retire la tapa de interface (
x 1).
4. Inserte la tarjeta SD en la ranura de servicio 2 del circuito del controlador. Despus, coloque el
interruptor principal en posicin de encendido.
5. Ejecute SP 5824-1 (Carga de los datos de la NVRAM) y, a continuacin, pulse la tecla Execute
(Ejecutar).
Una vez terminada la carga, el archivo se ha copiado en una carpeta de la NVRAM en la
tarjeta SD. El archivo se guarda en la ruta de acceso y nombre de archivo:
NVRAM\<nmero de serie>.NV
En el ejemplo siguiente, el nmero de serie es B0700017:
NVRAM\B0700017.NV
6. A fin de evitar errores durante la descarga, compruebe que ha marcado la tarjeta SD que
contiene los datos cargados (guardados) con el nmero del aparato desde el que se han cargado
(guardado) dichos datos.
Puede cargar (guardar) datos de la NVRAM de ms de un aparato en la misma tarjeta SD.
7. Apague el aparato y extraiga la tarjeta SD de la ranura 2.
Descarga de una tarjeta SD a la NVRAM

Realice el procedimiento siguiente para descargar (guardar) datos SP de una tarjeta SD a la NVRAM
del aparato.
142
Uso del modo SP
Si la tarjeta SD que contiene los datos de la NVRAM est daada o si la conexin entre el
controlador y la BICU es defectuosa, la descarga de los datos de la NVRAM puede fallar.
Si la descarga falla, repita el procedimiento de descarga.
Si el segundo intento falla, introduzca manualmente los datos de la NVRAM mediante la
impresin SMC creada antes de cargar los datos de la NVRAM. ( procedimiento anterior)
1. Apague el interruptor principal de la copiadora.
2. Retire la tapa de la interface 2 (
x 1).
3. Inserte la tarjeta SD que contiene los datos de la NVRAM en la ranura 2.

4. Encienda el interruptor principal de la copiadora.
5. Ejecute SP 5825-1 (Descarga de los datos de la NVRAM) y pulse la tecla Execute (Ejecutar).
6. Apague el interruptor principal de la copiadora y extraiga la tarjeta SD de la ranura 2.
Para que los datos de la NVRAM se descarguen satisfactoriamente, es preciso que el nmero
de serie del archivo que est en la tarjeta SD coincida con el de la mquina. Si el nmero de
serie no coincide, la descarga fallar.
Este procedimiento descarga (guarda) los datos siguientes en la NVRAM:
Recuento total
Recuento de C/O e I/O
Procedimiento de actualizacin del firmware

En esta seccin se indica cmo actualizar el firmware de la mquina GW (el aparato con la caja del
controlador opcional).
Para actualizar el firmware del aparato GW, debe tener descargada la nueva versin del firmware en
una tarjeta SD (Secure Digital). La tarjeta SD se inserta en la ranura superior de la parte derecha de la
caja del controlador, vista desde la parte trasera de la mquina.
Antes de empezar
Una tarjeta SD es un dispositivo de precisin. Tenga siempre presentes las siguientes precauciones
cuando manipule tarjetas SD:
Apague siempre el aparato antes de insertar una tarjeta SD. No inserte nunca la tarjeta SD en la
ranura con el aparato encendido.
No saque la tarjeta SD de la ranura de servicio despus de encender el aparato.
Nunca apague el aparato mientras se descarga el firmware de la tarjeta SD.
143
Conserve las tarjetas SD en un lugar seguro, donde no queden expuestas a temperatura o

humedad elevadas, ni a luz solar directa.
Manipule las tarjetas SD siempre con cuidado para evitar que se doblen o araen. Nunca moje
las tarjetas SD ni las exponga a otros choques o vibraciones.
Tenga siempre en cuenta los siguientes puntos cuando utilice el programa de actualizacin de
firmware:
Cargar significa enviar datos desde el aparato a la tarjeta SD. Descargar significa enviar
datos desde la tarjeta SD al aparato.
Para seleccionar una opcin de la pantalla LCD, pulse el botn correspondiente en la pantalla
tctil de la LCD, o bien la tecla numrica pertinente en el teclado de 10 teclas del panel de
mandos.
Antes de iniciar el procedimiento de actualizacin del firmware, asegrese de que la mquina est
desconectada de la red, a fin de evitar que llegue un trabajo de impresin mientras el firmware se
est actualizando.
Procedimiento de actualizacin del firmware
Antes de comenzar este procedimiento, confirme qu versin de firmware est actualmente

instalada en la mquina con SP7-801-255.
-Preparacin de la tarjeta SD1. Formatee una tarjeta SD con, por ejemplo, SD Formatter v1.1.
2. Cree una carpeta "romdata" en la tarjeta.
3. Cree las siguientes carpetas dentro de la carpeta romdata: B121, B620, B622, B658, B681,
B685
4. Descargue el firmware del servidor y guarde los archivos en la carpeta con el cdigo de la
mquina correspondiente en la tarjeta SD.
Ejemplo:
El archivo B1215540B debera guardarse en la carpeta B121, mientras que los archivos
B6585902B, B6585903B y B6585905B deberan guardarse en la carpeta B658.
-Actualizacin del firmware No coloque varios programas de firmware de la mquina en la misma tarjeta SD. Copie
nicamente el firmware del modelo que desea.
2. Si la mquina est conectada a una red, desconecte el cable de red de la copiadora.
3. Retire la tapa del conector (
144
x 1)
Uso del modo SP
4. Con la etiqueta de la tarjeta SD orientada hacia la parte trasera de la mquina, inserte la tarjeta
SD en la ranura 2 de la caja del controlador. Inserte lentamente la tarjeta SD en la ranura hasta
que encaje en su lugar.
5. Compruebe que la tarjeta SD ha quedado insertada y encajada en su lugar.
(Para extraer la tarjeta SD, empjela para desbloquear el bloqueo por resorte y sultela; a
continuacin, la tarjeta saldr de la ranura.)
6. Encienda el interruptor principal. Despus de unos 5 segundos, la pantalla LCD mostrar el
mensaje Please wait (Espere).Despus, unos 60 segundos ms tarde, la pantalla LCD mostrar
Program UpDate Menu P.01 (Men de actualizacin de programa P.01) en la primera lnea y
el nombre del firmware en la segunda lnea (por ejemplo, Sistema/Copiar).
7. Pulse la tecla "OK" para seleccionar un mdulo.

Para desplazarse por los mens, pulse las teclas
[A].
Para ver la versin de firmware, pulse la tecla derecha. "ROM" es la informacin acerca del
firmware actual. "NEW" es la informacin acerca del firmware de la tarjeta SD.
Para volver al men, pulse la tecla .
Para seleccionar el mdulo, pulse la tecla OK.
Para desplazarse por el nombre del mdulo, el nmero de serie y la versin, pulse la tecla
o .
Si desea instalar el siguiente firmware de forma simultnea, pulse la tecla INICIO. Las teclas
de desplazamiento pueden utilizarse para confirmar que se ha seleccionado este firmware
(resaltado con un fondo negro).
145
[Motor, FCU, Escner, Impresora, Fuente de impresora, Mdulo de seguridad]

Tenga en cuenta que el siguiente firmware no puede actualizarse simultneamente. El
procedimiento de actualizacin debe repetirse para cada uno de forma individual.
Sistema/Copiar, ServiceCardNetFile, ServiceCardNIB, ServiceCardFAX,
ServiceCardWebSystem.
5
Al seleccionar un mdulo, las lneas de texto se resaltan y se muestran las teclas "Verify"
(Verificar) y "Update" (Actualizar).
8. Seleccione un mdulo y pulse la tecla "Update" (Actualizar).
NO pulse la tecla Verify (Verificar).
9. Se inicia el programa de actualizacin de firmware y aparece el mensaje "Loading" (Cargando).
La actualizacin comenzar y tardar varios minutos en completarse. La pantalla LCD
mostrar inicialmente , Updating ***--------- (Actualizando...).
Cuando se ha completado la actualizacin, la pantalla LCD cambiar a Update done
(Actualizacin realizada) o Updated / Power Off On (Actualizado /Apague y encienda).
10. Compruebe que aparece el mensaje Actualizacin realizada.

-Confirmacin1. Apague y encienda el interruptor de alimentacin.
146
Uso del modo SP
La pantalla LCD mostrar Please wait (Espere...) durante 60 segundos, y despus volver
a la pantalla Program UpDate Menu (Men de actualizacin de programa).
2. Repita los pasos 1-8 anteriores hasta que se completen todas las actualizaciones de firmware.
3. Apague el interruptor principal.
4. Extraiga la tarjeta SD de la ranura inferior del controlador al presionarla para liberar el bloqueo
por resorte.
5
Si se produce un error, se mostrar el cdigo de error. Para obtener una lista informativa de los cdigos
de error, consulte la siguiente tabla.
Cdigo
Causa
Accin necesaria
E20
Error de asignacin de
direccin fsica
Inserte la tarjeta SD correctamente.
E22
Error de descompresin
Almacene datos correctos en la tarjeta SD.
E23
Error del programa de

actualizacin
Actualice el programa del controlador.
E24
Error de acceso a la
tarjeta SD
Inserte la tarjeta SD correctamente.
E31
Inconsistencia de datos
descargados*
Inserte la tarjeta SD utilizada cuando se interrumpi el

proceso de actualizacin anterior.
E32
Inconsistencia de datos
descargados*
Inserte la tarjeta SD que contiene los datos correctos.
E33
Error de datos de versin
E34
Error de datos de local
E35
Error de datos del modelo

de la mquina
Utilice otra tarjeta SD
Sustituya el controlador.
Utilice otra tarjeta SD.
147
Cdigo
Causa
Accin necesaria
E36
Error de datos del mdulo
E40
Error de programa de
motor**
E42
Error del programa del

panel de mandos*
E44
Error del programa del

controlador*

Sustituya la placa del controlador.
E50
Error de autenticacin
Sustituya la BICU.
Sustituya el circuito del panel de mandos.
*Debe reinstalar el programa.

Si se ha interrumpido el programa de actualizacin de firmware (por ejemplo, por un fallo de
alimentacin), mantenga la tarjeta SD insertada y vuelva a encender el interruptor principal. El
programa de actualizacin de firmware se reiniciar. Si no lo hace, aparecer el mensaje "Reboot after
Card insert" (Reinicie despus de insertar la tarjeta) al encender el interruptor principal.
Impresin del patrn de prueba (SP5-902-001)

Ejecucin de la impresin del patrn de prueba
1. Especifique el nmero del patrn de prueba y pulse la tecla OK.
2. Pulse la tecla de inicio de copia. Se activa el modo de copia.
3. Especifique los ajustes de copia y pulse la tecla
Patrones de prueba
Patrones de prueba con VCU
N.
148
Trama
(No imprime)
Lneas verticales (1 punto)
Lneas horizontales (1 punto)
Uso del modo SP
Patrones de prueba con VCU

3
Lneas verticales (doble punto)
Lneas horizontales (doble punto)
Cuadrcula (1 punto)
Cuadrcula (doble punto)
Patrn de puntos alternos
Un punto aislado
Banda negra (Horizontal)
10
rea de recorte
11
Patrn de rombos (1 punto)
12
Escalas de grises (horizontal)
13
Escalas de grises (vertical)
14
Escalas de grises (vertical/horizontal)
15
Escalas de grises (superposicin vertical/horizontal)
16
Escalas de grises con lneas blancas (horizontal)
17
Escalas de grises con lneas blancas (vertical)
18
Escalas de grises con lneas blancas (vertical/horizontal)
Patrones de prueba con IPU

N.
Trama
30
Lneas verticales (1 punto)
31
Lneas horizontales (1 punto)
32
Lneas verticales (doble punto)
33
Lneas horizontales (doble punto)
34
Cuatro puntos aislados
35
149
Patrones de prueba con IPU
36
Banda negra (vertical, 1.024 puntos)
37
Escala de grises (Horizontal) (512 puntos)
38
Escala de grises (Vertical, 256 puntos)
39
Placa ID
40
En cruz
41
Patrn de rombos (paso de 128 puntos)
42
Gradacin cuadrada (64 grados)
43
Gradacin cuadrada (256 grados)
44
Escalas de grises (Horizontal, anchura de 32 puntos)
45
Escalas de grises (Vertical, anchura de 32 puntos)
47
Placas de escala A4 1 (128 grados)
48
Placas de escala A4 2 (128 grados)
49
rea de recorte (A4)

Patrones de prueba con SBU
N.
Trama
51
52
Escala de grises 1 (256 grados)
53
Escala de grises 2 (256 grados)

Patrones de prueba con PCI*1
N.
150
Trama
61
S2M: Patrn de cuadrcula
62
S2M: Patrn de Argyle
63
64
S2M: Patrn de Argyle + Imagen*2
Uso del modo SP
Patrones de prueba con PCI*1

65
S2M: Patrn de cuadrcula
66
S2M: Patrn de cuadrcula + Imagen
67
68
S2M: Patrn de Argyle + Imagen
69
Motor: Patrn de cuadrcula
70
Motor: Patrn de Argyle
*1: El PCI est disponible para modelos con la caja de controlador.

*2: La imagen original sobre el cristal de exposicin se imprime detrs del patrn de prueba.
Borrado de memoria
Mquina GW
La mquina GW (el aparato con la caja del controlador opcional) almacena los datos de motor en la
NVRAM de la BICU, y almacena los dems datos de la NVRAM en el controlador opcional. Para
distinguir entre los datos del motor y los dems datos, consulte desde SP5-801-003 hasta 015. Este
programa de servicio (SP5-801) manipula los datos del controlador. Cualquier otro dato no
manipulado por SP5-801 es un dato del motor. Los datos en la NVRAM de la BICU (dato del motor) se
borran a travs de SP5-998-001 mientras que los datos de la NVRAM del controlador (datos del
controlador) se borran a travs de SP5-801-xxx (para ver las excepciones, consulte "Excepciones"
como se describe a continuacin).
Mquina
Dato
NVRAM
Datos de motor
GW
Datos de
controlador
BICU
Controlad
or
Borrado por
Notas
SP5-998-001
Cualquier otro dato que no sea un

dato del controlador
SP5-801-xxx
SCS, IMH, MCS, aplicacin de

copiadora, aplicacin de fax,
aplicacin de impresora, aplicacin
de escner, aplicacin de servicio
Web/red, NCS, R-Fax, DCS, UCS
151
Excepciones
SP5-998-001 borra la mayora de los ajustes y contadores almacenados en la NVRAM de la BICU
(los valores vuelven a sus valores predeterminados). Sin embargo, no se borran los siguientes ajustes:
SP5-807 (Seleccin de rea)
SP5-811-001 (Introduccin del nmero de serie [Conjunto de cdigos])
SP5-811-003 (Introduccin del nmero de serie [Visualizacin de cdigo ID2])
SP5-812-001 (Servicio TEL [Telfono])
SP5-812-002 (Servicio TEL [Fax])
SP5-907 (Plug & Play)
SP7 (Registro de datos)
SP8 (Historial)
Utilice SP5-998-001 despus de sustituir la NVRAM de BICU o cuando los datos de la NVRAM de
BICU estn corruptos. Cuando el programa finaliza con normalidad, aparece el mensaje "Completed"
(Finalizado). Cuando se ha sustituido la NVRAM del controlador o cuando los datos de la NVRAM del
controlador estn corruptos, utilice SP5-801-001. El mensaje es el mismo que en la mquina bsica.
Procedimiento de borrado de memoria

1. Imprima todas las listas de datos de SMC (
Pg.153 "Impresin de SMC (SP5-990)").
2. Ejecute SP5-998-001.
4. Seleccione "Execute" (Ejecutar). Aparecer el mensaje "Execute?" (Ejecutar?) seguido de
"Cancel" (Cancelar) y "Execute" (Ejecutar).
5. Seleccione "Execute" (Ejecutar).
6. Cuando el programa ha finalizado normalmente, aparece el mensaje "Completed" (Finalizado).
Si el programa ha finalizado de forma anmala, aparece un mensaje de error.
8. Ajuste el registro y ampliacin de la impresora y del escner (* "Ajuste de copia" en la seccin
"Sustitucin y ajuste").
9. Consulte las listas de SMC e introduzca cualquier valor que difiera de los valores de fbrica.
Vuelva a comprobar los valores para SP4-901.
10. Ajuste el nivel de blanco estndar (SP4-428).
11. Inicialice el sensor de densidad del tner (SP 2-214).
12. Compruebe la calidad de las copias y el recorrido del papel.
152
Uso del modo SP
Ajuste de nmero de mquina (SP5-811-001)

Especificacin de caracteres
SP5-811-001 especifica el nmero de serie. Para la mquina con el controlador opcional, se utiliza el
teclado numrico y el panel de mandos opcional.
Mquina GW
Puede utilizar el teclado numrico para introducir nmeros. Asimismo, puede utilizar el panel de
mandos para introducir otros caracteres. Al pulsar la tecla "ABC", la letra cambia de la siguiente
manera: A B C. Para introducir la misma letra dos veces, por ejemplo "AA", pulse la tecla "ABC",
la tecla "Espacio" y la tecla "ABC". Para cambiar entre maysculas y minsculas, pulse la letra "Shift"
(Mays).
Nmero de serie y NVRAM

Los nmeros de serie se guardan en la NVRAM antes de enviar el producto y no se borran. Debe
especificar un nmero de serie despus de sustituir la NVRAM.
Impresin de SMC (SP5-990)

Con SP5-990 se obtienen listas de estado de la mquina.
1. Seleccione SP5-990.
2. Seleccione un men:
Mquina GW: 001 Todos (Lista de datos), 002 SP (Lista de datos de modo), 003 Programa
de usuario, 004 Datos de registro, 005 Informe de diagnstico, 006 Valor no
predeterminado, 007 Resumen NIB, 008 Registro de archivo Net, 021 Programa de usuario
de copiadora, 022 SP de escner, 023 Programa de usuario de escner, 040 Impresin de
contador de alarma de piezas, 064 Impresin de contador normal, 065 Contador de
cdigo de usuario, 066 Contador de operador de clave, 067 Impresin de lista de contacto,
069 Impresin de encabezado1, 071 Impresin de encabezado3, 072 Impresin de lista
de grupo, 128 Patrn ACC, 129 Patrn de color de usuario, o 160:Escaneo de patrn ACC
La salida del men "Big Font" (Fuente grande) es adecuada para el fax.
3. Pulse la tecla "Execute" (Ejecutar).
Mquina GW: se imprime la lista de estado de la mquina.
153
Anlisis de errores del sensor ID (SP2-221)

La calidad de la imagen puede resultar deficiente cuando el sensor ID no funciona correctamente. Sin
embargo, no hay ningn cdigo SC que indique el mal funcionamiento del sensor ID; en su lugar,
SP2-221 le muestra cierta informacin sobre el sensor ID. Compruebe esta informacin cuando la
calidad de la imagen no sea muy buena.
En la tabla encontrar la informacin mostrada con SP2-221 (Anlisis de errores del sensor ID).
SP
SP2-221-1 Vsg
(VG en la pantalla)
154
Condiciones de error
Posible causa
Sensor ID defectuoso
Vsg < 2,5V o

(Vsg Vsp) < 1,00V
SP2-221-2 Vsp
(VP en la pantalla)
Vsp > 2,5V o

(Vsg Vsp) < 1,00 V
SP2-221-3 Potencia
(PW en la pantalla)
Vsg < 3,5 V

se aplica la potencia
mxima (979)
SP2-221-4 Vsdp
No hay condiciones de
error
SP2-221-5 Vt
Vt > 4,5 V o
Vt < 0,2 V
SP2-221-6 Vts
Notas
Sensor ID sucio
Tambor sin carga

La densidad del tner es
muy baja
No se ha creado el patrn
del sensor ID
Sensor ID sucio
El tambor no se carga
Fuente de
alimentacin de
la luz del
sensor ID
-
Sensor TD defectuoso
-
Tablas de servicios de fax
Tablas de servicios de fax

Modo de servicio del sistema de fax
Bit switches
Parmetros de la NCU
Parmetros de transmisin dedicada
Direcciones RAM de servicio
155
156
Tablas de SC
Resumen
Hay cuatro niveles para las condiciones de llamada al servicio tcnico.
Nivel
Definicin
Procedimiento de restauracin
Para evitar posibles daos, la mquina no debe

utilizarse hasta que el representante de servicio
tcnico restablezca el cdigo SC.
Active el modo SP y apague y

encienda el interruptor principal.
Al desconectar y conectar la alimentacin principal

el cdigo SC vuelve a establecerse si el error ha sido
causado por una deteccin incorrecta del sensor.
Apague y encienda el interruptor

de alimentacin.
La mquina funciona de la manera habitual excepto

la unidad relacionada con la llamada de servicio.
Apague y encienda el interruptor

de alimentacin.
Se actualiza el historial de SC. La mquina funciona

de la manera habitual.
No se muestra ningn cdigo SC.

Slo se actualiza el historial del
SC.
Si un problema implica placas del circuito, intente solucionar el problema desconectando y

volviendo a conectar todos los conectores antes de decidir la sustitucin de una placa de circuito.
Si el problema implica un bloqueo del motor, compruebe la carga mecnica antes de decidir la
sustitucin de un motor o sensor.
Si trabaja con una mquina equipada con fax, la desconexin y conexin de la alimentacin
puede causar una prdida de datos almacenados en la memoria.
157
Descripciones de los cdigos SC del motor

Definicin
N
Sntoma
Posible causa
Error de la lmpara de exposicin

Lmpara de exposicin defectuosa
Estabilizador de la lmpara de
exposicin defectuoso
Conector de la lmpara de
exposicin defectuoso
101
El escner ha escaneado la placa

blanca, pero no puede detectar el nivel
de blanco.
Espejo del escner sucio

Espejo del escner fuera de posicin
Placa de SBU defectuosa
Conector de SBU defectuoso
Bloque de lentes fuera de posicin

Posicin o anchura de escaneo de
placa blanca incorrectos (
SP4-015)
Error de posicin de inicio del escner 1
Sensor de posicin inicial del
escner defectuoso
120
El sensor de posicin inicial del escner

no detecta que el escner abandona la
posicin inicial.
Motor de accionamiento del

escner defectuoso
Conector del sensor de posicin
inicial del escner defectuoso
Conector del motor de
accionamiento del escner
defectuoso
Placa BICU defectuosa
158
Tablas de SC
Definicin
N
Sntoma
Posible causa
Error posicin inicial del escner 2

Sensor de posicin inicial del
escner defectuoso
121
El sensor de posicin inicial del escner

no detecta que el escner vuelve a la
posicin inicial.
Motor de accionamiento del

escner defectuoso
Conector del sensor de posicin
inicial del escner defectuoso
Conector del motor de
accionamiento del escner
defectuoso
Error de correccin de nivel de negro de SBU

El ajuste automtico de SBU no ha
podido corregir el nivel de negro
tres veces en el ajuste previo a la
compensacin.
141

diez veces en el ajuste PGA.

diez veces en el ajuste de
compensacin.
Error de correccin de nivel de blanco/negro de SBU
142

podido corregir el nivel de blanco diez
veces en el ajuste PGA.
Placa blanca sucia

SP4-015)
159
Definicin
N
Sntoma
Posible causa
Error de comunicacin entre BICU y SBU

Conexin suelta del cable plano
entre la BICU y la SBU.
144
La BICU no puede establecer una

comunicacin correcta con la SBU.
Cable plano defectuoso entre la

BICU y la SBU
BICU defectuosa
SBU defectuosa
Error de ajuste automtico de SBU

145
Los niveles de blanco de la placa

blanca y el papel blanco son muy
diferentes durante el ajuste automtico
de escaneo ( SP4-428-001).
Placa blanca sucia

SP4-015)
Error de transferencia de imagen

193
Las imgenes escaneadas no se

transfieren a la memoria del controlador
en un minuto.

Circuito del controlador defectuoso
Error de direccionamiento de memoria

198
La BICU no recibe el informe de

direccionamiento de memoria del
controlador en un minuto.
Incoherencia entre el firmware de la

BICU y el firmware del controlador
BICU defectuosa
Controlador defectuoso
Fuga de corriente en el rodillo de carga

Rodillo de carga defectuoso
302
El mdulo de sondeo detecta una fuga

del rodillo de carga.
Placa de alimentacin de alta

tensin defectuosa
Mala conexin de la PCU
160
Tablas de SC
Definicin
N
Sntoma
Posible causa
Error del motor del espejo poligonal
320
El motor del espejo poligonal no

alcanza la velocidad de funcionamiento
antes de 10 segundos. O bien, el motor
del espejo poligonal no se ajusta a la
velocidad de funcionamiento durante
0,2 segundos despus de alcanzar la
velocidad de funcionamiento.
Motor del espejo poligonal

defectuoso
Conexin suelta entre el motor del
espejo poligonal y la BICU
Cable defectuoso entre la BICU y el
motor del espejo poligonal
BICU defectuosa
Error de ausencia de seal de escritura lser (F-GATE)
321
El mdulo de sondeo no detecta la

seal de escritura lser (F-GATE)
despus de que el lser cruce 5 mm
desde el punto de inicio de la superficie
del tambor.
BICU defectuosa
Conexin suelta en el controlador
del fax o el controlador de la
impresora
Controlador del fax o controlador

de la impresora defectuosos
Error de sincronizacin del lser

Botella de tner no instalada
Conexin suelta entre la unidad LD y
la BICU
322
El detector de sincronizacin de
escaneo principal no detecta la seal
lser durante 0,5 segundos.
Cable defectuoso entre la BICU y la

unidad LD
Unidad LD fuera de posicin
Unidad LD defectuosa
BICU defectuosa
Error del sensor TD

390
La BICU detecta que el sensor TD emite

tensin extraordinaria (menos de 0,2 V
o ms de 4,0 V) 10 veces consecutivas.
Sensor de TD defectuoso
161
Definicin
N
Sntoma
Posible causa
Fuga de polarizacin de revelado

391
El mdulo de sondeo detecta una fuga

de polarizacin de revelado.

tensin defectuosa
Error de inicializacin del revelador

Revelador insuficiente
392
El sensor de ID no detecta un patrn

correcto durante la inicializacin del
revelador ( 2-214-001).
Funcionamiento incorrecto del

tambor
Funcionamiento incorrecto del
rodillo de revelado
Tensin insuficiente para el rodillo
de carga
Error de fuga del rodillo de transferencia (electrodo positivo)

tensin defectuosa
401
La tensin de retroalimentacin del

rodillo de transferencia es insuficiente.

Instalacin incorrecta de la unidad
de transferencia o la unidad de
separacin
Rodillo de transferencia defectuoso
Error de fuga del rodillo de transferencia (electrodo negativo)

tensin defectuosa
402
La tensin de retroalimentacin del

rodillo de transferencia es insuficiente.

Instalacin incorrecta de la unidad
de transferencia o la unidad de
separacin
Rodillo de transferencia defectuoso
162
Tablas de SC
Definicin
N
Sntoma
Posible causa
Error del motor principal
500
El motor principal no alcanza su

velocidad de funcionamiento en 0,7
segundos. O bien, el motor principal no
se ajusta a su velocidad de
funcionamiento durante 0,7 segundos
despus de alcanzar la velocidad de
funcionamiento.
Sobrecarga
Motor principal defectuoso
Error de apertura del termistor de fusin

Termistor defectuoso
541
La temperatura de fusin permanece 20

grados centgrados por debajo de la
temperatura especificada.
Instalacin incorrecta del termistor.

Unidad de alimentacin defectuosa
Conectores sueltos
Error de calentamiento de la temperatura de fusin
542
La temperatura de fusin aumenta 7

grados o menos en dos segundos; y esto
contina 5 veces consecutivas. O bien,
la temperatura de fusin no se detecta
antes de 25 o 35 segundos.
Lmpara de fusin defectuosa
Error 1 de sobrecalentamiento de fusin

543
La temperatura de fusin detectada por

el termistor es 230C o superior durante
un segundo.
Error 2 de sobrecalentamiento de fusin

544
La temperatura de fusin detectada por

el circuito de control es 250C o
superior durante un segundo.
163
Definicin
N
Sntoma
Posible causa
Error de sobrecalentamiento de la lmpara de fusin

545
Despus de que la temperatura de

fusin alcance el objetivo, la lmpara
de fusin permanece encendida durante
12 segundos.
Temperatura de fusin inestable

546
Mientras la lmpara de fusin est

encendida, la temperatura de fusin
vara 50C o ms en un segundo; y esto
sucede dos veces consecutivas.
Funcionamiento incorrecto de seal de cruce cero
547
La seal de cruce cero no se detecta

cinco segundos despus de conectar el
interruptor de alimentacin principal. O
bien, la seal de cruce cero no se
detecta un segundo despus de
comenzar el funcionamiento.

BICU defectuosa
Atascos consecutivos de fusin
559
El contador de atascos de papel de la

unidad de fusin llega a 3 veces. El
contador de atascos de papel se borra
si el papel se alimenta correctamente.
Este SC slo se activa cuando
SP1159-001 est configurado en "1"
(valor predeterminado "0").
Atasco de papel en la unidad de

fusin
Error del motor del ventilador extractor

590
164
El motor del ventilador extractor est

bloqueado durante cinco segundos.
Conexin suelta del motor del

ventilador extractor
Sobrecarga
Tablas de SC
Definicin
N
Sntoma
Posible causa
Error 1 de la compuerta de ADF

760
El ADF enva la seal FGATE antes de

que se solicite para escanear originales.
Placa de ADF defectuosa

Placa de entrada/salida defectuosa
Conexin suelta
Compuerta de ADF 2 anmala

761
El ADF no enva la seal FGATE 30

segundos despus de que el ADF
empiece a escanear.
Conector de ADF defectuoso

Compuerta de ADF 3 anmala

762
El ADF contina enviando la seal

FGATE durante ms de 60 segundos
despus de que el ADF empiece a
escanear.
Conector de ADF defectuoso

Error de contador total mecnico

901
El mdulo de sondeo no detecta el

contador total mecnico.
Contador total mecnico defectuoso

BICU defectuosa
Conexin suelta
Error de contador total del motor

903
La suma de comprobacin del contador

total no es correcta.
NVRAM de la BICU defectuosa
Error del programa de aplicacin de impresora

954
El programa de aplicacin de impresora

no est preparado cuando es necesario.
Programa de aplicacin defectuoso
Error de transferencia de imagen

955
La BICU solicita al controlador que

transfiera datos de imagen; pero el
controlador no est preparado.
Programa de aplicacin defectuoso
165
Definicin
N
Sntoma
Posible causa
Error de estado (unidad de alojamiento de ptica lser)

964
La unidad de alojamiento de ptica no

est preparada en 17 segundos
despus de una solicitud.
Software defectuoso
Incoherencia entre el controlador y el engine

Uno de los siguientes controladores est
instalado en el modelo bsico:
El controlador del modelo MFP
El controlador del modelo
copiadora/fax
980
El controlador no es compatible con el

engine.
El controlador del modelo

impresora/escner/copiadora
El controlador de la impresora/escner
opcional est instalado en uno de los
siguientes modelos:
El modelo MFP
El modelo de copiadora/fax
El modelo de impresora/escner/
copiadora
Error de NVRAM
NVRAM defectuosa
981
Se ha producido un error durante la

comprobacin de NVRAM del engine.
Conexin suelta entre la BICU y la

NVRAM
Instalacin incorrecta de la NVRAM
BICU defectuosa
166
Tablas de SC
Definicin
N
Sntoma
Posible causa
Error de localizacin
982
La informacin de localizacin de la
ROM no voltil y la NVRAM es
diferente ( SP5-807-001).
Configuracin de localizacin no
especificada (El interruptor de
alimentacin principal se conecta
por primera vez despus de sustituir
la NVRAM).
Configuracin de localizacin
incorrecta
NVRAM defectuosa
Error de transferencia de imagen de impresin

984
Las imgenes de impresin no se

transfieren.
BICU defectuosa
Conexin suelta entre el controlador
y la BICU
Descripciones de los cdigos SC GW

SC6xx
Definicin
N
Sntoma
Posible causa/Contramedida
Error 1 del dispositivo de contabilidad de MF

632
La mquina enva una secuencia de

datos. No se devuelve seal de final
normal. Este sntoma ocurre tres
veces.
Lnea defectuosa o rota entre

mquina y dispositivo

633
La mquina se comunica con el

dispositivo de contabilidad. Se
devuelve la seal de desconexin.
Lnea defectuosa o rota entre

mquina y dispositivo
167
Definicin
N
Sntoma

634
El dispositivo de contabilidad informa

de un error de RAM de respaldo.
Controlador del dispositivo de

contabilidad defectuoso
Batera defectuosa en el dispositivo
de contabilidad

635
636
El dispositivo de contabilidad informa

de un error de tensin de batera.
Controlador del dispositivo de

contabilidad defectuoso
Batera defectuosa en el dispositivo
de contabilidad
Error de tarjeta SD
Error de mdulo autenticacin extendido
-001
No hay mdulo de autenticacin

expandido en la mquina.
La tarjeta SD o el archivo del mdulo de
autenticacin expandido es defectuoso.
No hay mdulo DESS en la mquina.
1. Instale la tarjeta SD correcta o el

archivo del mdulo de autenticacin
ampliado.
2. Instale el mdulo DESS.
Error de versin
-002
650
La versin del mdulo de autenticacin

ampliado no es correcta.
1. Instale el archivo correcto del

mdulo de autenticacin ampliado.
Error de comunicacin del mdem de servicio remoto (Cumin-M)

Error de autenticacin
-001
La autenticacin para el RCG-M

incrustado falla en una conexin de
acceso telefnico.
1. Compruebe y configure el nombre

de usuario (SP5816-156) y
contrasea (SP5816-157)
correctos.
Configuracin de mdem incorrecta

-004
168
Falla el acceso telefnico debido a la

configuracin incorrecta del mdem.
1. Compruebe y configure el comando

AT correcto (SP5819-160).
Tablas de SC
Definicin
N
Sntoma
Error de la lnea de comunicacin

-005
La tensin suministrada no es suficiente

debido a una lnea de comunicacin
defectuosa o a una conexin
defectuosa.
1. Consulte con la compaa telefnica

local del usuario.
Conexin de acceso telefnico incorrecta

651
Se produce un error imprevisto cuando el mdem (RCG-M) intenta llamar al centro

mediante una conexin de acceso telefnico.
-001
Program parameter error (Error de

parmetro de programa)
-002
Program execution error (Error de

ejecucin de programa)
Fallo de software.
1. No es necesario realizar ninguna
accin debido a que este SC no
interfiere en el funcionamiento de la
mquina.
Error de arranque del procesador
670
Justo despus de conectar la

alimentacin principal o de que la
mquina se recupere del modo de
desconexin automtica, la activacin
de la seal de engine preparado falla.
Justo despus de conectar la
alimentacin principal, el engine no
responde.
Mala conexin entre la BICU y la

placa del controlador
BICU defectuosa
169
Definicin
N
Sntoma
Error de comunicacin entre el controlador y el panel de mandos al inicio

Controlador detenido
Tarjeta del controlador instalada de
forma incorrecta
672
Despus de encender la mquina, la

comunicacin entre el controlador y el
panel de mandos no comienza o se
interrumpe la comunicacin despus de
un arranque normal.

Conexin del panel de mandos
suelta o defectuosa
Mala conexin de DIMM y placas
opcionales de la placa del
controlador
1. Compruebe la configuracin de
SP5875-001. Si est configurado
en "1 (OFF)", cmbielo a "0 (ON)".
6
SC8xx
Definicin
N
Sntoma
Error del monitor
817
Se trata de un error de comprobacin

de firma de archivos electrnicos y
deteccin de archivos que se
produce cuando el cargador de
arranque trata de leer el mdulo de
autodiagnstico, ncleo del sistema o
archivos del sistema base de OS
ROM Flash o los elementos de la
tarjeta SD de la ranura del
controlador son falsos o estn
daados.
Datos de OS ROM Flash

defectuosos; cambie el firmware del
controlador
Datos de tarjeta SD defectuosos;
utilice otra tarjeta SD
Parada de ncleo
819
170
Debido a un error de control, se ha producido un desbordamiento de la RAM dutante el

procesamiento del sistema. Uno de los siguientes mensajes se mostrar en el panel de
mandos.
Tablas de SC
[5032]
Error HAIC-P2
[6261]
inic cancelada
[0696e]
Error de proceso
Tarjeta del controlador defectuosa
[0766d]
Error completo de VM
Placa opcional defectuosa
[554C]
Error USB
[----]
Otros
820
Programa del sistema defectuoso
1. Sustituya el firmware de controlador
Error de autodiagnstico: CPU

[0001-0015] [000A-000D]: Cdigo de error detallado
Dispositivo CPU defectuoso
B
Durante el programa de control de

arranque y autodiagnstico, no
debera producirse ninguna
excepcin o corte. Si sucede, se
define como SC.
Programa de control de arranque o

programa de autodiagnstico
defectuosos
1. Sustituya la placa del controlador.
2. Instale de nuevo el firmware del

sistema.
[00FF]: Cdigo de error detallado

CPU defectuosa
Bus local defectuoso
B
Error de acceso a cach en la CPU
1. Apague y encienda el interruptor de

alimentacin.
2. Vuelva a instalar el programa del
sistema.
[0601, 0602, 0605, 0606, 0607, 0609]: Cdigo de error detallado

B
El comando excepcional no
funciona aunque se ejecute a
propsito.
Dispositivos CPU defectuosos

171
[060A-060E]: Cdigo de error detallado

B
El comando de corte no funciona

cuando se ejecuta.

Dispositivos ASIC defectuosos
[0610]: Cdigo de error detallado

B
La desconexin por temporizador

no funciona aunque se programe.


ASIC defectuoso
B
Se produce interrupcin en ASIC.
Dispositivos defectuosos en los que

ASIC detecta interrupciones.
[06FF]: Cdigo de error detallado

B
La tasa de frecuencia del reloj es

diferente del valor prescrito.
Error de datos de bit de modo que se

utilizan para inicializar la CPU.

Cach de CPU insuficiente
B
El resultado cuando se ejecuta el

programa en la cach de comando
es diferente del valor deseado.
Velocidad de proceso de memoria

insuficiente
2. Sustituya el RAM DIMM.
[0709, 070A]: Cdigo de error detallado

B
Aunque escriba los datos en la

cach de memoria, los datos se
escriben realmente en otra rea de
memoria (no en la cach).
SPD incorrecto
Error de configuracin de modo de
arranque
172
Tablas de SC
[0801, 0804, 0807, 0808, 0809, 80A]: Cdigo de error detallado

B
Se produce un error al comprobar el

TLB.

[4002-4005]: Cdigo de error detallado

B
821
Se produce el error de clculo en la

CPU.
CPU defectuosa
1. Sustituya la CPU
Error de autodiagnstico: ASIC

Error ASIC
[0B00]
Se ha producido el error de
comprobacin escribir y verificar
(write-&-verify) en ASIC.

1. Sustituya el controlador.
ASIC no detectado
[0B06]
ASIC (placa del controlador

defectuosa)
No se detecta el ASIC de E/S.
Conexin incorrecta entre North

Bridge y PCI I/F.
Error de temporizador entre ASIC y CPU
[0D05]
La CPU comprueba si el
temporizador de ASIC funciona
correctamente en comparacin con
el temporizador de la CPU. Si el
temporizador de ASIC no funciona
en el intervalo especificado, se
muestra este cdigo de SC.
Problema del firmware del sistema

RAM-DIMM defectuoso
Instale de nuevo el firmware del
sistema del controlador.
1. Sustituya el RAM-DIMM.
Error del dispositivo de puente de vdeo (ASIC) 1

[50A1]
La CPU no detecta el dispositivo de

puente de vdeo.
I/F defectuosa entre el dispositivo de

puente de vdeo y el controlador
173
Error de registro del dispositivo de puente de vdeo (ASIC) 1

[50A2]
La CPU detecta el dispositivo de

puente de vdeo, pero detecta datos
de error procedentes del dispositivo
de puente de vdeo.
I/F defectuosa entre el dispositivo

de puente de vdeo y el controlador
Error de autodiagnstico: HDD (unidad de disco duro)

822
[XXXX]: Cdigo de error detallado

Cuando se enciende el interruptor principal o se inicia el autodiagnstico, el disco duro
permanece ocupado durante el tiempo especificado o ms.
[3003]
Error de fin de tiempo
Conexin suelta
Disco duro defectuoso
[3004]
Error de comando.
1. Compruebe que el disco duro est

correctamente conectado al
controlador.
2. Sustituya el disco duro.
Sustituya el controlador.
823
Error de autodiagnstico: NIB

Error de suma de verificacin de la direccin MAC
[6101]
El resultado de la suma de
verificacin de la direccin MAC no
coincide con la suma de verificacin
almacenada en ROM.
Error del PHY IC

[6104]
No se reconoce correctamente al
PHY IC del controlador.
Igual que SC823-[6101]
Error del circuito cerrado de PHY IC

[6105]
174
Se produjo un error durante la

prueba de circuito cerrado del PHY
IC del controlador.
Igual que SC823-[6101]
Tablas de SC
Error de autodiagnstico: NVRAM

Conexin suelta
NVRAM estndar defectuosa
824
[1401]
El controlador no puede reconocer

la NVRAM estndar instalada o
detecta que la NVRAM es
defectuosa.
1. Compruebe que la NVRAM estndar
est firmemente instalada en el
zcalo.
2. Sustituya la NVRAM.
Error de autodiagnstico: RTC/NVRAM opcional

[1501]: Error de reloj
B
Se reconoce un dispositivo
RTC, y la diferencia entre el
dispositivo RTC y la CPU
excede el lmite definido.
RTC defectuoso
1. Sustituya el dispositivo RTC.
No se reconoce ningn
dispositivo RTC.
826
[15FF]: RTC no detectado

NVRAM sin RTC instalado
B
827
No se detecta el dispositivo RTC.
Batera de reserva descargada

1. Sustituya la NVRAM con otra
NVRAM con un dispositivo RTC.
Error de autodiagnstico: RAM

Error de verificacin
Conexin suelta
[0201]
Error detectado durante una

comprobacin de escritura/
verificacin de la RAM estndar
(SDRAM DIMM).
SDRAM DIMM defectuoso

1. Sustituya el SDRAM DIMM.
175
Error de memoria residente

RAM DIMM defectuoso
[0202]
Los valores SPD en todo el RAM

DIMM son incorrectos o ilegibles.
SPD ROM defectuosa en RAM DIMM

Bus 12C defectuoso
828
Error de autodiagnstico: ROM

Error de cdigo de recuento de arranque
[0101]
Se comprueba el monitor de
arranque y el programa de OS
almacenado en la ROM DIMM. Si
la suma de verificacin del
programa es incorrecta, se muestra
este cdigo de SC.
DIMM de ROM defectuosa

1. Sustituya la DIMM de ROM.
Error de autodiagnstico: RAM opcional

Compruebe el error para la RAM opcional.
829
[0301]
Error de verificacin (Ranura 1)
[0302]
Error de composicin (Ranura 1)
835
[1102]
Asegrese de que la RAM residente

est instalada en la ranura correcta.
Asegrese de que la RAM opcional
est instalada en la ranura correcta
(Ranura 0)
Error de autodiagnstico: Dispositivo Centronic
El conector de bucle de retorno est

conectado pero la prueba genera un
error.
Error del conector IEEE1284

Conector de bucle de retorno
Centronic defectuoso
Error de dispositivo ASIC
[110C]
El conector de bucle de retorno est

conectado pero la prueba genera un
error.
Error del conector IEEE1284

176
Tablas de SC
[1120]
El conector de bucle de retorno

Centronic no est conectado para la
prueba de autodiagnstico
detallada.
El conector de bucle de retorno

Centronic no est correctamente
conectado
Dispositivo ASIC defectuoso
Error de autodiagnstico: generador del reloj

838
[2701]
839
Se ha producido un error de
verificacin al leer los datos de
configuracin del generador del
reloj por medio del bus I2C.
Generador del reloj defectuoso

Bus I2C defectuoso
Puerto I2C defectuoso en la CPU
Error de USB NAND Flash ROM
[9101]
No se puede leer la ID de la USB

NAND Flash ROM.
[9110]
La USB NAND Flash ROM est

desconectada.
Error de arranque de tarjeta inalmbrica
853
La mquina arranca. La placa de

conexin de la tarjeta IEEE802 11b
se reconoce. La tarjeta LAN
inalmbrica o la tarjeta Bluetooth no
se reconocen.
Conexin suelta entre la tarjeta

inalmbrica y la placa de conexin
Error de acceso a la tarjeta inalmbrica
854
La mquina ha estado leyendo los

datos de la tarjeta. La mquina
pierde acceso a la tarjeta; la placa
de conexin de la tarjeta LAN
inalmbrica o la tarjeta Bluetooth se
reconoce.
Conexin suelta entre la tarjeta

inalmbrica y la placa de conexin
Error de tarjeta inalmbrica

855
Se encuentran algunos datos no

vlidos en la tarjeta.
Tarjeta inalmbrica defectuosa
177
Error de la placa de conexin de la tarjeta inalmbrica

856
Se ha detectado un error en la placa

de conexin de la tarjeta LAN
inalmbrica o la tarjeta Bluetooth.
Placa de conexin de la tarjeta

inalmbrica defectuosa
Error de interfaz USB

857
Se ha detectado un error de interfaz

USB.
1. Compruebe las conexiones USB y

asegrese de que estn
correctamente conectadas.
Error de unidad de cifrado de disco duro 1

858
Se produce un error grave cuando los datos se cifran para actualizar una clave de
cifrado con la unidad de cifrado de disco duro.
Error de adquisicin de clave de

cifrado:
[0]
El controlador no logra obtener una

nueva clave de cifrado.
Error de ajuste de clave de cifrado
para disco duro:
[1]
El controlador no logra copiar una

nueva clave de cifrado para el disco
duro.
A
[2]
Error de cifrado de datos NVRAM 1:

Se produce un error durante el
cifrado de los datos NVRAM.
Error de cifrado de datos NVRAM 2:
[30]
Se produce un error antes de que se

cifren los datos NVRAM.

Chip SATA defectuoso en la placa

del controlador
NVRAM defectuosa en la placa del
controlador
1. Sustituya la NVRAM.
Otro error:
[31]
178
Se produce un error grave durante el

cifrado de datos.
Igual que SC991
Tablas de SC
Error de unidad de cifrado de disco duro 2

859
Se produce un error grave cuando los datos de disco duro se cifran para actualizar una
clave de cifrado con la unidad de cifrado de disco duro.
No hay ningn disco duro instalado.
Error de comprobacin del disco
duro
[8]
El disco duro no est instalado

correctamente.
Disco duro no formateado

La clave de cifrado del controlador
es diferente de la del disco duro.
1. Instale el disco duro correctamente.
2. Inicialice el disco duro.
C
[9]
Interrupcin del fluido elctrico

durante el cifrado de datos:
No se realiz el cifrado de datos
(NVRAM y disco duro).
Interrupcin del fluido elctrico

durante el cifrado de datos
1. Inicialice el disco duro.
Error de lectura/escritura de datos:

[10]
El error DMAC se detecta dos veces

o ms.
Igual que SC863
Disco duro: error de inicializacin

Disco duro no inicializado
860
El controlador detecta que el disco

duro falla.

1. Vuelva a formatear el disco duro.
Error de nmero de sector defectuoso

862
El nmero de sectores defectuosos en

el disco duro (rea de datos de
imagen) supera 101.

1. Formatee el disco duro con
SP5-832-002.
Disco duro: error de lectura

863
Los datos almacenados en la HDD no

pueden leerse correctamente.
179
Disco duro: error de CRC

864
La transmisin de datos falla mientras

se leen datos o se almacenan datos
en la HDD.

HDD: Error de acceso

865
Se ha detectado un error durante el

funcionamiento de la HDD.

Error de autenticacin de la tarjeta SD

866
Se ha detectado un error de licencia

digital de una aplicacin de la
tarjeta SD.
Los datos de la tarjeta SD estn

daados.
1. Almacene datos correctos en la
tarjeta SD.
Error de tarjeta SD
6
867
Se ha sacado una tarjeta SD de

aplicacin de la ranura de arranque
mientras una aplicacin estaba
activada.
Se expulsa una tarjeta SD de

aplicacin.
Error de acceso a la tarjeta SD

(-13 a -3: Error de sistema de archivos, otro nmero: Error de dispositivo)
La tarjeta SD no est insertada
correctamente
Tarjeta SD defectuosa
Tarjeta del controlador defectuosa
868
B
Se enva un informe de errores
desde el lector de tarjetas SD.
1. En caso de error del sistema de

archivos, formatee la tarjeta SD en el
PC.
2. En caso de error de dispositivo,
apague y vuelva a encender el
interruptor principal.
3. Extraiga y vuelva a instalar la tarjeta
SD.
4. Sustituya la tarjeta SD.
180
Tablas de SC
Error de datos de la libreta de direcciones

Datos daados
870
Se ha accedido a la libreta de
direcciones del disco duro. Se ha
detectado un error en los datos de la
libreta de direcciones; no se leen los
datos de la libreta de direcciones o
no se escriben datos en la libreta de
direcciones.

Software del controlador defectuoso
1. Sustituya el disco duro (los cdigos
de usuario y los contadores se
recuperan cuando se enciende el
interruptor principal si dichos datos
estn almacenados en Smart Device
Monitor for Admin).
Para eliminar el error, aplique cualquiera de las siguientes medidas:

Formatee la libreta de direcciones con SP5-846-050 (todos los datos de la
libreta de direcciones se inicializan, incluidos los cdigos de usuario y
contadores).
Error de datos de registro
Se detect un error en la manipulacin de los datos de registro al encender o durante el

funcionamiento del aparato. Se puede producir debido a que el aparato se ha
desconectado mientras se encontraba en funcionamiento.
876
-001
Error de datos de registro 1
Archivo de datos de registro daado

en el disco duro
1. Inicialice el disco duro con
SP5832-004.
No est instalado un mdulo de
cifrado
-002
1. Desactive la configuracin de
cifrado de registro con SP9730-004
("0" es off.)
2. Instale el mdulo DESS.
181
Clave de cifrado de registro no

vlida debido a datos de NVRAM
defectuosos
-003

SP5832-004.
2. Desactive la configuracin de
cifrado de registro con SP9730-004
("0" es off.)
-004
Funcin de cifrado de registro

inusual debido a datos de NVRAM
defectuosos
SP5832-004.
Se ha instalado una NVRAM o
unidad de disco duro utilizadas en
otro aparato.
-005
1. Instale de nuevo la NVRAM o disco

duro anteriores.
SP5832-004.
-099
Otras causas adems de las

mencionadas
1. Consulte a su supervisor.
Error de autenticacin de TPM
878
El firmware del sistema no est

autenticado por TPM (chip de
seguridad).
Actualizacin incorrecta del

firmware del sistema.
ROM Flash en la placa del
controlador defectuoso
Error de convertidor de formato de archivos (MLB)

880
182
Una solicitud de acceso a la MLB no

ha recibido respuesta dentro del
tiempo especificado.
MLB defectuoso
Tablas de SC
SC9xx
Error de contador total electrnico
900
El valor del contador total no se

ajusta al rango normal.
NVRAM defectuosa
Error de impresora
920
Se ha detectado un error de
aplicacin que detiene el
funcionamiento de la mquina.
Software defectuoso
1. Recurso de hardware inesperado
(por ejemplo, escasez de memoria)
Error de fuentes de la impresora
921
No se encuentra una fuente necesaria

en la tarjeta SD al iniciar la
aplicacin de la impresora.
No se ha encontrado una fuente

necesaria en la tarjeta SD.
Los datos de la tarjeta SD estn
daados.
1. Compruebe que la tarjeta SD
almacena los datos correctos.
Error de archivo de red
925
El archivo de administracin para

archivos de red est daado; los
archivos de red no se leen con
normalidad.
Archivos de red: Trabajos para
imprimir desde Document Server a
travs de un PC y el software
DeskTopBinder
Hardware defectuoso
Datos daados
Software defectuoso
183
Error de ejecucin del software

El software ha intentado realizar una
operacin inesperada.
990
Cuando se produce este error, el

nombre de archivo, la direccin
y los datos se almacenarn en
NVRAM. Esta informacin
puede comprobarse con
SP7-403. Observe los datos y la
situacin en la que se produce
este SC. A continuacin, informe
de los datos y las condiciones al
centro de control tcnico.
Software defectuoso
Parmetro interno incorrecto
Memoria operativa insuficiente
Error de continuidad del programa

991
El software ha intentado realizar una

operacin inesperada. Sin embargo,
a diferencia de SC990, el proceso
puede continuar ejecutndose.
Slo con la sesin iniciada; la

mquina puede continuar
funcionando
Error indefinido
992
184
Se ha producido un error no
controlado por el sistema (el error no
se produce con ningn otro cdigo
SC).
Programa de software defectuoso
Tablas de SC
Error de seleccin de funcin de la aplicacin

El software para dicha aplicacin
est defectuoso
997
La aplicacin seleccionada por la

pulsacin de la tecla del panel de
mandos no se inicia, o bien termina
anormalmente.
Una opcin requerida por la

aplicacin (RAM, DIMM, placa) no
se encuentra instalada.
Anidamiento de direcciones de
grupo de fax demasiado
complicado
1. En caso de un problema de
funcionamiento del fax, simplifique el
anidamiento de direcciones de
grupo del fax.
Error de inicio de la aplicacin

El software para dicha aplicacin
est defectuoso
998
Despus de encender la mquina, la

aplicacin no comienza en 60 s.
(Ninguna aplicacin comienza o
finaliza con normalidad).
Una opcin requerida por la

aplicacin (RAM, DIMM, placa) no
se encuentra instalada.
1. Compruebe la configuracin de
SP5875-001. Si est configurado
en "1 (OFF)", cmbielo a "0 (OFF)".
185
Defectos de los componentes elctricos

Sensor/switch
Sensores
Sensor de registro
CN127
SN
Sensor de fin de
papel
CN129
Sensor de papel
agotado en bypass
CN130
Sensor de trayecto
del papel
CN128
Sensor de salida
Sensor de densidad
de imagen (ID)
SN
SN
SN
CN128
SN
CN132
Mensaje
Notas
Atasco de papel
Cargar papel
(Ninguno)
La mquina no puede detectar

papel en la bandeja bypass.
Atasco de papel
Atasco de papel
(Ninguno)
La calidad de impresin puede

empeorar.
CN123
SC901
El conector se comparte con el

contador total mecnico.
PCU
Restablecer PCU
correctamente
Sensor de posicin
inicial del escner
CN126
SC120
SN
SC120
Sensor de la tapa
del cristal de
exposicin
CN126
SC120
SN
(Ninguno)
Sensor de densidad
de tner (TD)
186
Conector
SN
La copiadora no se calienta al abrir

la tapa de la placa.
Defectos de los componentes elctricos
Sensores
Conector
Mensaje
Sensor de apertura
de la gua de DF
DF CN103
Atasco de papel
SN
(Ninguno)
Sensor de presencia
de original DF
DF CN103
Atasco de papel
Sensores
(Ninguno)
Sensor de registro
de DF
Sensor de inversin
Sensor de salida
DF CN103
No se detectan originales.
-
Atasco de papel
Los originales se transportan

correctamente.
DF CN103
Atasco de papel
SN
(Ninguno)
SN
DF CN103
Atasco de papel
SN
CN114
Puerta derecha abierta
SW
Puerta frontal/derecha
abierta
El mensaje depende del circuito que

est abierto (blanco frontal; azul
derecho).
CN114
SW
Switch de la puerta
delantera
Interruptor de puerta
derecha
Notas
CNxxx: El conector de la placa de BICU.

DF CNxxx: El conector de la placa de conexin de DF.
SN: El conector del sensor.
SW: El conector del interruptor.
PCU: El conector de la PCU.
Condiciones de fusibles fundidos

Todos estos fusibles se encuentran en la unidad de alimentacin.
187
Fusible
Clasificacin
Con interruptor principal conectado
120 V
220 240 V
FU1
15A/125V
8 A/250 V
No hay respuesta
FU2
5A/125V
2,5A/250 V
No hay respuesta
Presentacin de LED de BICU

Nmero
LED2
Funcin
El LED2 parpadea con funcionamiento normal.
188
Funcin Guardar tarjeta (Card Save)

Aspectos generales
Guardar tarjeta:
La funcin Guardar tarjeta se utiliza para guardar los trabajos de impresin recibidos mediante la
impresora en una tarjeta SD sin salida de impresin. El modo Guardar tarjeta se alterna utilizando
el nmero de bit 4 del bit switch #1 de la impresora.Guardar tarjeta permanecer activada hasta
que se llene la tarjeta SD, o hasta que se hayan utilizado todos los nombres de archivo.
Las capturas se almacenan en la tarjeta SD en la carpeta /prt/cardsave. Los nombres de archivo
se asignan secuencialmente desde PRT00000.prn a PRT99999.prn. Se crear un archivo
adicional con el nombre PRT.CTL. Este archivo contiene una lista de todos los archivos creados en
la tarjeta con la funcin Guardar tarjeta.
Los archivos anteriormente almacenados en la tarjeta SD se pueden sobrescribir o dejarlos
intactos. Guardar tarjeta SD dispone de los elementos de men "Aadir" y "Nueva".
Guardar tarjeta (Aadir): anexa archivos a la tarjeta SD. No sobrescribe los archivos
existentes. Si la tarjeta se llena o se utilizan todos los nombres de archivos, se visualizar un
error en el panel de mandos. Los trabajos posteriores no se almacenarn.
Guardar tarjeta (Nueva): sobrescribe los archivos en el directorio /prt/cardsave de la

tarjeta.
Limitacin:
Guardar tarjeta no se puede utilizar con los comandos de verificacin del estado PJL. Las
verificaciones del estado PJL no funcionarn. Adems, es posible que hagan que no se pueda
guardar la tarjeta.
Procedimiento
1. Apague el interruptor de alimentacin principal.
2. Inserte la tarjeta SD en la ranura de servicio del circuito del controlador. Despus, coloque el
interruptor principal en posicin de encendido.
Para determinar qu ranura es la ranura de servicio, consulte el manual de servicio.
3. Entre en el modo SP.
4. Seleccione SP de impresora.
5. Seleccione Modo de servicio y pulse el botn OK.
189
6. Seleccione 1.001 Bit Switch y pulse el botn OK.
7. Pulse el botn "OK" de nuevo.
8. Utilice la tecla numrica "4" para activar el bit 4. El resultado debe parecerse a: 00010000. Esta
funcin Guardar tarjeta aparecer en Imprimir lista/prueba.
6
9. Pulse varias veces el botn Escape, para salir del modo SP.
10. Pulse el botn
11. Utilice la tecla de flecha y seleccione Funciones de impresora.
12. Utilice la tecla de flecha y seleccione Imprimir lista/prueba.
13. Utilice la tecla de flecha y seleccione Guardar tarjeta (Aadir) o Guardar tarjeta (Nuevo).
190
14. Para activar los ajustes recin creados, seleccione el botn switch y despus pulse el botn
Retorno para salir del men Imprimir lista/prueba.
15. Enve un trabajo a la impresora.
16. En cuanto la impresora recibe la informacin, sta se almacenar en la tarjeta SD
automticamente sin salida de impresin. No se muestra ningn mensaje en la pantalla que
indique que la operacin de Guardar tarjeta se haya realizado correctamente.
17. Pulse el botn "Return" (Retorno) para salir del modo Guardar tarjeta.
18. Restablezca la configuracin de bit switch a la predeterminada 00000000.
19. Retire la tarjeta SD una vez que se apague el interruptor de alimentacin principal.
Mensajes de error
Mensajes de error de Guardar tarjeta:
Error de inic.: no se pudo inicializar un proceso de almacenamiento (por ejemplo, deteccin de
tarjeta, cambio a modo de kernel).
No se encontr la tarjeta: no se pudo detectar la tarjeta en la ranura.
Sin memoria: memoria de trabajo insuficiente para procesar el trabajo.
Error de escritura: error al escribir en la tarjeta.
Otro error: se ha producido un error desconocido.
Si se produce un error, pulsar "OK" har que el dispositivo deseche el trabajo y vuelva el estado en el
que est listo.
191
Gua de solucin de problemas del fax

Cdigos de error de fax
Solucin de problemas de IFAX
Solucin de problemas del IP-Fax
192
7. Ahorro de energa
Ahorro de energa
Modos ahorro de energa
Los clientes deben utilizar los modos de ahorro de energa correctamente para ahorrar energa y
proteger el medio ambiente.
El rea sombreada en este diagrama representa la cantidad de energa que se ahorra cuando los
temporizadores se ajustan a sus valores predeterminados. Si se cambian los temporizadores, la energa
ahorrada ser diferente. Por ejemplo, si todos los temporizadores se ajustan a 240 min., el rea gris
desaparecer y no se ahorrar nada de energa antes de que transcurran los 240 min.
Ajustes de temporizador
El usuario puede ajustar estos temporizadores con User Tools (Herramientas de usuario)[System
Settings > Timer Settings (> Ajustes del sistema > Ajustes de temporizador)].
Temporizador de desconexin automtica (1 240 min): Desconexin automtica/En espera.
Ajustes predeterminados: 1 minuto
Temporizador de ahorro de energa (1 240 min): Modo de baja potencia. Ajuste
predeterminado: 15 minutos
193
7. Ahorro de energa
Normalmente, Auto Off timer < Energy Saver timer (Temporizador de desconexin automtica <
Temporizador de ahorro de energa). Pero, por ejemplo, si Temporizador de ahorro de energa < o =
Temporizador de desconexin automtica, la mquina entra inmediatamente en modo de desconexin
cuando expira el Temporizador de desconexin automtica. Omite el Modo de desconexin
automtica.
Ejemplo
Desconexin automtica: 1 min.
Baja potencia: 15 min.
La mquina pasa al modo de baja potencia despus de 1 minuto. El Modo Desconexin/En espera no
se utiliza.
Recomendacin
Se recomienda mantener los ajustes predeterminados.
Si el cliente quiere cambiar estos ajustes, explquele que sus gastos de energa podran aumentar,
con el consiguiente efecto sobre el medio ambiente debido al uso de esa energa extra.
Si fuera necesario cambiar los ajustes, trate de asegurarse de que el temporizador de

desconexin automtica no tiene un valor excesivo. Primero pruebe con un valor ms pequeo
(30 min. por ejemplo) y, si el cliente no est satisfecho, pase a otro mayor (60 min.).
Si se ajustan todos los temporizadores a su valor mximo, la mquina no empezar a ahorrar
energa hasta que hayan trascurrido 240 minutos despus del ltimo trabajo. Esto significa que
despus de que el cliente haya terminado de usar la mquina ese da, se consumir la energa
que podra haberse ahorrado.
Si cambia los ajustes, la energa consumida puede medirse con SP8941, como se explica a
continuacin.
Eficacia de ahorro de energa

SP 8941 (Estado de la mquina) mantiene un registro de la cantidad de tiempo que la mquina pasa
en cada modo.
8941-001: Modo de funcionamiento
8941-002: Modo de espera
Modo panel desactivado
8941-004: Modo de baja potencia
8941-005: Modo de desconexin/reposo
Con estos datos y los valores de consumo elctrico de las especificaciones, podemos estimar la
cantidad de energa utilizada por la mquina.
194
Ahorro de energa
Esto slo debe utilizarse como valor de referencia, porque las especificaciones de consumo elctrico se
miden en un entorno controlado con una alimentacin elctrica constante.
Para obtener una medicin exacta en las instalaciones del cliente, debe utilizarse un vatmetro para
medir la energa realmente consumida.
Para usar SP8941 con el fin de calcular la energa consumida:
Al comienzo del periodo de medicin, lea los valores de SP8941 001 a 005.
Al final del periodo de medicin, vuelva a leer los valores de SP8941 001 a 005.
Calcule la cantidad de tiempo pasado en cada modo (reste la primera medicin de la ltima).
Multiplique el resultado por el consumo elctrico especificado para cada modo.
Convierta el resultado a kWh (kilovatios hora)
A continuacin se ofrece un ejemplo de clculo:
Mquina
Fecha
Modo
de
funcionami
ento
Consumo
elctrico (W):
Datos: a
1081.8
SP8941:
Estado de
la
mquina
001:
Tiempo de
funcionam
iento
Diferencia
entre horas
Consumo de
energa
(Datos:a x
Datos:d)
Hora de
inicio:
Hora de
fin:
(min.)
(min.)
(Datos:b Datos: c)
Datos: b
Datos: c
(min.)
(Wmin.)
Datos: d
Datos: e
21089.0
21386.0
297.0
321294.6
306163.0
308046.0
1883.0
402962.0
71386.0
75111.0
3725.0
797150.0
Preparada
modo
002:
(en
espera)
Tiempo de
espera
Modo de
ahorro de
energa
(Panel
desactivad
o)
214.0
003:
214.0
Tiempo de
ahorro de
energa
195
7. Ahorro de energa
004:
Modo de
bajo
consumo
153.0
Tiempo de
baja
potencia
154084.0
156340.0
2256.0
345168.0
508776.0
520377.0
11601.0
81207.0
005:
Modo
Desconexi
n/En
espera
7.0
Tiempo de
modo de
desconexi
n
Tiempo total de datos: d (min.)

Tiempo total de datos: d/60 min. (hora)
Consumo elctrico total de datos: e (Wmin.)
Consumo elctrico total de datos: e /60 min./1000 W (KWH)
196
19762.0
329.37
1947781.60
32.46
Ahorro de papel
Ahorro de papel
Eficacia de la funcin Dplex/Combinar
Las funciones dplex/combinar reducen la cantidad de papel utilizado. Esto hace que se utilice menos
energa en general para la produccin del papel, lo que mejora el medio ambiente.
1. Dplex:
Reduce el volumen de papel a la mitad.
7
2. Modo Combinar:
Reduce el volumen de papel a la mitad.
3. Dplex + Combinar
Al utilizar ambas funciones a la vez, puede reducirse tres cuartas partes el volumen de papel.
197
7. Ahorro de energa
Para comprobar el consumo de papel, consulte el contador de totales y el contador dplex.

El contador de totales cuenta todas las pginas impresas.
Por cada pgina dplex, el contador de totales suma 2.
Para un trabajo dplex de un original de tres pginas, el contador de totales suma 3.
El contador dplex cuenta las pginas que tienen imgenes en ambos lados.
Por cada pgina dplex, el contador dplex suma 1.
Para un trabajo dplex de un original de tres pginas, el contador dplex slo cuenta 1, incluso si
se utilizan dos hojas.
Recomendacin
Explique estas funciones a los clientes para que puedan reducir el uso de papel.
Modelo S-C4.5
Contador de totales: SP 8581-001
Contador dplex: SP 8411-001
Modo de una cara con Combinar: SP 8421-004
Modo dplex con Combinar: SP 8421-005
La siguiente tabla muestra el ahorro de papel y cmo los contadores se incrementan con algunos
ejemplos de trabajos de una sola cara y dplex.
Modo dplex:
198
Contador dplex
Originales
Hoja simple
utilizada
Hojas dplex
utilizadas
Papel
ahorrado
Contador total
SP8501-001
Dplex (SP8411
001)
Ahorro de papel
Contador dplex
Originales
Hoja simple
utilizada
Hojas dplex
utilizadas
Papel
ahorrado
Contador total
SP8501-001
Dplex (SP8411
001)
10
10
10
20
20
10
10
20
10
Si se utiliza el modo combinado, los contadores de totales y dplex funcionan de la misma forma que
se ha explicado anteriormente. La siguiente tabla muestra el ahorro de papel y cmo los contadores se
incrementan con algunos ejemplos de trabajos dplex/combinados.
Modo 2 en 1:
Originales
Hoja simple
utilizada
Hojas dplex
utilizadas
Papel
ahorrado
Contador total
Contador dplex
SP8501-001
SP8421-004
10
10
20
20
10
10
10
10
Dplex + Modo 2 en 1:
Originales
Hoja simple
utilizada
Hojas dplex
utilizadas
Papel
ahorrado
Contador total
Contador dplex
SP8501-001
SP8421-005
199
7. Ahorro de energa
Originales
Hoja simple
utilizada
Hojas dplex
utilizadas
Papel
ahorrado
Contador total
Contador dplex
SP8501-001
SP8421-005
10
10
11
11
12
12
200
ES
Model S-C4.5
Machine Code: D115/D116
Appendices
26 November, 2010
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Appendix: Specifications
Specifications......................................................................................................................................................3
Copier.............................................................................................................................................................3
Printer...............................................................................................................................................................5
Scanner...........................................................................................................................................................6
FAX..................................................................................................................................................................7
ARDF.............................................................................................................................................................11
Paper Tray Unit............................................................................................................................................12
Supported Paper Sizes....................................................................................................................................13
Original Paper Sizes....................................................................................................................................13
Paper Feed...................................................................................................................................................14
2. Appendix: Preventive Maintenance Tables

Maintenance Tables........................................................................................................................................17
3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables

System Service Mode......................................................................................................................................19
Service Mode Tables...................................................................................................................................19
Input Check (SP5-803).............................................................................................................................117
Output Check (SP5-804).........................................................................................................................119
Printer Service Mode.................................................................................................................................121
Scanner Program Mode Table.................................................................................................................126
4. Appendix: Fax Troubleshooting Guide

Fax Error Codes.............................................................................................................................................129
IFAX Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................148
IP-Fax Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................................151
IP-Fax Transmission...................................................................................................................................151
IP-Fax Reception........................................................................................................................................154
5. Appendix: Fax Service Program

System Service Mode....................................................................................................................................157
SP1-XXX (Bit Switches)..............................................................................................................................157
SP2-XXX (RAM Data)................................................................................................................................158
SP3-XXX (Tel Line Settings).......................................................................................................................158
SP4-XXX (ROM Versions).........................................................................................................................159
SP5-XXX (Initializing).................................................................................................................................159
SP6-XXX (Reports).....................................................................................................................................160
SP7-XXX (Test Modes)..............................................................................................................................162
Bit Switches.....................................................................................................................................................163
System Switches.........................................................................................................................................163
I-Fax Switches ...........................................................................................................................................175
Printer Switches..........................................................................................................................................180
Communication Switches..........................................................................................................................185
G3-1 Switches...........................................................................................................................................191
IP Fax Switches..........................................................................................................................................200
NCU Parameters............................................................................................................................................209
Dedicated Transmission Parameters.............................................................................................................223
Programming Procedure...........................................................................................................................223
Parameters.................................................................................................................................................223
Service RAM Addresses................................................................................................................................232
Specifications
Copier
Configuration:
Desktop
Copy Process:
Laser beam scanning and electro-photographic printing
Originals:
Sheet/Book/Object
Maximum
Original Size:
A4 / 81/2" x 14"
A4 / 81/2" x 14" (ARDF)
Maximum
A4 SEF / 81/2" x 11" SEF (Copier's paper tray)
A4 SEF / 81/2" x 14" SEF (Bypass)
A4 SEF / 81/2" x 14" SEF (Optional paper tray)
A4 SEF / 81/2" x 14" SEF (Duplex)
Minimum
Copy Paper Size:
A5 LEF / 81/2" x 51/2" LEF (Copier's paper tray)

A6 SEF/ 81/2" x 51/2" (Bypass)
A4 SEF / 81/2" x 11 SEF (Optional paper tray unit)
A4 SEF / 81/2" x 11 SEF (Duplex)
Custom sizes in the bypass tray:
Width: 90 216 mm (3.5" 8.5")
Length: 139 600mm (5.48" 23.62")
Standard paper tray; optional paper tray: 60 90 g/m2, 16 24 lb.
Copy Paper Weight:
Bypass: 60 157 g/m2, 16 42 lb.

Duplex: 64 90 g/m2, 20 24 lb.
Enlargement
Reproduction Ratios:
Full Size
Reduction
A4 Version
LT Version
200%
155%
141%
129%
100%
100%
93%
93%
71%
78%
50%
65%
Zoom:
50% to 200%, in 1% steps
Power Source:
120 V, 60 Hz or 220 240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption:
Maximum:
900 W or less (EU), 1000 W or less (NA)
Energy Saver:
35 W or less
Sleep Mode:
10 W or less
Off Mode:
None
Sound Power Level

Noise Emission:
Standby
40 dB(A) or less
Operating (copier only)
63 dB(A) or less
Operating (full-system)
67 dB(A) or less
Copier: 485 x 450 x 371 mm (19.4" x 18" x 14.8")
Dimensions (W x D x H)
With optional paper tray unit: 485 x 454 x 511 mm (18.4" x 17.7" x
20.1")
Weight:
29 kg (66 lb.) or less
Resolution:
600 dpi
Copying Speed in Multicopy

Mode (copies/minute):
Memory Copy: 20 cpm (A4 / 81/2" x 11"; 100%)
Warm-up Time:
30 seconds or less (at 20C [68F])
DF 1 to 1: 16cpm
Specifications
7.5 seconds or less

Note: Measurement conditions
First Copy Time:
From the ready state, with the polygonal mirror motor spinning.
A4/LT copying
From copier's paper tray

100% size
Copy Number Input:
Numeric keypad, 1 to 99 (increment, decrement)
Manual Image Density:
5 steps
Auto Off Timer
Energy Saver Timer:
Default: 1 minute
Range: 1 to 240 minutes
Default: 1 minute
Rage: 1 to 240 minutes
Paper Tray: 250 sheets
Copy Paper Capacity:
Optional Paper Tray Unit: 500 sheets x 1

Bypass Tray: 100 sheets
Copy-Tray Capacity
250 sheets
Toner Replenishment:
Cartridge replacement (230 g/cartridge)
Toner Yield
7k copies /toner bottle (A4, 6% full black)

Auto reverse document feeder
Optional Equipment:
Paper tray unit

Anti-condensation heater for paper tray unit
Printer
600 dpi (PCL 6/PCL5e/PS3/RPCS)
Resolution:
300 dpi (PCL5e/PS3)

600 dpi (RPCS (XPS))
Printing speed:
20 cpm (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
USB 2.0 interface,

Ethernet interface (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T)
Interface:
IEEE1284
IEEE802.11a/g (Wireless LAN) (option)
Gigabit Ethernat (option)
Network protocol:
TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/SPX, AppleTalk, RHPP

PJL
PCL5e/XL
Printer language:
RPCS (XPS)
Adobe PS3/PDF (option)
PCL:
45 fonts
13 International fonts
PCL option:
Resident Fonts:
OCR, Barcode
Adobe PS3/PDF:
136 fonts
Summary:
4 Arial
Memory:
640 MB
Operating systems supported

by this machine:
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/Server2008
Required network cable:
MacOS8.6 to 9, MacOSX10.1 or later

100BASE-TX/10BASE-T shielded twisted-pair (STP, Category/
Type5) cable.
Gigabit Ethernet- Category6 cable
Scanner
Scan method
Flatbed scanning
Specifications
B/W: 20 pages/ min.

[Scan Size: A4 SEF, compression, Resolution 200 dpi]
Scan speed *1
ITU-T No.1 Chart

Full Color: 9 pages/ min.
[Scan Size: A4 SEF, compression (level3), Resolution 200 dpi]

ISO/JIS-SCID N5 Chart
Maximum power
consumption
Less than 900 W
Image sensor type
CCD Image Sensor
Scan types
Sheet, book
Ethernet interface (10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX)
Interface
IEEE1284
IEEE 802.11a/g (Wireless LAN),
Resolution
Variable range of scan
resolution
B/W: 600 dpi

Full color: 300 dpi - 600 dpi
Setting range: 100 dpi - 600 dpi
*1 Scanning speeds vary according to machine operating conditions, computer (specifications, network
traffic, software, etc.), and original types.
FAX
General
Type:
Circuit:
Connection:
Desktop type transceiver

PSTN
PBX
Direct couple
Book (Face down):

Maximum Width: 216 mm [8.5 inch]
ARDF (Face up):
(Single-sided document)
Original Size:
Length: 139 - 1200 mm [5.5 - 47.2 inch]

Width: 139 - 216 mm [5.5 - 8.5 inch]
(Double-sided document)
Length: 160 - 356 mm [6.3 - 14.0 inch]
Width: 139 - 216 mm [5.5 - 8.5 inch]
Scanning Method:
Flat bed, with CCD

G3
8 x 3.85 lines/mm (Standard)
Resolution:
8 x 7.7 lines/mm (Detail)

8 x 15.4 line/mm (Fine)
200 x 100 dpi (Standard)
200 x 200 dpi (Detail)
Transmission Time:
G3: 3 at 28.8Kbps; Measured with G3 ECM using memory for an ITU-T

#1 test document (Slerexe letter) at standard resolution
Data Compression:
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Protocol:
Group 3 with ECM
Modulation:
V.34, V.33, V.17 (TCM), V.29 (QAM),

V.27ter (G3), V.8, V.21 (G3)
G3: 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/
Data Rate:
19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
Automatic fallback
I/O Rate:
With ECM: 0 ms/line

Without ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line
Specifications
ECM: 128 KB
SAF
Memory Capacity:
Standard: 4 MB
Page Memory:
Standard: 4 MB (Print: 2 MB + Scanner: 2 MB)
IFAX Specifications
Local area network
Connectivity:
Ethernet 100base-Tx/10base-T
IEEE1394 (IP over 1394)
IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN)
Main scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi
Resolution:
Sub scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi, 100 dpi

To use 400 dpi, IFAX SW01 Bit 4 must be set to 1.
1 s (through a LAN to the server)
Condition: ITU-T #1 test document (Selerexe Letter)
MTF correction: OFF
Transmission Time:
TTI: None
Resolution: 200 x 100 dpi
Communication speed: 10 Mbps
Correspondent device: E-mail server
Line conditions: No terminal access
Maximum message width is A4/LT.
Document Size:
To use B4 and A3 width, IFAX SW00 Bit 1 (B4) and/or Bit 2 (A3) must
be set to 1.
Single/multi-part
E-mail File Format:
MIME conversion
Image: TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR)
Transmission:
Protocol:
SMTP, TCP/IP
Reception:
POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP
Data Rate:
Authentication
Method:
Remark:
100 Mbps(100base-Tx)
10 Mbps (10base-T)
SMTP-AUTH
POP before SMTP
A-POP
The machine must be set up as an e-mail client before installation. Any client
PCs connected to the machine through a LAN must also be e-mail clients, or
some features will not work (e.g. Autorouting).
IP-FAX Specifications
Local Area Network
Network:
Ethernet/10base-T, 100base-TX
IEEE1394 (IP over 1394)
IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN)
Scan line density:

Original size:
Maximum scanning size:
8 x 7.7lines/mm, 200 x 200dpi (detailed characters)

Maximum A3 or 11"x 17" (DLT)
Standard: A3, 297mm x 432mm
Irregular: 297mm x 1200mm
Transmission protocol:
Recommended: T.38 Annex protocol, TCP, UDP/IP communication
Compatible machines:
IP-Fax compatible machines
IP-Fax transmission
function:
10
8 x 3.85 lines/mm, 200 x 100dpi (standard characters)
Specify IP address and send fax to an IP-Fax compatible fax through a

network.
Also capable of sending fax from a G3 fax connected to the public telephone
lines via a VoIP gateway.
Specifications
Receive a fax sent from an IP-Fax compatible fax through a network.

IP-Fax reception function: Also capable of receiving fax from a G3 fax connected the public telephone
lines via a VoIP gateway.
Fax Unit Configuration

Component
Code
No.
FCU
MBU
Speaker
Handset Type 1018
Remarks
Standard for D115/D116
B433
NA only. Common with PG-C1
ARDF
Original Size:
Standard:
A4 to A5; 81/2" x 14" to 81/2" x 51/2"
Custom
(Simplex):
Width: 139 mm to 216 mm
Custom
(Duplex):
Width: 139 mm to 216 mm
Length: 139 mm to 1260 mm
Length: 160 mm to 356*1 mm
*1: When you use 310 mm or more originals, originals weighing

55k (17 lb. / 64 g/m2) or less cannot be used in duplex scanning
mode.
Original Weight:
52105 g/m2 (1428 lb.)
Table Capacity:
50 sheets (80 g/m2, 21 lb.)
Original Standard Position:
Center
Separation:
FRR
Transport:
Roller transport
Feed Order:
Top first
Reproduction Range:
50200%
11
Power Source:
Power Consumption:
24 and 5 Vdc from the copier

Operating: 50 W or less
On standby: 1.2 W or less
Dimensions (W x D x H):
485 x 360 x 120 mm (19.1" x 14.2" x 4.72")
Weight:
4.9 kg (10.8 lb) (excluding the original table and platen cover)
Paper Tray Unit

Paper Sizes:
A4 SEF, 8" x 11" SEF, 8" x 13" SEF,

8" x 14" SEF
Paper Weight:
60 90 g/m2, 16 24 lb.
Tray Capacity:
500 sheets (80 g/m2, 21 lb. ) x 1 tray
Paper Feed System:
Feed roller and friction pad
Power Source:
24 Vdc and 5 Vdc, from copier. If optional tray heater is installed,

the copier also supplies Vac (120 Vac or
220 240 Vac).
Power Consumption:
Maximum: 15 W (excluding optional tray heater)
Average:
14 W (excluding optional tray heater)
Weight:
Not above 6 kg (13.2. lb.)
Size (W x D x H):
430 x 414 x 140 mm (16.9" x 16.3" x 5.5")
Two can be installed.
12
Supported Paper Sizes

1
Original Paper Sizes

The copier and ARDF do not detect original paper sizes. The following table lists the paper sizes that the
ARDF can transport.
Paper
Size (W x L)
Book
A3 SEF
297 x 420 mm
B4 SEF
ARDF
Simpl.
Dupl.
257 x 364 mm
A4 SEF
210 x 297 mm
A4 LEF
297 x 210 mm
B5 SEF
182 x 257 mm
B5 LEF
257 x 182 mm
A5 SEF
148 x 210 mm
A5 LEF
210 x 148 mm
B6 SEF
128 x 182 mm
B6 LEF
182 x 128 mm
A6 SEF
105 x 148 mm
8K SEF
267 x 390 mm
16K SEF
195 x 267 mm
16K LEF
267 x 195 mm
DLT SEF
11.0" x 17.0"
LG SEF
8.5" x 14.0"
LT SEF
X*1
X*2
8.5" x 11.0"
LT LEF
11.0" x 8.5"
Executive SEF
7.25" x 10.5"
13
Paper
Size (W x L)
Book
HLT SEF
5.5" x 8.5"
HLT LEF
ARDF
Simpl.
Dupl.
8.5" x 5.5"
F/GL (F4) SEF
8.0" x 13.0"
X*1
X*2
Foolscap SEF
8.5" x 13.0"
X*1
X*2
Folio SEF
8.25" x 13.0"
X*1
X*2
Government
8.25" x 14"
X*1
X*2
USB4 SEF
10.0" x 14.0"
Eng Quarto SEF
8.0" x 10.0"
X*2
Eng Quarto LEF
10.0" x 8.0"
X*3
X*2, 4
Custom:
Width 139-216 mm
Length 139-356 mm
Symbol meanings:
X: Can use
: Cannot use
*1: Can be used when the ARDF is installed
*2: 55k (17 lb./ 64 g/m2) or less original cannot be used.
*3: Width: 139-216 mm, Length: 139-1260 mm
*4: Width 139-216 mm, Length: 160-356 mm
Paper Feed
The copier and optional paper feed unit do not detect paper sizes. The following table lists the paper sizes
that the copier and optional paper feed unit can transport.
Paper
14
Size (W x L)
Regular
By-pass
Duplex
Optional PFU
A3 SEF
297 x 420 mm
B4 SEF
257 x 364 mm
Paper
Size (W x L)
Regular
By-pass
Duplex
Optional PFU
A4 SEF
210 x 297 mm
A4 LEF
297 x 210 mm
B5 SEF
182 x 257 mm
B5 LEF
257 x 182 mm
A5 SEF
148 x 210 mm
A5 LEF
210 x 148 mm
B6 SEF
128 x 182 mm
B6 LEF
182 x 128 mm
A6 SEF
105 x 148 mm
8K SEF
267 x 390 mm
16K SEF
195 x 267 mm
16K LEF
267 x 195 mm
DLT SEF
11.0" x 17.0"
LG SEF
8.5" x 14.0"
LT SEF
8.5" x 11.0"
LT LEF
11.0" x 8.5"
Executive SEF
7.25" x 10.5"
HLT SEF
5.5" x 8.5"
HLT LEF
8.5" x 5.5"
F/GL (F4) SEF
8.0" x 13.0"
Foolscap SEF
8.5" x 13.0"
Folio SEF
8.25" x 13.0"
Government
8.25" x 14"
Com 10 SEF
4.124 x 9.5
Monarch SEF
3.875 x 7.5
15
Paper
Size (W x L)
Regular
By-pass
Duplex
Optional PFU
C5
162 x 229 mm
C6
114 x 162 mm
DL Env
110 x 220 mm
Custom: Leading edge 90216 mm

Side edge 139356 mm
Symbol meanings:
X: Can transport
: Cannot transport
16
2. Appendix: Preventive Maintenance

Tables
Maintenance Tables
Reset the PM counter (SP7-804-001) after doing maintenance work.

Key: AN: As necessary, C: Clean, R: Replace, I: Inspect
Every 45k
Every 90k
AN
NOTE
OPTICS
Reflector
Optics cloth
1st mirror
Optics cloth
2nd mirror
Optics cloth
3rd mirror
Optics cloth
Platen cover
Dry cloth
Exposure glass
Dry cloth
Toner shield glass
Dry cloth
DRUM AREA
PCU
Clean toner-bottle holder.
Transfer roller
Discharge plate
PAPER FEED
Paper feed roller
Water or alcohol.
Friction pad
Dry cloth
Bottom-plate pad
Water or alcohol.
Registration roller
Water or alcohol.
FUSING UNIT
17
2. Appendix: Preventive Maintenance Tables
Every 45k
Every 90k
Hot roller
Pressure roller
Hot roller bearings
Pressure-roller
bushings
Inlet guide
Outlet guide
Hot roller stripper

pawls
Thermistor
AN
NOTE
Every 90k
AN
NOTE
Separation roller
Water or alcohol
Pick-up roller
Water or alcohol
Feed roller
Water or alcohol
White plate
Water or alcohol
DF exposure glass
Water
Rollers R0, R1, R2
Water or alcohol
Registration sensor
reflector
Water or alcohol
ARDF
Every 120k
AN
NOTE
PAPER TRAY UNIT

Paper feed roller
Bottom-plate pad
Friction pad
18
Dry cloth

System Service Mode
Service Mode Tables
SP1-XXX (Feed)
1001*
LE Registration
1001 1 All Trays
Adjusts the leading-edge registration ( "Adjusting

Copy Image Area" in the section "Replacement and
Adjustment").
1001 2 By-pass
1001 3 Duplex
1002*
S-to-S Regist
[9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1002 1 1st Tray
Adjusts the side-to-side registration ( "Adjusting Copy

Image Area" in the section "Replacement and
Adjustment"). SP1-002-001 is applied to all trays.
SP1-002-002, 003 and 005 adjusts the difference
from SP1-002-001.
1002 2 2nd Tray

1002 3 3rd Tray
1002 5 By-pass
Adjusts the side-to-side registration of the 2nd side in

duplex copying. The 1st side is adjusted by
SP1-002-001 through 005.
1002 6 Duplex
1003*
[9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Paper Feed Timing
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle on the registration

roller.
1003 1 1st tray
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 mm/step]
1003 3 Bank Trays
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 mm/step]
1003 4 By-pass
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 mm/step]
1003 5 Duplex
[0 to 20 / 5 / 1 mm/step]
19
1103*
Fusing Idling
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
Enables or disables the contact-release control. The following table lists the results.
1103 1
Setting
0 = No
1 = Yes
C-R control
Works
Does not work
Idling time
Shorter
Longer
Fusing quality
Lower
Higher
Fusing Temp Adj

1105*
Adjusts the target fusing temperature. Note that the thermistor is at the center of the hot
roller.
1105 1 Warm Up-Center
[140 to 180 / 160 / 1C/step]
1105 3 Standby-Center
[140 to 160 / 150 / 1C/step]
1105 5 Copying-Center
[140 to 180 / 160 / 1C/step]
1105 7 Low Level 2-Center
[0 to 80 / 60 / 1C/step]
1105 9 Thick-Center
[140 to 185 / 165 / 1C/step]
1106
Display Fusing
1106 1 (Center) Displays the fusing temperature.

Fusing Soft Start DFU
1107*
Adjusts the number of zero-cross cycles of the fusing lamp AC supply needed to bring the
fusing lamp power to 100% while bringing the lamp up to the standby temperature or while
copying. Increase this value if the machine is experiencing sudden power dropouts.
1107 1 Warm Up Soft Start
[0 = 10 times / 1 = 20 times / 2 = 50 times]
1107 2 Other Soft Start
[0 = 10 times / 1 = 20 times / 2 = 50 times / 3 = 1 time]
1107 3 Soft Stop Setting
[0: No / 1: Yes]
1108*
Set-Fusing Start
[0 = 1s / 1 = 1.5s / 2 = 2s]
1108 1 Specifies the interval for fusing-temperature control.

20
System Service Mode
1109
1109 1
1110*
Nip Band Check

Conducts the nip band check (
Adjustment").
"Adjusting Nip Band" in the section "Replacement and
Fan Control Timer
[30 to 60 / 30 / 1 s/step]
Specifies the fan control time. The fan motor keeps its operating speed for the specified
1110 1 time before changing the speed or stopping. The fan control timer prevents the exhaust fan
from suddenly stopping. This function protects the copier from overheating.
1159*
Fusing Jam SC
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
Enables or disables consecutive jam detection at the fusing unit. If this SP is set to "1" (default:
1159 1 0), consecutive fusing jam alarm occurs (SC559) when the machine detects three
consecutive paper jams at the fusing unit.
1902
Display-AC Freq.
Displays the fusing lamp power control frequency (as detected by the zero cross signal
1902 1 generator). The displayed value is 1/5 the actual frequency: 10 and lower = 50 Hz, 11
and higher = 60 Hz.
1911*
By-pass Envelope
[0 = No / 1= Yes]
The program dedicated to envelope printing runs when you enable this program
1911 1 (SP1-911-001) and you select "Thick Paper" as the paper type of the by-pass tray
(
> System Settings > Tray Paper Settings > Paper Type: Bypass Tray).
SP2-XXX (Drum)
2001*
CR Bias Adj
Printing
[2100 to 1500 / 1650 / 1 V/step]
2001 1 Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller for printing. The voltage changes
automatically as charge-roller voltage control works. The value here is the base value for
the charge-roller voltage control.
21
ID sensor pattern
[0 to 400 / 300 / 1 V/step]
2001 2 Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller for the ID sensor pattern (as part of chargeroller voltage correction). The charge-roller voltage is obtained by adding SP2-001-002
to the value of SP2-001-001.
2101*
Erase Margin Adj
3
2101 1 Leading Edge
2101 2
Adjusts the width of the erased area ( "Adjusting Copy

Image Area" in the section "Replacement and
Adjustment").
[0.0 to 9.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Specification: 2 1.5 mm
[0.0 to 9.0 / 4.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Trailing Edge
Specification: 2 +2.5/1.5 mm
The rear trailing edge is this value plus 1.2 mm.
2101 3
[0.0 to 9.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Left side
Specification: 2 1.5 mm
The rear left edge is this value plus 0.3 mm.
2101 4
[0.0 to 9.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Right side
Specification: 2 +2.5/1.5 mm
The rear right edge is this value plus 0.3 mm.

2201*
Dv Bias Adj
Printing
[1500 to 200 / 650 / 1 V/step]
2201 1 Adjusts the voltage applied to the development roller for printing. Image density becomes
higher when you specify a smaller value (a greater absolute value). Image density becomes
lower when you specify a greater value (a smaller absolute value).
ID sensor pattern
[2 = LL (220 V) / -1 = L (260 V) / 0 = N (300 V) / 1

= H (340 V) / 2 = HH (380 V)]
2201 2 Adjusts the voltage applied to the development roller for the ID sensor pattern. The voltage
applied is obtained by adding SP2-201-002 to SP2-201-1. The setting affects ID sensor
pattern density, which in turn affects the toner supply.
22
System Service Mode
2213*
Outputs After NE
[0 = 50 pages / 1 = 20 sheets]
2213 1 Sets the number of copy/print/fax pages that can be made after toner near-end has been
detected. Reduce the number of pages if the user normally makes copies with a high image
ratio.
2214
2214 1
2221
Develpr Initialize
Initializes the TD sensor toner supply target voltage and the TD sensor gain value. Execute
this SP replacing the developer or the TD sensor.
ID Error Analysis (
"ID Sensor Error Analysis (SP2-221)")
2221 1 Vsg
Displays the Vsg value.
2221 2 Vsp
Displays the Vsp value.
2221 3 PWM
Displays the PWM value.
2221 4 Vsdp
Displays the Vsdp value.
2221 5 Vt
Displays the Vt value.
2221 6 Vts
Displays the Vts value.
2301*
Tr Current Adj (
Normal paper
2301 1
"Image Transfer Current").

[2 = 4 A / 1 = 2 A / 0 = 0 A / 1 = 2 A / 2
= +4 A]
Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller when feeding from a paper tray. Use a
high setting if the user normally feeds relatively thick paper (within spec) from a paper tray
Thick/Special
[2 = 4 A / 1 = 2 A / 0 = 0 A / 1 = 2 A / 2
= +4 A]
2301 2 Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller when feeding from the by-pass tray. Use
a high setting (a) if the user normally feeds relatively thick paper from the by-pass tray, or
(b) if waste toner is re-attracted from the drum (which can occur when using transparencies).
23
[2 = 4 A / 1 = 2 / 0 = 0 A / 1 = 2 A / 2 =
+4 A]
Duplex
2301 3
Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller when carrying out a duplex job. Use this
SP if there is poor image transfer on the rear side of duplex copies.
Cleaning
[10 to 1 / 1 / 1 A/step]
2301 4 Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller for roller cleaning. Increase the current if
toner remains on the roller after cleaning. (Remaining toner may cause dirty background
on the rear side.)
2802
Forced Develpr Churn
Initializes the developer and checks the TD sensor output (Vt). The machine mixes the
developer for 2 minutes while reading and displaying the Vt value. The machine does not
2802 1 initialize the TD sensor output. If the machine has not been used for a long period, prints
may have a dirty background. In a case like this, use this SP to mix the developer. The
message "Completed" is displayed when the program ends normally.
2906*
Tailing Crctn
Shift value
[0.0 to 1.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
2906 1 Shifts the image position at the intervals specified by SP2-906-002. When the copier is
continuously printing vertical lines (such as in tables), the paper may not separate correctly.
This SP can prevent this.
2906 2
2908
2908 1
Interval
[1 to 10 / 1 / 1 page/step]
Changes the interval of the image position shift specified by SP2-906-001.

Forced Toner Supp
Supplies the toner to the development unit. The processing stops under either of the
following conditions:
The toner density in the development unit reaches the standard level.
The processing has continued for two 2 minutes.
2915*
24
Polygon Idling
[0 = None / 1 = 15 s / 2 = 25 s]
System Service Mode
Specifies the polygon mirror motor idling time. The polygon mirror motor starts its operation
when an original is set, a key is pressed, or the platen cover or DF is opened. The motor
2915 1
stops if no manual operation is performed for the specified time. When you set "0", the
motor does not stop while the copier is in the standby status.
2921*
2921 1
2922*
Toner Supply Mode

[0 = Sensor 1 / 1 = Sensor 2 (DFU)]
Selects the toner supply mode. Keep the default setting as long as the TD sensor is working.
Toner Supply Time
[0.1 to 5.0 / 0.6 / 0.1 s/step]
Adjusts the toner supply time. The toner supply motor remains on for the specified time. To
2922 1 validate this setting, select "0" in SP2-921-001. Specify a greater value if the user tends
to make many copies having high proportions of solid black image areas.
2926*
Standard Vt
[0.00 to 5.00 / 2.50 / 0.01 V/step] DFU
Adjusts Vts (the Vt value for new developer). The TD sensor output is adjusted to this value
2926 1 during the TD sensor initial setting process. This SP is effective only when SP2-921001 is
"0", "1", or "2".
2927*
2927 1
2928
ID Sensor Control
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
Determines whether the ID sensor signal is referenced or not for the toner density control.
Keep the default value in usual operations.
Toner End Clear
Clears the following messages and counters without supplying the toner:
Toner near end message
Toner end message
2928 1
Toner near end counter

Toner end counter
Do not use this SP in usual operations. When the toner in the development unit is abnormally
insufficient, the drum may attract the toner carrier to its surface. The toner carrier damages
the drum surface..
2929*
Vref Limits
Adjust the upper or lower Vref limit.
25
2929 1 Upper
[0.50 to 3.50 / 3.20 / 0.01V/step] DFU
2929 2 Lower
[0.50 to 3.50 / 0.70 / 0.01V/step] DFU
2994*
2994 1
2996*
ID Detect Temp
[30 to 90 / 30 / 1C/step]
Adjusts the temperature threshold. The ID sensor signal is not referenced when the fusing
temperature is at the specified level or higher while the copier is recovering or starting up.
T Roller Cleaning
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
Cleans or does not clean the transfer roller before each job. Select "1" if the backside of
2996 1 the paper becomes unclean when output. Note that the copier takes a longer time to output
the first copy when you select "1". If you select "0", the transfer roller is never cleaned.
2998*
2998 1
Main Mag- print
[0.5 to +0.5 / 0.0 / 0.1%/step]
Adjusts the magnification ( "Adjusting Copy Image Area" in the section "Replacement
and Adjustment"). The specification is 100 1.0%.
SP4-XXX (Scanner)
4008*
4008 1
4009*
4009 1
4010*
4010 1
4011*
26
SubScan Mag (Scanner)

Adjusts the sub-scan magnification (
"Replacement and Adjustment").
Main Scan Mag (Scanner)
Adjusts the main-scan magnification (
LE Scan Regist
Adjusts the leading edge registration (
S-to-S Scanner Registration
[-0.9 to +0.9 / 0.0 / 0.1%/step]

"Adjusting Copy Image Area" in the section
[0.9 to +0.9 / 0.0 / 0.1%/step]

[5.0 to +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

[2.0 to +2.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
System Service Mode
4011 1
4012*
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for scanning in platen mode (

Area" in the section "Replacement and Adjustment").
Scan Erase Margin
"Adjusting Copy Image
[0 to 9.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
4012 1 Leading Edge

Adjusts the scanning margin. Generally, the scanning
margin should be as little as possible. To adjust the image
area, use SP2-101.
4012 2 Trailing Edge

4012 3 Left Side
4012 4 Right Side
4013
Scanner Free Run
4013 1 Conducts the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on.
4015*
White Plate Scan

Start position
[3.0 to +6.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
4015 1 Adjusts the scanning start position on the white plate. The base value is 17.8 mm from the
scanner home position. This SP specifies the offset from this base value.
Scanning Length
[3.0 to +6.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
4015 2 Adjusts the distance of the white plate scan. The scan begins from the start position
(SP4-015-001) and ends at the specified distance. The base value is 2.0 mm. This SP
decides the offset from this base value. Specify 0 (zero) or a larger value.
4428
4428 1
4606
Scan Auto Adj

Conducts the automatic scanner adjustment. Use this SP after replacing the white plate
( "Scanning" in the section "Replacement and Adjustment").
SBU Offset-Target
27
4607 1 EVEN
4607 2 ODD
[0 to 63 / 10 / 1 /step]
4607 3 RED
Adjusts the target black level for each signal.

These are used for offset adjustment in the SBU.
4607 4 GREEN
4607 5 BLUE
4607
SBU Gain-Target
4607 1 EVEN
4607 2 ODD
[0 to 255 / 180 / 1 /step]
4607 3 RED
Adjusts the target white level for each signal.

These are used for gain adjustment in the SBU.
4607 4 GREEN
4607 5 BLUE
4623
SBU Offset-Result
4623 1 EVEN
4623 2 ODD
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
4623 3 RED
Displays the result value of the offset adjustment in the

SBU.
4623 4 GREEN
4623 5 BLUE
4628
SBU Gain-Result
4628 1 EVEN
4628 2 ODD
4628 3 RED
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Displays the result value of the gain adjustment in the SBU.
4628 4 GREEN
4628 5 BLUE
28
System Service Mode
4640
SBU Offset-Loop
4640 1 EVEN
4640 2 ODD
[0 to 10 / 0 / 1 /step]
4640 3 RED
Displays the number of the offset adjustment in the SBU.
4640 4 GREEN
4640 5 BLUE
4641
SBU Gain-Loop
4641 1 EVEN
4641 2 ODD
[0 to 10 / 0 / 1 /step]
4641 3 RED
Displays the number of the gain adjustment in the SBU.
4641 4 GREEN
4641 5 BLUE
4642
SBU Offsetpre-Loop
4642 1 EVEN
4642 2 ODD
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
4642 3 RED
Displays the number of the pre-offset adjustment in the

SBU.
4642 4 GREEN
4642 5 BLUE
4646
SBU Adj Error
29
4646 1 Offsetpre-Mono
4646 2 Offsetpre-Color
4646 3 Offset-Mono
[0 = Success / 1 = Failure]
4646 4 Offset-Color
Displays the result of SBU adjustment.
4646 5 Gain-Mono
4646 6 Gain-Color
4654*
SBU Offset-Adjust
4654 1 EVEN
4654 2 ODD
[0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
4654 3 RED
Displays the offset value of the offset adjustment in the

SBU.
4654 4 GREEN
4654 5 BLUE
4658*
SBU Gain-Adjust
4658 1 EVEN
4658 2 ODD
[0 to 511 / - / 1 /step]
4658 3 RED
Displays the gain value of the gain adjustment in the SBU.
4658 4 GREEN
4658 5 BLUE
4685*
Gray Balance-Book
4685 1 RED
[128 to 383 / 256 / 1 /step]
4685 2 GREEN
Adjusts the coefficient of the gray balance adjustment for

the book scanning.
4685 3 BLUE
4686*
30
Gray Balance-DF
System Service Mode
4686 1 RED
[128 to 383 / 256 / 1 /step]
4686 2 GREEN
Adjusts the coefficient of the gray balance adjustment for

the DF scanning.
4686 3 BLUE
4687*
White Balance
[222 to 281 / 256 / 1 /step]
4687 1 Adjust
Adjust the correction value for the white plate adjustment.

Displays the current value of the white plate adjustment.
4687 2 Result
4690
If SP4-428 has not been done, this value is "0".
White Peek Init
4658 1 EVEN
4658 2 ODD
[0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
4658 3 RED
Displays the white offset value of the pre-offset adjustment

in the SBU.
4658 4 GREEN
4658 5 BLUE
4693
Black Ave Init
4658 1 EVEN
4658 2 ODD
[0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
4658 3 RED
Displays the black offset value of the pre-offset

adjustment in the SBU.
4658 4 GREEN
4658 5 BLUE
4902*
4902 1
4903*
Exposure Lamp ON
[0: OFF / 1: ON]
Turns the exposure lamp on or off. To turn on the exposure lamp, specify "1"; to turn it off
specify "0".
ADS Level
[0 to 255 / 252 / 1/step]
31
4903 1 Adjusts the ADS level.

4904*
ADS Lower Limit
[0 to 255 / 80 / 1/step]
4904 1 Adjusts the ADS lower limit.

4905*
4905 1
ADS Area Select
[0 = All / 1 = One]
Checks the whole area (0 = All) or the specific areas (1 = One) to adjust the ADS level.
The specific areas are as follows:
ARDF: 37.5 mm from the center
Platen Cover: 15 to 90 mm from the left edge
4921*
Image Adj Selec

Copy
[0 to 10 / 0 / 1]
Selects which mode the settings from SP4-922 to SP4-932 are used for.
001 0 = None, 1 = Text 1, 2 =Text 2, 3= Photo 1, 4 = Photo 2, 5 = Photo 3, 6 = Special 1, 7
= Special 2, 8 = Special 3, 9 = Special 4,
10 = Special 5
Fax
002
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1]
Selects which mode the settings from SP4-922 to SP4-932 are used for.
0 = None, 1 = Text 1, 2 = Text 2, 3 = Photo 1, 4 = Photo 2,
5 = Special 1
Scanner (Mono)
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1]
003 Selects which mode the settings from SP4-922 to SP4-932 are used for.
0 = None, 1 = Text 1, 2 = Text 2, 3= Photo 1, 4 = Photo 2
Scanner (Color)
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
004 Selects which mode the setting of SP4-935 is used for.

0 = None, 1 = Color Text, 2 = Color Photo
Scanner (Gray Scale)
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
005 Selects which mode the setting of SP4-936 is used for.

0 = None, 1 = Gray Scale
32
System Service Mode
Scanner Gamma
4922*
Selects "text" or "photo" as the priority output mode. This setting is applied to all image
processing modes of SP4-921.
001 Copy
002 Fax
[0=System default/ 1=Text/ 2=Photo]
003 Scanner
Notch Selection
Selects the value of the center ID adjustment notch for the ID adjustment LEDs.
4923*
Normally the center notch is 3 (range 1-5). If 1 is selected, each notch shifts down
(becomes lighter). If +1 is selected, each notch shifts up (becomes darker).
This setting is applied to all image processing modes of SP4-921.
001 Copy
002 Fax
[1 = Light / 0 = Normal / +1 = Dark]
003 Scanner
Texture Removal
4926*
Adjusts the texture removal level that is used with error diffusion. 0: The default value for
each mode is used. Text 1, Photo 2, Special 2, and Special 5 have a default of 3 and
Photo 1-3 have a default of 1.
1: No removal applied.
2 to 5: Removal applied at the level specified here. The higher the setting (level), the less
clear the image will become (more texture removal). This setting is only applied to the
originals in SP4-921.
001 Copy
002 Fax
[0 to 6 / 0 / 1/step]
003 Scanner
Line Width
4927*
Adjusts the line width correction algorithm. Positive settings produce thicker lines; negative
settings produce thinner lines. This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4-921.
33
001 Copy
002 Fax
[2 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
003 Scanner
Independent Dot Erase
4928*
Selects the dot erase level. Higher settings provide greater erasure. This setting is only
applied to the originals in SP4-921.
001 Copy
002 Fax
[2 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
003 Scanner
4929*
Positive/Negative
[0 = No, 1 = Yes]
Inverts white and black. This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4-921.
001 Copy
002 Fax
4930*
Sharpness-Edge
[2 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
Adjust the clarity. This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4-921.
001 Copy
002 Fax
003 Scanner
4931*
Sharpness-Solid
[2 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
001 Copy
002 Fax
003 Scanner
34
System Service Mode
4932*
Sharpness-Low ID
[2 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
001 Copy
002 Fax
003 Scanner
4935*
Color Image Adjust

Main Scan MTF Level
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
001 Adjust the MTF level for the main scan. This setting is only activated for the specified mode
with SP4-921-004.
0: None, 1: Weak, 2: Middle, 3: Strong
Main Scan MTF Strength
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1/step]
002 Adjust the MTF strength for the main scan. This setting is only activated for the specified
mode with SP4-921-004.
0: 1, 1: 1/32, 2: 1/16, 3: 1/8, 4: 1/4, 5: 1/2
Sub Scan MTF Level
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
003 Turns on or off the MTF for the sub scan. This setting is only activated for the specified mode
with SP4-921-004.
0: No, 1: Yes
Sub Scan MTF Strength
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1/step]
004 Adjust the MTF strength for the sub scan. This setting is only activated for the specified mode
with SP4-921-004.
0: 1, 1: 1/32, 2: 1/16, 3: 1/8, 4: 1/4, 5: 1/2
Smooth Level
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
005 Adjust the smooth level. This setting is only activated for the specified mode with
SP4-921-004.
0: None, 1: Weak, 2: Strong
Brightness
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
006 Adjust the brightness level. This setting is only activated for the specified mode with
SP4-921-004.
35
Contrast
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
007 Adjust the contrast level. This setting is only activated for the specified mode with
SP4-921-004.
4936*
Gray Scale Image Adjust

Main Scan MTF Level
[0 to 15 / 0 / 1/step]
001 Adjust the MTF level for the main scan. This setting is only activated for the specified mode
with SP4-921-004.
0: None, 1: Level 1 to 15: Level 15
Main Scan MTF Strength
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1/step]
002 Adjust the MTF strength for the main scan. This setting is only activated for the specified
mode with SP4-921-004.
0: 1, 1: 1/32, 2: 1/16, 3: 1/8, 4: 1/4, 5: 1/2
Sub Scan MTF Level
[0 to 13 / 0 / 1/step]
003 Adjust the MTF level for the sub scan. This setting is only activated for the specified mode
with SP4-921-004.
0: No, 1: Level 1 to 13: Level 13
Sub Scan MTF Strength
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1/step]
004 Adjust the MTF strength for the sub scan. This setting is only activated for the specified mode
with SP4-921-004.
0: 1, 1: 1/32, 2: 1/16, 3: 1/8, 4: 1/4, 5: 1/2
Smooth Level
[0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]
005 Adjust the smooth level. This setting is only activated for the specified mode with
SP4-921-004.
0: None, 1: Level 1 to 7: Level 7
Brightness
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
006 Adjust the brightness level. This setting is only activated for the specified mode with
SP4-921-004.
36
System Service Mode
Contrast
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
007 Adjust the contrast level. This setting is only activated for the specified mode with
SP4-921-004.
4941*
White Line Erase
[0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step]
Selects the white line erase level.

0: None, 1: Weak, 2: Strong
4941 1
This setting is effective for all modes.

0: White line erase is not used, and white level correction is used instead.
This setting is applied regardless of what mode has been selected in SP4-921.
4942*
4942 1
Black Line Erase
[0 to 3 / 2 / 1/step]
Selects the black line erase level. This setting is effective only when originals are scanned
by the DF.
[0 = No / 1 = Very weak / 2 = Weak / 3 = Strong]
This setting is applied regardless of what mode has been selected in SP4-921.
4943*
WhitePapDetect BiLv
4943 1 Gray Scale
[0 to 255 / 64 / 1/step]
4943 1 Color2
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
4943 1 Color3
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
SP5-XXX (Mode)
5001
5001 1
5024*
All Indicators On
Turns on all LEDs. The LCDs turn on and off every 3 seconds. Press the reset key to end this
program.
mm/inch Selection
37
Selects whether mm or inches are used in the display.

001
After selecting the number, you must turn the main power switch off and on.
Europe/Asia model: [0: mm / 1: inch]
American model: [0: mm / 1: inch]
5045*
According Counter
Displays the number of the installed counter.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
5045 1 Counter Method
0: 1 counter (Total)
1: 2 counters (Total and Prints)
2: 2 counters GPC
5055
Display IP address
Displays or does not display the IP address on the LCD.
001 Display IP address
CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: No (Not display), 1: Yes (Display)
5056
Coverage Counter
001 Coverage Counter
CTL
Displays or does not display the coverage counter on

the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Not display, 1: Display
5062
Part Replacement
Displays or does not display the PCU yield on the LCD.
001 PCU
CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
5066
38
PM Parts Display
System Service Mode
001 PM Parts Display
CTL
Displays or does not display the PM part button on the

LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
5067
Part Replacement Ope
001 PCU
CTL
Selects the service maintenance or user maintenance

for PCU.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Service, 1: User
5113
Optional Counter Type

This program specifies the counter type.
0: None
1: Key card (RK 3, 4)
001 Opt Cnt Type 1
CTL
2: Key card (down)

3 to 10: (Japan only)
11: Exp. Key card (Add)
12: Exp. Key card (Deduct)
This program specifies the external counter type.
0: None
002 Opt Cnt Type 2
CTL
1: Expansion Device type 1

5114
Optional Counter I/F
CTL
[0: Not installed/ 1: Installed (scanning

accounting)]
001 MF Key Card Ext. Japan use

5118
Disable Copying
CTL
[0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled]
001 This program disables copying.
39
5120*
Clr For Cut Remove
[0=Yes / 1=Standby only / 2=No]
Specifies the condition to reset the copy job settings when the key counter is removed.
0: Y = Yes: The settings are cleared when the counter is removed.
5120 1
1: StdBy = Standby only: The settings are cleared when the counter is removed at the
end of a job.
2: N = No: The settings are not cleared under either condition.
As for duplex copying, the job settings are always preserved regardless of these setting.
5121*
Counter Up Timing
[0 = Feed In / 1 = Exit]
Selects the count-up timing.

5121 1
0 = Feed: At each paper feed

1= Exit: At each paper exit
Fax Prnt Cnt Off
5167
Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device. This SP is used
when the receiving fax is accounted by an external accounting device.
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / ]
001 Fax Prnt Cnt Off
CTL
0: Automatic printing
1: No automatic printing
CE Login
5169
If you change the printer bit switches, you must 'log in' to service mode with this SP before
you go into the printer SP mode.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 CE Login
CTL
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
5188
Copy NV Version
001 Copy NV Version
40
CTL
Displays the NVRAM version in the controller board.
System Service Mode
Set Time
Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the local time zone.
Examples: For Japan (+9 GMT), enter 540 (9 hours x 60 min.)
DOM: +540 (Tokyo)
5302
NA :-300 (New York)

EU :+ 60 (Paris)
CH :+480 (Peking)
TW :+480 (Taipei)
AS :+480 (Hong Kong)
002 Time Difference
5307
CTL
#
[-1440 to 1440 / Area / 1 min./step ]
Summer Time
[ 0 or 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step]
ON/OFF
001
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
NA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0
Enables or disables the summer time mode.

Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise, this SP is not
activated even if this SP is set to "1".
41
Start
Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the first digit, so
the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]
003
4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]

5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
7th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]
8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]
For example: 3500010 (EU default)
The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March
The digits are counted from the left.
Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
End
Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
004
3rd digit: The week of the month. [0 to 5]

4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
The 7th and 8th digits must be set to "00".
The digits are counted from the left.
Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
5401
42
Access Control
When installing the SDK application, SAS (VAS) adjusts the following settings. DFU
103 DocAcl
CTL
104 Authentication Time
CTL
[ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
System Service Mode
Selects the log out type for the extend

authentication device.
162 Extend Certification
CTL
Bit 0: Log-out without an IC card.

0: Not allowed (default)
1: Allowed
200 SDK1 Unique ID
CTL
201 SDK1 Certification Method
CTL
210 SDK2 Unique ID
CTL
CTL
220 SDK3 Unique ID
CTL
CTL
230 SDK Cert
CTL
"SDK" is the "software development kit".

This data can be converted from SAS
(VAS) when installed or uninstalled.
(DFU)
Enables or disables the log-out

confirmation option.
Bit0: Log-out confirmation option
0: Enable (default), 1: Disable
240 Detail Option
CTL
Selects the automatic log-out time.

Bit1 and 2: Automatic log-out timer
reduction
00: 60 seconds (default), 01:10
seconds, 10: 20seconds, 11: 30
seconds
5404
User Code Clear

001
5411
Clears the counts for the user codes assigned by the key operator to restrict the use of the
machine. Press [Execute] to clear.
LDAP Certification
43
Easy Certification
Determines whether easy LDAP certification is done.
004 [0 to 1/1/1]
1: On
0: Off
Password Null Not Permit
This SP is referenced only when SP5411-4 is set to "1" (On).

005 [0 to 1/0/1]
0: Password NULL not permitted.
1: Password NULL permitted.
5413
Lockout Setting
Lockout On/Off
Switches on/off the lock on the local address book account.
001 [0 to 1/0/1]
0: Off
1: On
Lockout Threshold
002 Sets a limit on the frequency of lockouts for account lockouts.
[1 to 10/5/1]
Cancel On/Off
003
Determines whether the system waits the prescribed time for input of a correct user ID and
password after an account lockout has occurred.
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: Off (no wait time, lockout not cancelled)
1: On (system waits, cancels lockout if correct user ID and password are entered.
Cancel Time
004 Determines the length of time that the system waits for correct input of the user ID and
password after a lockout has occurred. This setting is used only if SP5413-3 is set to "1" (on).
[1 to 999/60/1 min.]
44
System Service Mode
5414
Access Mitigation
Mitigation On/Off
Switches on/off masking of continuously used IDs and passwords that are identical.
001 [0 to 1/0/1]
0: Off
1: On
Mitigation Time
002 Sets the length of time for excluding continuous access for identical user IDs and passwords.
[0 to 60/15/1 min.]
5415
Password Attack
Permissible Number
001 Sets the number of attempts to attack the system with random passwords to gain illegal
access to the system.
[0 to 100/30/1 attempt]
Detect Time
002 Sets the time limit to stop a password attack once such an attack has been detected.
[1 to 10/5/1 sec.]
5416
Access Info
User Max Num
001 Limits the number of users used by the access exclusion and password attack detection
functions.
[50 to 200/200/1 users]
Password Max Num
002 Limits the number of passwords used by the access exclusion and password attack detection
functions.
[50 to 200/200/1 passwords]
45
Monitor Interval
003 Sets the processing time interval for referencing user ID and password information.
[1 to 10/3/1 sec.]
5417
Access Attack
Permissible Num
001 Sets a limit on access attempts when an excessive number of attempts are detected for MFP
features.
[0 to 500/100/1]
Attack Detect Time
002 Sets the length of time for monitoring the frequency of access to MFP features.
[10 to 30/10/1 sec.]
Cert Waite
003 Sets the wait time to slow down the speed of certification when an excessive number of
access attempts have been detected.
[0 to 9/3/1 sec.]
Attack Max Num
004 Sets a limit on the number of requests received for certification in order to slow down the
certification speed when an excessive number of access attempts have been detected.
[50 to 200/200/1 attempt]
5420
User Auth
These settings should be done with the System Administrator.
Note: These functions are enabled only after the user access feature has been enabled.
Copy
Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the copy applications.
001 [0 to 1/0/1]
0: On
1: Off
46
System Service Mode
DS
Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the document server.
011 [0 to 1/0/1]
0: On
1: Off
Fax
Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the fax application.
021 [0 to 1/0/1]
0: On
1: Off
Scanner
Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the scan applications.
031 [0 to 1/0/1]
0: On
1: Off
Printer
Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the printer applications.
041 [0 to 1/0/1]
0: On
1: Off
051 SDK1
061 SDK2
071 SDK3
5431
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the
SDK application.
External Auth User
CTL
010 Tag
011 Entry
012 Group
020 Mail
47
030 Fax
031 Fax Sub
032 Folder
033 Protect Code
034 Smtp Auth
035 Lsap Auth
036 Smb Ftp Fldr Auth

037 Acut Acl
038 Document ACL
040 Cert Crypt
5481
Authentication Error Code

These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed.
System Log Disp
001
Determines whether an error code appears in the system log after a user authentication
failure occurs.
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: Off
1: On
Panel Disp
002
Determines whether an error code appears on the operation panel after a user
authentication failure occurs.
[0 to 1/1/1]
1: On
0: Off
48
System Service Mode
MF Keycard Japan Only

Job Permit Setting
Sets up operation of the machine with a keycard.
5490
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: Disabled. Cancels operation if no code is input.
1: Enabled. Allows operation if another code is input and decrements the counter once for
use of the entered code.
5501
PM Alarm Interval
CTL
[ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Alarm off
001 Printout
1 to 9999: Alarm goes off when the PM counter reaches the

specified value (1 to 9999) x 1000.
[ 0 or 1 / 1 / ]
0: No alarm sounds
002 ADF
5504
1: Alarm sounds after the number of originals passing through

the A(R)DF > 10,000
Jam Alarm
CTL
Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not included).
001 [ 0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
0: Zero (Off), 1: Low (2.5K jams), 2: Medium (3K jams), 3: High (6K jams)
5505*
Error Alarm
Sets the error alarm level.
The error alarm counter counts "1" when any SC is detected. However, the error alarm
counter decreases by "1" when any SC is not detected during specified sheets of copies (for
001 example, default 1500 sheets).
The error alarm occurs when the SC error alarm counter reaches "5".
[0 to 255 / 10 / 100 copies per step]
5507
Supply Alarm
CTL
49
001 Paper Size
0: Off, 1: On,
003 Toner
0: Off, 1: On,
005 Drum
0: Off, 1: On,
080 Toner Call Timing
0: Toner is replaced (default)

1: Toner near end or end
128 Interval :Others

132 Interval :A3
133 Interval :A4
134 Interval :A5
141 Interval :B4
[250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 /step]
142 Interval :B5

160 Interval :DLT
164 Interval :LG
166 Interval :LT
172 Interval :HLT
5508*
001*
002*
003*
Auto Call Setting

Jam Remains
CTL
0: Disable, 1: Enable
Enables/disables initiating a call for an unattended paper jam.

Frequent Jams
Enables/disables initiating a call for consecutive paper jams.

Door Open
Enables/disables initiating a call when the front door remains open.

Jam Remains: Time
[ 03 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute /step]
011* Sets the time a jam must remain before it becomes an "unattended paper jam". This setting
is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.
50
System Service Mode
Freq Jam: # of Time
[ 02 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step]
012* Sets the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call. This setting is enabled
only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.
Door Open: Time
[ 03 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute/step]
013* Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a call.
This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.
SC/Alarm Setting
5515
CTL
With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an SC call when an SC error occurs.
If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not issued when an SC error occurs.
001 SC Call
002 Service Parts Near End
003 Service Parts End
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
004 User Call
0: Off, 1: On
006 Communication Test

007 Machine Information
008 Alarm Notice
010 Supply Automatic Order
[0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Off,1: On
011 Supply Management Report

012 Jam/Door Open Call
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off,1: On
[Memory Clear]
5801
Before executing any of these SP codes, print an SMC Report.

All Clear
001 Initializes items SP5801-002 to -014 below.
Turn the main power switch off and on after executing this SP.
003
SCS
Clears the system settings.
51
004
005
006
3
007
008
009
IMH
Clears IMH data. DFU

MCS
Clears MCS data. DFU
Copier
Clears the copy application settings.

Fax
Clears the fax application settings.

Printer
Clears the printer application settings.

Scanner
Clears the scanner application settings.

GWWS
010 Delete the netfile application management files and thumbnails, and initializes the job login
ID.
NCS
011
Initializes the system default and interface settings (IP address also), SmartNetMonitor for
Admin, WebImageMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.
The name of Apple talk is not cleared only if this SP is executed. Turns off and on after
executing this SP.
R-FAX
012 Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for Admin, job history, and local storage file
numbers.
014
015
52
Clear DCS Setting
Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.

Clr UCS Setting
Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service) settings.
System Service Mode
016
017
018
019
020
5802
MIRS Setting
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service) settings.

CCS
Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control Service) settings.

SRM Memory Clr
Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager) settings.

LCS
Initializes the LCS (Log Count Service) settings.

Web Apli
Initializes Web application settings.

Machine Free Run
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: No, 1: Yes
Conducts machine free run (including the scanner unit). Set "1" and then press " " key.
5802 1 Press " " key again to start "Free Run". When this SP is set to "0", the machine operates
normally even " " key is pressed.
5803
5804
5807*
Input Check
"Input Check" in this chapter.
Output Check
"Output Check" in this chapter.
Area Selection
Selects the display language.
2 North America, 3 Europe, 5 Asia, 6 China
5807 1 SP5-807-001 is not cleared by SP5-801-002.

NOTE: SC982 is displayed if you specify a language that is inconsistent with your local
model.
5811*
Machine No. Setting
53
001
5812
Code Set
"Machine No. Setting" in this section.
Service TEL
Telephone
CTL
001 Sets the telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed on the
Counter List, which can be printed with the user's "Counter" menu.
This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input).
Facsimile
CTL
002 Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed on the
Counter List.
This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input).
Supply
CTL
003 Use this to input the telephone number of your supplier for consumables. Enter the number
and press"StringIn" key.
Press the "Clear modes" key to delete the telephone number.
Sales
CTL
004 Use this to input the telephone number of your sales agency. Enter the number and press
#.
Press the "Clear modes" key to delete the telephone number.
5816
[NRS Function]
CTL
Selects the remote service setting.

[ 0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
001 I/F Setting
0: Remote service off

1: CSS remote service on
2: @Remote service on
54
System Service Mode
Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Start of the service, 1: End of the service
002 CE Call
This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001 is set to

"2".
Enables or disables the remote service function.
003 Function Flag
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Uses or does not use the RCG certification by SSL when
calling the RCG.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
007 SSL Disable
0: Uses the RCG certification

1: Does no use the RCG certification
008 RCG Connect T/O
009 RCG Write Timeout
010 RCG Read Timeout
Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling the RCG.

[1 to 90 / 10 / 1 second/step]
Specifies the write timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second/step]
Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second/step]
Enables/disables access via port 80 to the SOAP method.
011 Port 80
[0 or 1 / 0 / ]
Selects the timing for the remote firmware updating.
013 RFU Timing
[0 or 1 / 0 / ]
0: Any status of a target machine
1: Sleep or panel off mode only
55
Install Status
This SP displays the RCG device installation status.
022 0: RCG device not registered
1: RCG device registered
2: Device registered
Connect Mode (N/M)
023
This SP displays and selects the embedded RCG connection method.

0: Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection
061
NotiTime ExpTime DFU

Proximity of the expiration of the certification.
HTTP Proxy Use
062 This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine communicates with
the service center.
HTTP Proxy Host
063
This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication between embedded
RCG-N and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or display the customer proxy server address.
The address is necessary to set up embedded RCG-N.
The address display is limited to 127 characters. Characters beyond the 127th
character are ignored.
This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
HTTP Proxy Port
This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication between embedded
064 RCG N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to set up embedded RCG-N.
This port number is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
56
System Service Mode
HTTP Proxy Aut Usr

This SP sets the HTTP proxy authentication user name.
065
The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the 31st
character is ignored.
This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
HTTP Proxy Aut Pass
This SP sets the HTTP proxy authentication password.
066
The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the 31st
character is ignored.
This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
57
Cer Updt Cond

Displays the status of the certification update.
067
58
The certification used by embedded RCG is set correctly.
The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received from the GW
URL and certification is presently being updated.
The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the
successful update.
The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the failed update.
The period of the certification has expired and a new request for an update is being
sent to the GW URL.
11
A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue certification setting
is in progress for the rescue GW connection.
12
The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the
certification update request.
13
The notification of the request for certification update has been completed
successfully, and the system is waiting for the certification update request from the
rescue GW URL
14
The notification of the certification request has been received from the rescue GW
controller, and the certification is being stored.
15
The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of the successful
completion of this event.
16
The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the
failure of this event.
17
The certification update request has been received from the GW URL, the GW URL
was notified of the results of the update after it was completed, but a certification
error has been received, and the rescue certification is being recorded.
18
The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL is being
notified of the failure of the certification update.
System Service Mode
Cer Abnml Cause

Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of the
certification.
068
069
083
Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress.
Request for certification update in progress. The current certification has expired.
An SSL error notification has been issued (after the certification has expired).
Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual certification.
Notification of a common certification without ID2.
Notification that no certification was issued.
Notification that GW URL does not exist.
Cer: Updtt ReqID

The ID of the request for certification.
Firm Updating
Displays the status of the firmware update.
Firm Up Usr Conf
This SP setting determines if the operator can confirm the previous version of the firmware
085 before the firmware update execution. If the option to confirm the previous version is
selected, a notification is sent to the system manager and the firmware update is done with
the firmware files from the URL.
Firmware Size
086 Allows the service technician to confirm the size of the firmware data files during the
firmware update execution.
087
088
CERT: Macro Vsn

Displays the macro version of the @Remote certification.
CERT: PAC Vsn
Displays the PAC version of the @Remote certification.
59
CERT: ID2 Code

089 Displays ID2 for the @Remote certification. Spaces are displayed as underscores (_).
Asterisks (*) indicate that no @Remote certification exists.
CERT: Subject
090 Displays the common name of the @Remote certification subject. CN = the following 17
bytes. Spaces are displayed as underscores (_). Asterisks (*) indicate that no DESS exists.
CERT: Seri Num

091 Displays serial number for the @Remote certification. Asterisks (*) indicate that no DESS
exists.
CERT: Issuer
092 Displays the common name of the issuer of the @Remote certification. CN = the following
30 bytes. Asterisks (*) indicate that no DESS exists.
093
094
CERT: St ExpTime
Displays the start time of the period for which the current @Remote certification is enabled.
CERT: End ExpTime
Displays the end time of the period for which the current @Remote certification is enabled.
Ins Country
Select from the list the name of the country where embedded RCG-M is installed in the
machine. After selecting the country, you must also set the following SP codes for embedded
RCG-M:
150
SP5816-153
SP5816-154
SP5816-161
0: Japan, 1: USA, 2: Canada, 3: UK, 4: Germany, 5: France
6: Italy, 7: Netherlands, 8: Belgium, 9: Luxembourg, 10: Spain
60
System Service Mode
Aut Line Detect

Press [Execute].
Setting this SP classifies the telephone line where embedded RCG-M is connected as either
dial-up or push type, so embedded RCG-M can automatically distinguish the number that
151 connects to the outside line.
The current progress, success, or failure of this execution can be displayed with
SP5816 152.
If the execution succeeded, SP5816 153 will display the result for confirmation and
SP5816 154 will display the telephone number for the connection to the outside line.
Line Detect Rst

Displays a number to show the result of the execution of SP5816 151. Here is a list of what
the numbers mean.
0: Success
1: In progress (no result yet). Please wait.
2: Line abnormal
152 3: Cannot detect dial tone automatically
4: Line is disconnected
5: Insufficient electrical power supply
6: Line classification not supported
7: Error because fax transmission in progress ioctl() occurred.
8: Other error occurred
9: Line classification still in progress. Please wait.
Dial/Push Select
This SP displays the classification (tone or pulse) of the telephone line to the access point
for embedded RCG-M. The number displayed (0 or 1) is the result of the execution of
SP5816 151. However, this setting can also be changed manually.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
153 0: Tone Dialing Phone
1: Pulse Dialing Phone
Inside Japan "2" may also be displayed:
0: Tone Dialing Phone
1: Pulse Dialing Phone 10PPS
2: Pulse Dialing Phone 20PPS
61
Outline Phone #
The SP sets the number that switches to PSTN for the outside connection for embedded
RCG-M in a system that employs a PBX (internal line).
154
If the execution of SP5816-151 has succeeded and embedded RCG-M has

connected to the external line, this SP display is completely blank.
If embedded RCG-M has connected to an internal line, then the number of the
connection to the external line is displayed.
If embedded RCG-M has connected to an external line, a comma is displayed with
the number. The comma is inserted for a 2 sec. pause.
The number setting for the external line can be entered manually (including commas).
Dial Up User
156
Use this SP to set a user name for access to remote dial up. Follow these rules when setting
a user name:
Name length: Up to 32 characters
Spaces and # allowed but the entire entry must be enclosed by double quotation
marks (").
Dial Up Password
157
Use this SP to set a password for access to remote dial up. Follow these rules when setting
a user name:
Name length: Up to 32 characters
Spaces and # allowed but the entire entry must be enclosed by double quotation
marks (").
Phone Number
161 Use this SP to set the telephone number of the line where embedded RCG-M is connected.
This number is transmitted to and used by the Call Center to return calls.
Limit: 24 numbers (numbers only)
Ans Timing Adj
When the Call Center calls out to a embedded RCG-M modem, it sends a repeating ID
tone (*#1#). This SP sets the time the line remains open to send these ID tones after the
162 number of the embedded RCG-M modem is dialed up and connected.
[0 to 24/ 1 /1 /step]
The actual amount of time is this setting + 2 sec. For example, if you set "2" the line will
remain open for 4 sec.
62
System Service Mode
Access Point
This is the number of the dial-up access point for embedded RCG-M. If no setting is done
163 for this SP code, then a preset value (determined by the country selected) is used.
Default: 0
Allowed: Up to 16 alphanumeric characters
Comm Line
This SP sets the connection conditions for the customer. This setting dedicates the line to
embedded RCG-M only, or sets the line for sharing between embedded RCG-M and a
fax unit.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
164 0: Line shared by embedded RCG-M/Fax
1: Line dedicated to embedded RCG-M only
If this setting is changed, the copier must be cycled off and on.
SP5816 187 determines whether the off-hook button can be used to interrupt an
embedded RCG-M transmission in progress to open the line for fax transaction.
173
Modem Serial Number

This SP displays the serial number registered for the embedded RCG-M.
Lmt Resend Cncl
Normally, it is best to allow unlimited time for certification and ID2 update requests, and
for the notification that the certification has been completed. However, embedded RCG174 M generates charges based on transmission time for the customer, so a limit is placed upon
the time allowed for these transactions.
If these transactions cannot be completed within the allowed time, do this SP to cancel the
time restriction.
186 RCG-C M Debut Bit SW DFU
63
FAX TX Priority
This SP determines whether pushing the off-hook button will interrupt an embedded RCGM transmission in progress to open the line for fax transaction. This SP can be used only if
SP5816-164 is set to "0".
[0 or 1/ 0 / - ]
187 0: Disable. Setting the fax unit off-hook does not interrupt a fax transaction in progress. If
the off-hook button is pushed during a embedded RCG-M transmission, the button must be
pushed again to set the fax unit on-hook after the embedded RCG-M transmission has
completed.
1: Enable. When embedded RCG-M shares a line with a fax unit, setting the fax unit offhook will interrupt a embedded RCG-M transmission in progress and open the line for a
fax transaction.
200
Polling Man Exc

Executes the polling test.
Instl: Condition
Displays a number that indicates the status of the @Remote service device.
0: Neither the registered device by the external RCG nor embedded RCG device is set.
1: The embedded RCG device is being set. Only Box registration is completed. In this status
the
this unit cannot answer a polling request from the external RCG.
201
2: The embedded RCG device is set. In this status the external RCG unit cannot answer a
polling request.
3: The registered device by the external RCG is being set. In this status the embedded RCG
device cannot be set.
4: The registered module by the external RCG has not started.
202
203
64
Instl: ID#
Allows entry of the number of the request needed for the embedded RCG.
Instl: Reference
Executes the inquiry request to the @Remote GateWay URL.
System Service Mode
Instl: Ref Rslt

Displays a number that indicates the result of the inquiry executed with SP5816-203.
0: Succeeded
1: Inquiry number error
2: Registration in progress
204 3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6: Communication error
7: Certification update error
8: Other error
9: Inquiry executing
Instl: Ref Section
205 Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the GW URL in answer to the
inquiry request. Displayed only when the result is registered at the GW URL.
206
Instl: Rgstltn
Executes Embedded RCG Registration.
Instl: Rgstltn Rst
Displays a number that indicates the registration result.
0: Succeeded
2: Registration in progress
3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
207 4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)

5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6: Communication error
7: Certification update error
8: Other error
9: Registration executing
65
Instl Error Code

Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either SP5816 204
or SP5816 207 was executed.
Cause
Illegal Modem
Parameter
Operation Error,
Incorrect Setting
208
Code
Meaning
-11001
Chat parameter error
-11002
Chat execution error
-11003
Unexpected error
-12002
Inquiry, registration attempted without acquiring

device status.
-12003
Attempted registration without execution of an inquiry

and no previous registration.
-12004
Attempted setting with illegal entries for certification

and ID2.
-2385
Attempted dial up overseas without the correct

international prefix for the telephone number.
-2387
Not supported at the Service Center
-2389
Database out of service
-2390
Program out of service
-2391
Two registrations for same device
Error Caused by
Response from GW -2392
URL
-2393
209
66
Parameter error
External RCG not managed
-2394
Device not managed
-2395
Box ID for external RCG is illegal
-2396
Device ID for external RCG is illegal
-2397
Incorrect ID2 format
-2398
Incorrect request number format
Instl Clear
Releases a machine from its embedded RCG setup.
System Service Mode
250
5821
Print Com Log

Prints the communication log.
NRS Address
002 RCG IP Address
Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote Communication

Gate) destination for call processing at the remote service
center.
[00000000h to FFFFFFFFh / 1 /step]
5824
NVRAM Upload
5824 1
5825
"NVRAM Upload/Download" in this section.

NVRAM Download
5825 1
5828
"NVRAM Upload/Download" in this section.

Network Setting
CTL
Enables or disables 1284 Compatibility.
050 1284 Compatibility (Centro) [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Enables or disables ECP Compatibility.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
052 ECP (Centro)
NOTE: This SP is activated only when SP5-828-50 is set to
"1".
Enables/disables Job Spooling.
065 Job Spooling
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
066
Job Spooling Clear: Start

Time
Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists at power

on.
0: ON (Data is cleared)
1: OFF (Automatically printed)
67
5828
Network Setting
CTL
Validates or invalidates the job spooling function for each
protocol.
0: Validates
1: Invalidates
bit0: LPR
069 Job Spooling (Protocol)
bit1: FTP
bit2: IPP
bit3: SMB
bit4: BMLinkS
bit5: DIPRINT
bit6: (Reserved)
bit7: (Reserved)
Enables or disables the Telnet protocol.
090 TELNET (0: OFF 1: ON)
[ 0 or 1 / 1 / ]
Enables or disables the Web operation.
091 Web (0: OFF 1: ON)
[ 0 or 1 / 1 / ]
Active IPv6 Link

This is the IPv6 local address link referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in
145 the format:
"Link Local Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total of 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
147 Active IPv6 Status Address 1
These SPs are the IPv6 status addresses (1 to 5) referenced

on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format:
151 Active IPv6 Status Address 3 "Status Address" + "Prefix Length"

The IPv6 address consists of a total of 128 bits configured

in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
68
System Service Mode
5828
Network Setting
CTL
IPv6 Manual Setting Address

This SP is the IPv6 manually set address referenced on Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b)
156 in the format:
"Manual Set Address" + "Prefix Length"
IPv6 Gateway Address
158 This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced on Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b).
IPv6 Stateless Auto Setting

Enables/disables the stateless automatic setting for Ethernet/wireless LAN operation.
161 [0 to 1/1/1]
1: Enable
0: Disable
Web Item Invisible
Determines whether each item can be set in Websys.
236
[0x0000 to 0xffff/0xffff]
Bit 1: NetRICOH
Bit2: Vendor for consumables
Bit2-15: Reserved
Web Shopping Link Invisible
237
Determines whether the NetRICOH link is displayed on the Websys top page and link
page.
[0 to 1/1/1]
1: Display
0: No display
69
5828
Network Setting
CTL
Web Supplies Link Invisible
238
Determines whether the consumable vendor link is displayed on the Websys top page and
link page.
[0 to 1/1/1]
1: Display
0: No display
Web Link 1 Name
239 Determines whether a name entered for "URL1" is displayed on the Websys link page. The
name length is limited to 31 characters.
Web Link 1 URL
240 Sets the URL referenced for URL1 linked to the Websys linked page. The link name is limited
to 127 characters.
Web Link 1 Visible
Determines whether the link for URL1 is displayed on the Websys top page.
241 [0 to 1/1/1]
1: Display
0: No display
Web Link 2 Name
242 Determines whether a name entered for "URL2" is displayed on the Websys link page. The
name length is limited to 31 characters.
Web Link 2 URL
243 Sets the URL referenced for URL2 linked to the Websys linked page. The link name is limited
to 127 characters.
Web Link 2 Visible
Determines whether the link for URL2 is displayed on the Websys top page.
244 [0 to 1/1/1]
1: Display
0: No display
70
System Service Mode
HDD
5832
Enter the SP number for the partition to initialize, then press #. When the execution ends,
cycle the machine off and on.
001 HDD Formatting (All)

002 HDD Formatting (IMH)
003 Format Thumbnail
004 Format Job Log

005 Format Font
006 Format User Info
007 Format Rec Mail
008 Format Sed Mail
009 Format DFU data
010 Format All Log
011 Format Ridoc I/F
5840
IEEE 802.11
[1 to 11 or 13 / 11 or 13 / 1 /step]
Channel MAX
CTL
Europe: 1 to 13, default: 13

NA/ Asia: 1 to 11, default: 11
Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via wireless LAN.
006 The number of channels available varies according to location. The default settings are set
for the maximum end of the range for each area. Adjust the upper 4 bits to set the maximum
number of channels. DFU
Do not change the setting.
71
[ 1 to 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]
Channel MIN
CTL
Europe: 1 to 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11
Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via the wireless LAN.
007 The number of channels available varies according to location. The default settings are set
for the minimum end of the range for each area. Adjust the lower 4 bits to set the minimum
number of channels. DFU

[00 to 11 / 00 / 1 binary]
00: Key #1
011
WEP Key Select
CTL
01: Key #2 (Reserved)

Selects the WEP key.

Fragment Thresh
CTL
[256 to 2346 / 2346 / 1]
042 Adjusts the fragment threshold for the IEEE802.11 card.

This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802.11 card is installed.
11g CTS to Self
CTL
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Off, 1: On
043 Determines whether the CTS self function is turned on or off.

044
11g Slot Time
CTL
Selects the slot time for IEEE802.11.

WPA Debug Lyl
045
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: 20 m, 1: 9 m
CTL
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1]
1: Info, 2: Warning, 3: Error
Selects the debug log for WPA authentication application.

5842
72
GWWS Analysis DFU
System Service Mode
Setting 1
CTL
Bit
Groups
System & other groups (LSB)
Capture related
This is a debugging tool. It sets the

001 debugging output mode of each Net
File process.
Certification related
Address book related
Default: Bit SW 1000 0000
Machine management related
Output related (printing, delivery)
Repository related
Debug log output
Setting 2
002
CTL
Bit
Groups
0-6
Not used
Default: Bit SW 0000 0000
Log time stamp setting

7
0: Date/Hour/Minute/Second
1: Minute/Second/Msecond
5844
USB
Transfer Rate
001
CTL
Sets the speed for USB data transmission.

[Full Speed]
[Auto Change]
Vendor ID
002
CTL
Sets the vendor ID:

Initial Setting: 0x05A Ricoh Company
[0x0000 to 0xFFFF/1] DFU
73
Product ID
CTL
003 Sets the product ID.

[0x0000 to 0xFFFF/1] DFU
Device Release No.
CTL
Sets the device release number of the BCD (binary coded decimal) display.
004 [0000 to 9999/1] DFU

Enter as a decimal number. NCS converts the number to hexadecimal number recognized
as the BCD.
Delivery Server Setting
5845
CTL
Provides items for delivery server settings.

001
FTP Port Num
[ 0 to 65535 / 3670 / 1 /step]
Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server.
Srv IP (Primary)
Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
002 Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the transfer tab can
be referenced by the initial system setting.
Retry Interval
[60 to 999 / 300 / 1 second /step]
003 Specifies the interval time for sending the scanned image data to the deliver server or
SMTP/FTP/NCP/SMB server after sending error.
No. of Retries
[0 to 99 / 3 / 1 time/step]
004 Specifies the retry times for sending the scanned image data to the deliver server or SMTP/
FTP/NCP/SMB server after sending error.
DeliErr DispTime
[0 to 999 / 300 / 1 second /step]
006 Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is displayed when a
test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and an external
device.
Svr IP (Secondary)
Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
008 Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as the secondary
delivery server of Scan Router. This SP allows only the setting of the IP address without
reference to the DNS setting.
74
System Service Mode
Deli Svr Model

009
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I/O device.
0: Unknown, 1: SG1 Provided, 2: SG1 Package,
3: SG2 Provided, 4: SG2 Package
Deli Svr Capabty
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits

Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible
Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible

010
Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists Changes the capability of the
server that is registered as an I/
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists
O device.
Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists
Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists
Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6
is set to "0")
Delivery Svr Cap (Ext)
[ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Changes the capability of the server that is registered as an I/O device.

011
Bit7 = 1 Address book usage limitation (Limitation for each authorized user)
Bit6 = 1 RDH authorization link
Bit5 to 0: Not used
013
014
015
016
Svr Schm (Primary)
Specifies the scheme of the primary delivery server.

Svr Port Num (Pri)
Specifies the port number of the primary delivery server.

Srv URL Path (Pri)
Specifies the URL path of the primary delivery server.

Svr Schm (Sec)
Specifies the scheme of the secondary delivery server.
75
017
018
022
Svr Port Num (Sec)
Specifies the port number of the secondary delivery server.

Srv URL Path (Sec)
Specifies the URL path of the secondary delivery server.

Instant Trans Off
[ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending.
5846
UCS Settings
CTL
Provides items for delivery server settings.

Machine ID (DelSvy)
Displays ID
001 Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The value is only
displayed and cannot be changed. This ID is created from the NIC MAC or IEEE 1394 EUI.
The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary.
MC ID Clr (DelSvy)
Clears ID
002 Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory. Execute
this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable. After clearing the ID,
the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the machine off and on.
Maximum Entries
[150 to 999 / 150 / 1 /step]
003 Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.
If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is cleared, and the
data (excluding user code information) is displayed.
Delsvr Rtry Tmer
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
006 Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery server
address book.
Delsvr Rtry Tmes
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
007 Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery server
address book.
76
System Service Mode
Delsvr Maxentri
[200 to 999 / 200 / 1/step]
008 Sets the maximum number account entries of the delivery server user information managed
by UCS.
010
020
LDAP Search Tout
[1 to 255 / 60 / 1 /step]
Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server.
WSD Max Entries
[5 to 255 / 250 / 1 /step]
Sets the maximum entries for the address book of the WSD (SD-scanner)
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
021 Folder Auth chg
0: Login user name

1: address book
[AddrB Acl Info] Address Book Access Control List Information

This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a basic machine
that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is powered on with the new HDD
041 installed, the system automatically takes the address book from the NVRAM and writes it
onto the new HDD. However, the new address book on the HDD can be accessed only by
the system administrator at this stage. Executing this SP by the service technician immediately
after power on grants full address book access to all users.
043
Addr B Media
Displays the slot number where an address book data is in.
047 Ini Local Addr B
Clears the local address book information, including the

user code.
048 Ini Deli Addr B
Clears the distribution address book information, except

the user code.
049 Ini LDAP Addr B
Clears the LDAP address book information, except the

user code.
Clears all directory information managed by UCS,
including all user codes.
050 Ini All Addr B
Turn the main power switch off and on after executing this
SP.
051 Bkup All Addr B
Uploads all directory information to the SD card.
052 Restr All Addr B
Downloads all directory information from the SD card.
77
Deletes the address book data from the SD card in the

service slot.
053 Clear Backup Info
Deletes only the files that were uploaded from this

machine.
This feature does not work if the card is write-protected.
Note: After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, and
then turn the power off. Do not remove the SD card until
the Power LED stops flashing.
This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options

for the UCS local address book.
060 Search Option
Bit0: Checks both upper/lower case characters

Bit1: Japan only
Bit2 to 7: Not used
062 Compl Opt1(1)
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to

access the local address book. Specifically, this SP limits
the password entry to upper case and sets the length of
the password.
[0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]
063 Compl Opt2(1)

the password entry to lower case and defines the length
of the password.
[0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]
064 Compl Opt3(1)

the password entry to numbers and defines the length of
the password.
[0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]
065 Compl Opt4(1)

the password entry to symbols and defines the length of
the password.
[0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]
78
System Service Mode
091 FTP Auth Port Setting
Specifies the FTP port for getting a distribution server

address book that is used in the identification mode.
[0 to 65535 / 3671 / 1 /step]
094 Encryption Stat
Shows the status of the encryption function for the address

book data.
Note (1):
SP5846-062 to SP5846-065 do not normally require adjustment.
These SP modes are enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password policy to
control access to the address book.
Web Service
CTL
SP5848-1 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of 0001
has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5848
ac: Access Control

002 Ac: Repo (only Lower 4 Bits)
004 ac: UD (only Lower 4 bits)
005
ac: For Cherry

(only Lower 4 bits)
007 ac: Log Fax (Lower 4 bits)
Switches access control on and off.

0000: No access control
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
009 ac: Job Ctrl (Lower 4 bits)

011 ac: Dev Mng (Lower 4 bits)
022 ac: Uadmin (Lower 4bits)
099 DL Image Setting
DFU
100 Max. Size: DL Image
[1 to 1024/1 K]
79
210 Log Type: Job1

211 Log Type: Job2
212 Log Type: Access
Displays the log server settings.
213 Primary Srv
These can be adjusted with the Web Image Monitor.
214 Secondary Srv

215 Start Time
Specifies the transmit interval.

[1 to 1000 / 1 / 1 hour/step]
216 Interval Time
This SP is activated only when SP5848-217 is set to "2

(Transmit periodically)".
Selects the transmit timing.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
217 Timing
0: No Transmit, 1: Transmit one by one

2: Transmit periodically
5849
Installation Date
CTL
Displays or prints the installation date of the machine.
001 Display
002 Print
The "Counter Clear Day" has been changed to "Installation Date" or

"Inst. Date".
Determines whether the installation date is printed on the printout for the
total counter.
[0 or 1/ 1 / 1/step]
0: Off (No Print), 1: On (Print)
003 Total Counter
5851
Displays the total counter when the installation date is registered to the
machine.
Bluetooth
001 Mode
CTL
Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit. Press

either key.
0 :Public, 1: Private
80
System Service Mode
Remote ROM Update

5856
Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a parallel cable when updating the
remote ROM.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 Local Port
CTL
0: Disallow
1: Allow
5857
Debug Log Save
CTL
ON/OFF
0: OFF, 1: ON
001 Switches the debug log feature on and off. The debug log cannot be captured until this
feature is switched on.
Target (2: HDD 3: SD)
002
Selects the destination where the debugging information generated by the event selected
by SP5858 will be stored if an error is generated
[2 to 3 /1]
2: HDD
3: SD Card
005
006
Save to HDD
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the hard disk.
Save to SD Card
Specifies the debug log number for saving to an SD card.
HDD to SD Card Latest
Takes the most recent 4 MB of the log written to the hard disk and copies them to the SD
009 Card.
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD Card.
Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to
each SD Card.
81
HDD to SD Any
010
011
Takes the log of the specified key from the log on the hard disk and copies it to the SD Card.
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD Card.
Up to 4 MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to
each SD Card. This SP does not execute if there is no log on the HDD with no key specified.
Erase HDD Debug Data
Erases all debug logs on the HDD
Erase SD Debug
012 Erases SD debug logs in the SD card.

Turn off and on after executing this SP.
013
Dsply-SD Space
Displays the remaining space in the SD card.
SD to SD Latest (Latest 4 MB)
014
Saves the debug log (latest 4 MB) in memory to the SD card.

A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD card.
Up to 4MB can be copied to the SD card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to
the SD card.
SD to SD Any (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
015
016
017
82
Saves the specified debug log (with SP5-857-006) in memory to the SD card.
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD card.
Up to 4MB can be copied to the SD card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to
the SD card.
Make HDD Debug
This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD.
Make SD Debug
Executes the making of a file (4MB) for saving debug logs.
System Service Mode
Debug Log Save: SC

5858
CTL
These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the destination
selected by SP5857-2.
SP5858-3 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to the chapter "Trouble Shooting" for
a list of SC error codes.
Turns the save function on/off for SC codes generated by
copier engine errors.
001 Engine SC
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Turns the save function on/off for SC codes generated by

GW controller errors.
002 Controller SC
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
003 Any SC
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
Turns the save function on/off for jam errors.
004 Jam
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
5859
Debug Log Save Key
CTL
001 Key 1
002 Key 2
003 Key 3
004 Key 4
005 Key 5
These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for
functions that use common memory on the controller board.
006 Key 6
[ 9999999 to 9999999 / 0 / ]
007 Key 7
008 Key 8
009 Key 9
010 Key 10
83
5860
SMTP/POP3/IMAP4
CTL
Par Mail Rec Tout
[1 to 168 / 72 / 1 hour/step]
020 Sets the amount of time to wait before saving mail that breaks up during reception. The
received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received during this
prescribed time.
MDN Res RFC2298
[0 to 1 / 1 / ]
021 Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.
0: No, 1: Yes
SMTP Aut Field Rep
[0 to 1 / 0 / ]
022 Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated account
after the SMTP server is validated.
0: No. "From" item not switched. 1: Yes. "From" item switched.
SMTP Aut. Direct Set
[0 or 1 / 0 / ]
Selects the authentication method for SMPT.

Bit switch:
Bit 0: LOGIN
025
Bit 1: PLAIN
Bit 2: CRAM MD5
Bit 3: DIGEST MD5
Bit 4 to 7: Not used
This SP is activated only when SMTP authorization is enabled by UP mode.
026 S/MINE Header

5866
001
E-mail Report
Report Validity
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / ]
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Enables or disables the E-mail alert function.

005
84
Add Date Field
CTL
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / ] 0: Not add, 1: Add
Adds or does not add the date field to the header of the alert mail.
System Service Mode
5869
RAM Disk Setting
001
Mail Function
GWINIT
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: ON, 1: OFF
Turns on or off the e-mail function.

5870
5873
5875
Common Key Info Writing

001 Writing
CTL
Writes to flash ROM the common proof for

validating the device for @Remote specifications.
003 Initialize
CTL
Formats the common proof area of the flash ROM.

FA
SD Card Appli Move

001 Move Exec
This SP copies the application programs from the original SD

card in SD card slot 3 to an SD card in SD card slot 2.
002 Undo Exec
This SP copies back the application programs from an SD

card in the SD Card Slot 3 to the original SD card in the SD
card slot 2. Use this menu when you have mistakenly copied
some programs by using "Move Exec" (SP5873-1).
SC Auto Reboot
Enables or disables the automatic reboot function
when an SC error occurs.
[0 or 1 / 0 / ]
001 Reboot Mode
CTL
0: The machine reboots automatically when the

machine issues an SC error and logs the SC error
code. If the same SC occurs again, the machine
does not reboot.
1: The machine does not reboot when an SC error
occurs.
The reboot is not executed for Type A, B or C SC
codes.
85
Selects the reboot method for SC.

002 Reboot Method
CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Manual reboot, 1: Automatic reboot
5878
Option Setup
001 Data Overwrite Security
002 Encryption Option
5881
Enables the Data Overwrite Security unit. Press

"EXECUTE" on the operation panel. Then turn the
machine off and on.
Delete Fixed Sent
001 Delete Fixed Sent

5885
Deletes the fixed form sentence.
Set WIM Function

200 Detect Mem Leak
201 DocSvr Timeout
5887
SD GetCounter SSP
001
This SP saves the counter list of the machine to an SD card in the slot 3.
The folder of "SD_COUNTER" must be made in an SD card for this SP.
Person Info Prot
Selects the protection level for logs.
5888*
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1}
0: No authentication, No protection for logs
1: No authentication, Protected logs (an administrator can see the logs)
5893
86
[SDK Apli Cnt Name]
*CTL
Displays the counter name of each SDK application.
001
SDK-1
002
SDK-2
003
SDK-3
System Service Mode
004
SDK-4
005
SDK-5
006
SDK-6
5902
Test Pattern Print
5902 1
5907*
"Test Pattern Print" in this section.
Plug & Play
Selects the brand name and production name for the Plug and Play function. These names
are stored in the NVRAM. When the NVRAM data is corrupted, select these names once
5907 1 again. Use the right-arrow or left-arrow key to scroll through the list of brand names. To
select a brand name, press the OK key. An asterisk (*) indicates which manufacture is
currently selected.
5912*
PCU Alarm Counter
[0 to 255 / 45 / 1/step]
Printout
Specifies the PCU alarm level. The PCU alarm is issued when the following condition is met:
5912 1 PAc x 1000 >= PCUc
where PAc is the value specified in this SP and PCUc is the PCU counter. When you specify
0 (zero), the PCU alarm is deactivated.
5913
Switch Permission
Print Application
Sets the length of time to elapse before allowing another application to take control of the
002 display when the application currently controlling the display is not operating because a
key has not been pressed.
[3 to 30 / 3 / 1 second/step]
5974
Cherry Server
87
Selects which version of the Scan Router application program, "Light" or "Full (Professional)",
is installed.
001 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Light version (supplied with this machine)
1: Full version (optional)
Device Setting
5985
The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller. Use this SP to enable
and disable these features. In order to use the NIC and USB functions built into the
controller board, these SP codes must be set to "1".
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF, 1: ON, 2: ON: Limited
When the "Function limitation" is set, "On board NIC" is limited only
for the @Remote or LDAP/NT authentication.
001 On Board NIC
Other network applications than @Remote or LDAP/NT
authentication are not available when this SP is set to "2". Even
if you can change the initial settings of those network
applications, settings may not actually work.
002 On Board USB
SP Print Mode
5990
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
SMC Print
In the SP mode, press Copy Window to move to the copy screen, select the paper size,
then press Start. Select A4/LT (Sideways) or larger to ensure that all the information prints.
Press SP Window to return to the SP mode, select the desired print, and press "EXECUTE".
001 All (Data List)
002 SP (Mode Data List)
003 User Program
004 Logging Data
005 Diagnostic Report
006 Non-Default (Prints only SPs set to values other than defaults.)
88
System Service Mode
007 NIB Summary

021 Copier UP
022 Scanner SP
023 Scanner UP
5998
Engine Memory Clear
001 See the section "Memory Clear" in this chapter.
SP6-XXX (Peripherals)
6006*
ADF Adjustment (
"DF Image Adjustment" in the "Adjusting Copy Image Area")
NOTE: Available menus depend on the machine model and its configuration.
StoS/Front Regist
[5.0 to +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
001 Adjusts the side-to-side registration for the front side of the original, for ARDF mode. Use
the
key to select "+" or "" before entering the value
Leading Regist
[5.0 to +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
002 Adjusts the leading edge registration for ARDF mode. Use the
"" before entering the value.
Trailing Erase
key to select "+" or
[3.0 to +3.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step]
003 Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin for ARDF mode. Use the
"" before entering the value.
S to S/ Rear Regist
key to select "+" or
[5.0 to +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
004 Adjusts the side-to-side registration for the 2nd side of the original, for ARDF mode. Use
the
key to select "+" or "" before entering the value
005
Sub-scan Magnif
[0.9 to +0.9 / 0.0 / 0.1 %/step]
Adjusts the sub-scan magnification for the ARDF.

Origin Curl Adj
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
006 Turns on or off the skew correction at 2nd side scanning. This SP is activated only when the
duplex mode is selected.
89
Skew Correction
[20 to +20 / 0.0 / 1 mm/step]
007 Adjusts the original buckle for the skew correction at 2ns side scanning. This SP is activated
only when SP6-006-006 is set to "1 (Yes)".
6009
ADF Free Run

Duplex Mode
001 Performs an ARDF free run in duplex scanning mode. Press "ON" to start; press "OFF" to
stop.
Simplex Mode
003 Performs an ARDF free run at simplex scanning mode. Press "ON" to start; press "OFF" to
stop.
6910*
ADF Shading Time
[0 to 60 / 30 / 1 s/step]
Adjusts the interval used for the shading processing in the ARDF mode. Light and heat in
001 the room may affect the scanner response. Reduce this setting if copy quality indicates that
the white level is drifting during ARDF copy jobs.
6930*
ADF Hole Setting
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: No, 1: Yes
Enables or disables the ADF hole setting.

001 When "1: Yes" is selected, the machine prevents feed jams of the punched originals in the
ARDF.
SP7-XXX (Data Log)

7001*
Total Operation
001 Displays the total operation time (total drum rotation time).
7401*
Total SC Counter
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
001 Displays how many times SC codes are generated.

7403*
90
SC History
System Service Mode
001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
Displays the most recent 10 service calls.
006 Latest 5
007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9
7502*
CounterPaper Jam
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
001 Displays the total number of copy paper jams.

7503*
CounterOrgn Jam
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
001 Displays the total number of original jams,
7504*
001
010
011
012
Paper Jam/Loc
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
Displays the total number of the paper jams classified by timing and location.
At power on
Paper jam occurs at power on.
Regist NoFeed: OFF
Paper does not reach the registration sensor (from a paper tray).
1 Vertical SN: OFF
Paper does not reach the relay sensor.
1 Vertical SN: ON
Paper is caught at the relay sensor.
91
021
022
050
Vertical SN: OFF

Paper does not reach the vertical transport sensor.
Vertical SN: ON
Paper is caught at the vertical transport sensor.
Regist Bypass: OFF
Paper does not reach the registration sensor (from the by-pass tray).
Regist Duplex: OFF
060 Paper does not reach the registration sensor during reverse-side printing (for duplex
printing).
070
120
121
122
123
125
92
Regist SN: ON
Paper is caught at the registration sensor.
1 Exit SN: ON
Paper is caught at the exit sensor (previous page).
Exit SN: OFF
Paper does not reach the exit sensor.
2 Exit SN: ON
Paper is caught at the exit sensor.
Dup Inverter: OFF
Paper does not reach the duplex inverter sensor (from the registration roller).
Dup Inverter: ON
Paper is caught at the duplex inverter sensor.
System Service Mode
Original Jam Location

Displays the total number of original jams by location. These jams occur when the original
does not activate the sensors.
7505
Note
Lag. Jam occurs when the paper remains at the sensor for longer than the prescribed
time.
Late: Jam occurs because paper fails to arrive at the prescribed time.
210 Regist SN: OFF

211 Regist SN: ON
212 Paper Exit SN: OFF
213 Paper Exit SN: ON
214 Inverter: OFF
215 Inverter: ON
7506
[Paper Jam/ Size] Jam Counter: Paper Size

006 A5 LEF
044 HLT LEF
133 A4 SEF
134 A5 SEF
142 B5 SEF
CTL
Displays the number of jams according to the paper size.

[ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
164 LG SEF
166 LT SEF
172 HLT SEF
255 Others
7507*
Dsply-P Jam Hist
93
001 Lastest
Displays the copy jam history (the most recent 10 jams)
002 Latest 1
Sample Display:
003 Latest 2
CODE:007
004 Latest 3
SIZE:05h
TOTAL:0000334
005 Latest 4
DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000
006 Latest 5
where:
007 Latest 6
CODE is the SP7504-*** number (see above.
008 Latest 7
SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex.

TOTAL is the total jam error count (SP7502)
009 Latest 8
DATE is the date the jams occurred.
010 Latest 9
94
Size
Code
Size
Code
Size
Code
A4 (S)
05
A3 (L)
84
DLT (L)
A0
A5 (S)
06
A4 (L)
85
LG (L)
A4
B5 (S)
0E
A5 (L)
86
LT (L)
A6
LT (S)
26
B4 (L)
8D
HLT (L)
AC
HLT (S)
2C
B5 (L)
8E
Others
FF
7508*
Dsply-O Jam History
System Service Mode
001 Lastest
Displays the original jam history (the most recent 10 jams).
002 Last 1
Sample Display:
003 Last 2
CODE:007
004 Last 3
SIZE:05h
TOTAL:0000334
005 Last 4
DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000
006 Last 5
where:
007 Last 6
CODE is the SP7505*** number (see above.
008 Last 7
SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex.
TOTAL is the total error count (SP7503)
009 Last 8
DATE is the date the jams occurred.
010 Last 9
7624
Part Replacement
001
7801
PCU
Selects the PM maintenance for PCU.
Memory/Version/PN
255
7803*
Displays the he part number and version of all ROMs in the machine
PM Counter
001 Paper
7804
Displays the PM counter.
PM Count Reset
Paper
001 Resets the PM counter (SP7-803-001). When the program ends normally, the message
"Completed" is displayed.
7807
ResetSC/Jam
95
Resets the SC, paper, original, and total jam counters. When the program ends normally,
001 the message "Completed" is displayed. SP7-807-1 does not reset the following logs:
SP7-507 (Display-Paper Jam History) and SP7-508 (Display-Original Jam History).
MF Error Counter Japan Only
7826
Displays the number of counts requested of the card/key counter.
001 Error Total
A request for the count total failed at power on. This error will
occur if the device is installed but disconnected.
002 Error Staple
The request for a staple count failed at power on. This error
will occur if the device is installed but disconnected.
MF Error Counter Clear
7827
Press Execute to reset to 0 the values of SP7826. Japan Only
7832*
001
Display-Self-Diag
Displays the SC codes and the number of their occurrences. Each number is in the range
of 0 to 9999.
[Resident Memory]
7836
Displays the contents of the memory on the controller board.

Assert Info
7901
Records the location where a problem is detected in the program. The data stored in this
SP is used for problem analysis. DFU
001 File Name
002 Number of Lines
003 Location
DsplyInfo Count
7991*
96
Displays the total operating time or the total number of operations. The time is displayed in
the following format: day: hour: minute: second.
System Service Mode
003
004
005
7992*
004
005
Dsply-ID S Work
The total of the time when the ID sensor is working.
Dsply-Dev Counter
The total number of paper outputs.
Dsply-ID Er Count
The total number of ID-sensor errors.
Reset-Info Count
Reset-Dev Count
Clears the development counter (SP7-991-004).
Reset-ID Er Count
Clears the ID sensor error counter (SP7-991-005).
SP8-XXX (History)
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the mode of
operation is referred to as an "application"). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table, make sure that
you understand what these prefixes mean.
Prefixes
What it means
T:
Total: (Grand Total).
C:
Copy application.
F:
Fax application.
P:
Print application.
S:
Scan application.
O:
Other applications
(external network
applications, for example)
Grand total of the items counted for all applications (C, F,

P, etc.)..
Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each application

when the job was not stored on the document server.
Refers to network applications such as Web Image

Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK (Software
Development Kit) will also be counted with this group in the
future.
97
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying them on the small
LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it
again if you see the name of an SP that you do not understand.
Key for Abbreviations
Abbreviation
98
What it means
"By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application
>
More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more"
AddBook
Address Book
Apl
Application
B/W
Black & White
Bk
Black
Cyan
ColCr
Color Create
ColMode
Color Mode
Comb
Combine
Comp
Compression
Deliv
Delivery
DesApl
Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan, Print) used to

store the job on the document server, for example.
Dev Counter
Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex
Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul
Emulation
FC
Full Color
FIN
Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed
No Margins
GenCopy
Generation Copy Mode
System Service Mode
Abbreviation
What it means
GPC
Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does not count up.
For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts up by the number that is
in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)
IFax
Internet Fax
ImgEdt
Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g. border
removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
Black (YMCK)
LS
Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize
Large (paper) Size
Mag
Magnification
MC
One color (monochrome)
NRS
NRS (@Remote), which allows a service center to monitor machines

remotely. "@Remote" is used overseas; "CSS" is used in Japan.
Org
Original for scanning
OrgJam
Original Jam
Palm 2
Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows print jobs
to be distributed evenly among the printers on the network, and allows files
to moved around, combined, and converted to different formats.
PC
Personal Computer
PGS
Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original. Duplex pages
count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3/DLT
counter SP is switched ON.
PJob
Print Jobs
Ppr
Paper
PrtJam
Printer (plotter) Jam
PrtPGS
Print Pages
Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2 only. This
machine is under development and currently not available.
99
Abbreviation
What it means
RCG
Remote Communication Gate
Rez
Resolution
SC
Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn
Scan
Sim, Simplex
Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email
Scan-to-E-mail
SMC
SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters are recorded
in the SMC report.
Svr
Server
TonEnd
Toner End
TonSave
Toner Save
TXJob
Send, Transmission
YMC
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear.
8 191
T:Total Scan PGS
CTL
8 192
C:Total Scan PGS
CTL
8 193
F:Total Scan PGS
CTL
8 195
S:Total Scan PGS
CTL
These SPs count the pages scanned by each

application that uses the scanner to scan
images.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number of physical pages.
These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to adjust color.
Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
Examples
100
System Service Mode
If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not stored, the S: count
is 4.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the Store File button
in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
T:LSize Scan PGS
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan and
copy jobs. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission is not counted.
8 201
These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools display.
F:LSize Scan PGS
8 203
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of large pages scanned by original type for Fax jobs.
S:LSize Scan PGS
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan jobs
only. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission are not counted.
8 205
These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools display.
ADF Org Feeds
8 221
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and back side
scanning.
Number of front sides fed for scanning:
001
Front
With an ADF/ARDF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front
side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either simplex
or duplex scanning.
With an ADF/ARDF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the
Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex
front side scanning. (The front side is determined by which side the
user loads face up.)
101
Number of rear sides fed for scanning:
002
Back
With an ADF/ARDF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex scanning.
With an ADF/ARDF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the
Back count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex rearside scanning.
When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1.
If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double counting. Also, the
pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is output.
8 281
T:Scan PGS/TWAIN
CTL
8 285
S:Scan PGS/TWAIN
CTL
These SPs count the number of pages

scanned using a TWAIN driver. These
counters reveal how the TWAIN driver is
used for delivery functions.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
At the present time, these counters
perform identical counts.
8 291
T:Scan PGS/Stamp
CTL
8 293
F:Scan PGS/Stamp
CTL
8 295
S:Scan PGS/Stamp
CTL
T:Scan PGS/Size
8 301
102
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all applications. Use
these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing) page size
[SP 8-441].
C:Scan PGS/Size
8 302
CTL
These SPs count the number of pages

stamped with the stamp in the ADF unit.
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy application.
Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing) page
size [SP 8-442].
System Service Mode
F:Scan PGS/Size
8 303
CTL
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax application. Use
these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-443].
S:Scan PGS/Size
8 305
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan application.
Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP
8-445].
001 A3
002 A4
003 A5
004 B4
005 B5
006 DLT
007 LG
008 LT
009 HLT
010 Full Bleed
254 Other (Standard)
255 Other (Custom)
8 381
T:Total PrtPGS
CTL
8 382
C:Total PrtPGS
CTL
8 383
F:Total PrtPGS
CTL
8 384
P:Total PrtPGS
CTL
These SPs count the number of pages printed

by the customer. The counter for the
application used for storing the pages
increments.
8 385
S:Total PrtPGS
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8 387
O:Total PrtPGS
CTL
When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT page is counted as
2.
103
When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored is counted for the
application that stored them.
These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the following pages
are not counted as printed pages:
Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets.
Reports printed to confirm counts.
All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports, etc.)
Test prints for machine image adjustment.
Error notification reports.
Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
LSize PrtPGS
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
8 391
In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also
displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
8 411
Prints/Duplex
CTL
This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back

counted as 1 page) used for duplex printing.
Last pages printed only on one side are not
counted.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8 421
104
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combining, and n-Up settings the number of pages
processed for printing by the copier application.
F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8 423
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages
processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8 422
CTL
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
processed for printing by the fax application.
System Service Mode
P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8 424
CTL
processed for printing by the printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8 425
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
processed for printing by the scanner application.
O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8 427
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
processed for printing by Other applications
001 Simplex> Duplex
002 Duplex> Duplex
003 Book> Duplex
004 Simplex Combine
005 Duplex Combine
006 2>
2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
007 4>
008 6>
009 8>
010 9>
011 16>
012 Booklet
013 Magazine
These counts (SP8-421 to SP8-427) are especially useful for customers who need to improve their
compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption.
Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page.
Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
Booklet
Magazine
105
Original
Pages
Count
Original
Pages
Count
8 441
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8 443
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8 447
106
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax application.
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the printer
application.
S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8 445
CTL
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the copy
application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8 444
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all applications.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8 442
CTL
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the scanner
application.
O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other applications.
System Service Mode
001 A3
002 A4
003 A5
004 B4
005 B5
006 DLT
007 LG
008 LT
009 HLT
010 Full Bleed
254 Other (Standard)
255 Other (Custom)
These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.

8 451
PrtPGS/Ppr Tray
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
001 Bypass
Bypass Tray
002 Tray 1
Copier
003 Tray 2
Copier
004 Tray 3
Copier
005 Tray 4
Currently not used.
006 Tray 5
Currently not used.
007 Tray 6
Currently not used.
008 Tray 7
Currently not used.
009 Tray 8
Currently not used.
010 Tray 9
Currently not used.
107
011 Tray 10
Currently not used.
012 Tray 11
Currently not used.
013 Tray 12
Currently not used.
014 Tray 13
Currently not used.
015 Tray 14
Currently not used.
016 Tray 15
Currently not used.
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications.
8 461
These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is based on
feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed rollers. However,
these counts are based on output timing.
Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a page printed
on one side counts as 1.
8 462
8 463
8 464
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer application.
001 Normal
002 Recycled
003 Special
004 Thick
005 Normal (Back)
006 Thick (Back)
007 OHP
108
System Service Mode
008 Other
8 521
T:PrtPGS/FIN
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Copy
application.
F:PrtPGS/FIN
8 523
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all applications.
C:PrtPGS/FIN
8 522
CTL
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Fax
application.
Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available.
P:PrtPGS/FIN
8 524
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Print
application.
S:PrtPGS/FIN
8 525
CTL
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Scanner
application.
001 Sort
002 Stack
003 Staple
004 Booklet
005 Z-Fold
006 Punch
007 Other
If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the unstapled pages are still
counted.
The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries are counted.
109
T:Counter
8 581
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
This SP counts the total output broken down by color output, regardless of the
application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are
also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
001 Total
8 591
O:Counter
8 591 1 A3/DLT
Cvg Counter
8 601 1 Cvg: BW %
8 601 11 Cvg: BW Pages
8 631
8 633
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number
of duplex pages printed, and the number of staples used.
These totals are for Other (O:) applications only.
8 591 2 Duplex
8 601
CTL
T:FAX TX PGS
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Displays the total coverage of each mode.

Displays the number of the printouts in each mode.
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
This SP counts by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone number.
F:FAX TX PGS
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
This SP counts by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone number.
001 B/W
If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted separately as B/
W or Color.
At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8631 and SP8633 are
the same.
The counts include error pages.
If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is done for
each destination.
Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination.
110
System Service Mode
T:IFAX TX PGS
8 641
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
This SP counts by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax images using
I-Fax.
F:IFAX TX PGS
8 643
CTL
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
This SP counts by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax images using IFax.
001 B/W
If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted separately as B/
W or Color.
At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8641 and SP8643 are
the same.
The counts include error pages.
If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is done for
each destination.
Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination.
T:S-to-Email PGS
8 651
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
This SP counts by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail for both
the Scan and document server applications.
S:S-to-Email PGS
8 655
CTL
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
This SP counts by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail for the
Scan application only.
001 B/W
002 Color
The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored on the HDD. If the job is
cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not counted.
If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses, the count is 10 (the pages are
sent to the same SMTP server together).
If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the count is 50 (the document is sent
to each destination of the SMB/FTP server).
111
Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to a large
number of destinations, the count may be divided and counted separately. For example, if a 10-page
document is sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and the count is also
10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).
T:Deliv PGS/Svr
8 661
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router server
by both Scan and LS applications.
S:Deliv PGS/Svr
8 665
CTL
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router server
by the Scan application.
001 B/W
002 Color
The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of the Scan Router
server.
If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes, the count is not done.
The count is executed even if there is confirmation of the arrival at the Scan Router server.
T:Deliv PGS/PC
8 671
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder on a PC (Scanto-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
S:Deliv PGS/PC
8 675
CTL
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan-to-PC with the
Scan application.
001 B/W
002 Color
Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the count.
If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages stored are counted for the
application that stored them.
112
System Service Mode
When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is done for the number of pages
sent to each destination.
8 681
T:PCFAX TXPGS
CTL
8 683
F:PCFAX TXPGS
CTL
These SPs count the number of pages sent by PC Fax.

These SPs are provided for the Fax application only,
so the counts for SP8-681 and SP8-683 are the
same.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PC through the copier to the
destination.
When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting, the pages are only
counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location A and location B. The counter goes
up by 10, not 20.)
TX PGS/Port
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to send them. For
example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via ISDN G4, the count for ISDN
(G3, G4) is 12.
8 701
001 PSTN-1
002 PSTN-2
003 PSTN-3
004 ISDN (G3,G4)
005 Network
8 711
8 715
T:Scan PGS/Comp
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
S:Scan PGS/Comp
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages sent by each compression mode.
-001 JPEG/JPEG2000
TIFF M/S (Multi/

Single)
-002
-003 PDF
-004 Other
113
RX PGS/Port
8741
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to receive
them.
001 PSTN-1
002 PSTN-2
003 PSTN-3
004 ISDN (G3,G4)

005 Network
8 771
Dev Counter
CTL
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
This SP counts the total number of developed images.

001 Total
8 781
Toner Botol Info.
*BICU
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
This SP counts the total number of developed images.

001 Total
Toner Remain
CTL
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1]
This SP displays the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP allows the user
to check the toner supply at any time.
8 801
This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps) is better than
other machines on the market that can only measure in increments of 10 (10%
steps).
001 K
Cvr Cnt:0-10%
8 851
*BICU
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color
is from 0% to 10%.
011 0-2%:Bk
114
System Service Mode
021 3-4%: Bk
031 5-7%: Bk
041 8-10%: Bk
Cvr Cnt: 11-20%
8 861
*BICU
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
is from 11% to 20%.
001 Bk
Cvr Cnt: 21-30%
8 871
*BICU
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
is from 21% to 30%.
001 Bk
Cvr Cnt: 31%-
8 881
*BICU
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
is 31% or higher.
001 Bk
8 891
Page/Toner Bottle
*BICU
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
This SP displays the number of sheets output by the scan application.

001 Bk
Page/Toner k Prev1
8 901
*BICU
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
This SP displays the number of sheets output by the scan application with the previously
replaced units.
001 Bk
115
Page/Toner k Prev2
8 911
*BICU
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
This SP displays the number of sheets output by the scan application with the unit
replaced before the previously replaced unit (two steps back from the current unit).
001 Bk
8 921
Cvr Cnt/Total
*BICU
[0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1]
001 Coverage(%): BK
These SPs display the total coverage percentage of sheets

output by the machine.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011 Covwerage/P: Bk
Machine Status
8 941
116
These SPs display the total coverage pages output by the

machine.
CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation mode. These
SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine operation for improvement
of their compliance with ISO Standards.
001 Operation Time
Engine operation time. Does not include time while controller is

saving data to HDD (while engine is not operating).
002 Standby Time
Engine not operating. Includes time while controller saves data

to HDD. Does not include time spent in Energy Save, Low
Power, or Off modes.
003 Energy Save Time
Includes time while the machine is performing background

printing.
004 Low Power Time
Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on. Includes

time while machine is performing background printing.
005 Off Mode Time
Includes time while machine is performing background printing.

Does not include time machine remains powered off with the
power switches.
006 SC
Total down time due to SC errors.
007 PrtJam
Total down time due to paper jams during printing.
008 OrgJam
Total down time due to original jams during scanning.
System Service Mode
009 Supply PM Unit End
8 999
Total down time due to toner end.
AdominCounter
CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Displays the user setting counter for administrator.

001 Total
003 Copy: BW
007 Printer: BW
010 FaxP: BW
013 Duplex
015 Cvr: BW %
017 Cvr: BW Pages
101 SedTtl: FC
102 SendTtl: BW
103 FaxSend
104 FaxSend: BW
105 FaxSend: BW
Input Check (SP5-803)

Conducting Input Check
1. Select SP5-803.
2. Select the number (see the table below) corresponding to the component.
3. Select "Execute." The copy mode is activated.
4. The sign "01H" or "00H" is displayed (see the table below).
117
Input Check Table

Num.
118
Sensor/Switch
1h
0h
001
Safety SW
Open
Closed
003
Right Cover SW
Open
Closed
006
Upper Relay S
Paper detected
Not detected
007
Lower Relay S
Paper detected
Not detected
009
Regist Sensor
Paper detected
Not detected
010
Exit Sensor
Paper detected
Not detected
011
Duplex Inverter S
Paper detected
Not detected
014
By-pass PE S
Paper detected
Not detected
016
Upper PE S
Paper detected
Not detected
017
BK-Upper PE S
Paper detected
Not detected
020
BK-Lower PE S
Paper detected
Not detected
027
PCU Set Signal
Installed
Not installed
028
BK type
030
Duplex Installed
Installed
Not installed
032
Main M Lock
Locked
Not locked
033
Polygon M Lock
Locked
Not locked
035
Total CO Install
Installed
Not installed
036
Key CO Install
Installed
Not installed
037
L-Synchronization
Detected
Not detected
039
DF-Cover Open S
Open
Closed
040
DF-Original Set S
Paper detected
Not detected
041
DF-Registration S
Paper detected
Not detected
042
DF-Exit S
Paper detected
Not detected
System Service Mode
Num.
Sensor/Switch
1h
0h
044
DF-Reverse S
Paper detected
Not detected
045
Platen Cover S
Open
Closed
050
Fan Motor Lock (High speed)
High speed
Low speed or stop
052
Front Cover SW
Open
Closed
053
HP Sensor
Detected
Not detected
055
BK-UpperCover SW
Open
Closed
056
BK-LowerCover SW
Open
Closed
* Available Paper Feed Unit

00
None
30
1-tray paper feed unit
Output Check (SP5-804)

Conducting Output Check
To prevent mechanical or electrical damage, do not keep an electrical component on for a long time.
1. Select SP5-804.
2. Select the number (see the table below) corresponding to the component.
3. Select "ON."
4. To stop the operation, select "OFF."
Output Check Table

Num.
Component
001
Main M- Fwd
002
Main M- Rev
119
Num.
Component
003
Quenching Lamp
004
Toner Sup CL
005
Fan M- High
006
Fan M- Low
007
Registration CL
008
By-pass Feed CL
009
Upper Feed CL
010
BK-Upper Feed CL
015
BK-Lower Feed CL
020
Duplex Inv M- Rev
021
Duplex Inv M- Fwd
024
Duplex Inv M- Hold
026
Polygon M
027
Polygon M/LD
028
LD
029
DF-Feed M
030
DF-Transport M
031
DF-Feed CL
034
DF-Gate SOL (Junction Gate Solenoid)
038
Fusing SOL
When checking Fan Motor High (005) or Fan Motor Low (006) note the following:
These motors may not respond when the fusing temperature is high.
Selecting "ON" checks that one of these motors normally operates. Selecting "OFF" turns off the motor
that you have started by selecting "ON." However, this does not guarantee that the motor normally
stops during normal operation.
120
System Service Mode
Printer Service Mode

Service Mode Table
1001
Bit Switch
001 Bit Switch 1
bit 0
DFU
bit 1
DFU
bit 2
DFU
bit 3
No I/O Timeout
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enables/Disables MFP I/O Timeouts. Enabled: The MFP I/O Timeout setting will have
no affect. I/O Timeouts will never occur.
bit 4
SD Card Save Mode
0: Disable
Enabled: Print jobs will be saved to an SD Card in the GW SD slot (

Function" in the service tables of Field Service Manual).
1: Enable
"Card Save
bit 5
DFU
bit 6
DFU
bit 7
[RPCS,PCL]: Printable area frame border
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enable: The machine prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border on the edges of the
printable area.
1001
Bit Switch
121
002 Bit Switch 2
bit 0
DFU
bit 1
DFU
bit 2
Applying a collate Type
Shift Collate
Normal Collate
A collation type (shift or normal) will be applied to all jobs that do not already have a
'Collate Type' configured.
If #5-0 is enabled, this Bit Switch has no effect.

bit 3
[PCL5e/c,PS]: PDL Auto Switching
0: Enable
1: Disable
Disabled: The MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job.

Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto PDL switching
is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly.
1001
122
bit 4
DFU
bit 5
DFU
bit 6
DFU
bit 7
DFU
Bit Switch
System Service Mode
003 Bit Switch 3
bit 0
DFU
bit 1
DFU
bit 2
[PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility
0: Disable
1: Enable
Enabled: Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000/HP8000.
In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A") will be changed
to "<ESC>*r1A"
1001
bit 3
DFU
bit 4
DFU
bit 5
DFU
bit 6
DFU
bit 7
DFU
Bit Switch
004 Bit Switch 4 DFU

1001
Bit Switch
123
005 Bit Switch 5
bit 0
DFU
bit 1
Multiple copies if a paper size or type mismatch

occurs
Disabled
Enabled
(single
copy)
(multiple)
If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple copies, only a
single copy is output by default. Using this BitSw, the device can be configured to print
all copies even if a paper mismatch occurs.
3
bit 2
DFU
bit 3
[PS] PS Criteria
Pattern3
Pattern1
Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpreter to determine whether a

job is PS data or not.
Pattern3: includes most PS commands.
Pattern1: A small number of PS tags and headers
bit 4
Increase max number of the stored jobs to 1000

jobs.
Disable
(100)
Enable
(1000)
Enabled: Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the HDD via Job
Type settings to 1000. The default is 100.
bit 5
DFU
bit 6
Method for determining the image rotation for the

edge to bring on
Disable
Enable
Enabled: The image rotation will be performed as they were in the specifications of
older models for the binding of pages of mixed orientation jobs. The old models are
below:
-PCL-: Pre-04A models
bit 7
Letterhead mode printing
Disable
Enable
(Duplex)
Routes all pages through the duplex unit. If this is disabled, simplex pages or the last
page of an odd-paged duplex job, are not routed through the duplex unit. This could
result in problems with letterhead / pre-printed pages.
124
System Service Mode
1001
Bit Switch
008 Bit Switch 8
bit 0
DFU
bit 1
DFU
bit 2
DFU
bit 3
DFU
bit 4
DFU
bit 5
DFU
bit 6
DFU
bit 7
DFU
1001
Bit Switch

1001
Bit Switch
1003
Clear Setting
Not used
1004
Print Summary
Prints the service summary sheet
(An error log is printed in addition to the configuration

page).
1005
Display Version
Displays the version of the controller firmware.
1006
Sample/Locked print
0: Link with Doc., 1: On

Enables and disables the document server. When you
select "0" the document server is enabled or disables in
accordance with copy service mode SP5-967. When you
select "1" the document server is enabled regardless of
service mode SP5-967.
125
SP Modes Related to Printer Controller

The following SP modes are located in the copier SP mode. Refer to section 5.1 of the main unit service
manual.
SP No.
5801
Description
Memory All Clear
Function and Setting

Resets data for process control and all software counters, and
returns all modes and adjustments to their defaults values.
Section "Memory Clear" in this chapter for details.
5907
Plug & Play
Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows
Plug & Play. This information is stored in NVRAM.
7832
Detailed Display of
Self-Diagnostics
Displays the controller self-diagnostic result.
Scanner Program Mode Table

Service Table Key
Notation
What it means
[range / default /
step]
Example: [-9 to +9 / +3.0 / 0.1 mm step]. The setting can be adjusted in the
range 9, value reset to +3.0 after an NVRAM reset, and the value can be
changed in 0.1 mm steps with each key press.
italics
Comments added for your reference.
This value is stored in NVRAM. After a RAM reset, the default value (factory
setting) is restored.
DFU
Denotes "Design or Factory Use". Do not change this value.
SP1
Mode Number
Function and [Setting]

Displays the scanner NV version.
1001*
126
Scan NV Version
This shows as following: Function name _ Model name

_ Version
System Service Mode
1004*
Compression Type
Selects the compression type for binary picture

processing.
[1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR]
Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned
image.
1005*
Erase Margin
If the machine has scanned the edge of the original,

create a margin.
[0 to 5 / 0mm / 1mm step]
1009*
Remote Scan disable
Enables or disables the network TWAIN scanner

function.
0: enable, 1: disable
Clears or does not clear a user information after a job.
1012
User Info Release
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Not clear, 1: Clear
Display or not display a "Scan To Multi Media" function.
1013
Multi Media Func
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF, 1: ON
SP
Number/Name
Compression level (grayscale or full color)

2
0
These SP codes set the compression ratio for the grayscale or full color processing mode that can be
2
selected with the notch settings on the operation panel.
1
95 (highest ratio)
Range: 5 (lowest ratio)
Comp1:
5-95
1
(Middle IQual)
[5 to 95 / 20 /1/step]
Comp2:
5-95
2
(High IQual)
[5 to 95 / 40 /1/step]
127
SP
Number/Name
Comp3:
3
5-95 (Low [5 to 95 / 65 /1/step]
I-Qual)
Comp4:
5-95
4
[5 to 95 / 80 /1/step]
(Highest IQual)
Comp5:
5-95
5
(Lowest IQual)
[5 to 95 / 95 /1/step]
For the settings of the image quality, see the copier SP-mode table.
128
4. Appendix: Fax Troubleshooting

Guide
Fax Error Codes
If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to fix the problem
as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the error code display and on the
service report.
Code
Meaning
Suggested Cause/Action
Check the line connection.
0-00
DIS/NSF not detected within

40 s of Start being pressed
The machine at the other end may be incompatible.

Replace the NCU or FCU.
Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.
If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad line.
0-01
DCN received unexpectedly
0-03
Incompatible modem at the

other end
The other party is out of paper or has a jammed printer.

The other party pressed Stop during communication.
The other terminal is incompatible.
Try changing the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
Replace the FCU.
0-04
CFR or FTT not received after

modem training
The other terminal may be faulty; try sending to another

machine.
If the rx signal is weak or defective, there may be a
bad line.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Dedicated Tx parameters in Service Program Mode
129
Code
Meaning
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer.
0-05
Modem training fails even G3

shifts down to 2400 bps.
Replace the FCU.

Check for line problems.
Cross reference
See error code 0-04.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
4
0-06
The other terminal did not reply

to DCS

The other end may be defective or incompatible; try
sending to another machine.
Cross reference
0-07
No post-message response
from the other end after a page
was sent
The other end may have jammed or run out of paper.

The other end user may have disconnected the call.
Check for a bad line.
The other end may be defective; try sending to another
machine.
130
Fax Error Codes
Code
Meaning
The other end may have jammed, or run out of paper
or memory space.
0-08
The other end sent RTN or PIN

after receiving a page, because
there were too many errors

settings.
The other end may have a defective modem/NCU/
FCU; try sending to another machine.
Check for line problems and noise.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)

Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Dedicated Tx parameters in Service Program Mode
Incompatible or defective remote terminal; try sending
to another machine.
Noisy line: resend.
0-14
Non-standard post message

response code received

settings.
Cross reference
The other terminal is not capable of accepting the following
functions, or the other terminals memory is full.
0-15
The other terminal is not

capable of specific functions.
Confidential rx
Transfer function
SEP/SUB/PWD/SID
131
Code
Meaning
0-16
CFR or FTT not detected after

modem training in confidential
or transfer mode

settings.
The other end may have disconnected, or it may be
defective; try calling another machine.
If the rx signal level is too low, there may be a line
problem.
Cross reference

0-20
Facsimile data not received

within 6 s of retraining
Try calling another fax machine.

Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the first line
and/or rx cable equalizer setting.
Cross reference
Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6
Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Check the connections between the FCU, NCU, & line.
Check for line noise or other line problems.
0-21
EOL signal (end-of-line) from

the other end not received
within 5 s of the previous EOL
signal

The remote machine may be defective or may have
disconnected.
Cross reference
Maximum interval between EOLs and between ECM frames
- G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4
132
Fax Error Codes
Code
Meaning
0-22
The signal from the other end

was interrupted for more than
the acceptable modem carrier
drop time (default: 200 ms)
Defective remote terminal.

Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier drop time.
Cross reference
Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3 Switch 0A, bits
0 and 1

0-23
Too many errors during

reception
Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level.

Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting and/or rx
error criteria.
Cross reference
Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02, bits 0 and 1
0-30
The other terminal did not reply

to NSS(A) in AI short protocol
mode

settings.
The other terminal may not be compatible.
Cross reference
Dedicated tx parameters - Section 4
0-32
The other terminal sent a DCS,

which contained functions that
the receiving machine cannot
handle.
0-33
The data reception (not ECM) is

not completed within 10
minutes.
Check the protocol dump list.

Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.
The other terminal may have a defective modem/
NCU/FCU.
133
Code
Meaning
0-52
Polarity changed during

communication
0-55
FCU does not detect the SG3.
0-56
The stored message data

exceeds the capacity of the
mailbox in the SG3.
SG3 firmware or board defective.
The communication mode

specified in CM/JM was not
available
The other terminal did not have a compatible

communication mode (e.g., the other terminal was a
V.34 data modem and not a fax modem.)
(V.8 calling and called

terminal)
A polling tx file was not ready at the other terminal

when polling rx was initiated from the calling terminal.
0-70
0-74
The calling terminal fell back to

T.30 mode, because it could not
detect ANSam after sending CI.

Retry communication.
FCU firmware or board defective.
SG3 firmware or board defective.
The calling terminal could not detect ANSam due to

noise, etc.
ANSam was too short to detect.
Check the line connection and condition.
Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
0-75
0-76
0-77
The called terminal fell back to

detect a CM in response to
ANSam (ANSam timeout).
The terminal could not detect ANSam.
The calling terminal fell back to

detect a JM in response to CM
The called terminal could not detect a CM due to noise,

etc.
(CM timeout).
Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
The called terminal fell back to

detect a CJ in response to JM
(JM timeout).

Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
The calling terminal could not detect a JM due to noise,

etc.
A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot pass JM
to the other end.
Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
134
Fax Error Codes
Code
Meaning
0-79
The called terminal detected CI

while waiting for a V.21 signal.
0-80
The line was disconnected due

to a timeout in V.34 phase 2
line probing.
0-81

to a timeout in V.34 phase 3
equalizer training.
0-82

to a timeout in the V.34 phase 4
control channel start-up.
If this error occurs, the called terminal falls back to T.
30 mode.
The guard timer expired while starting these phases.
Serious noise, narrow bandwidth, or low signal level
can cause these errors.
If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal:
Try making a call at a later time.
Try using V.17 or a slower modem using dedicated tx
parameters.
Try increasing the tx level.

Try adjusting the tx cable equalizer setting.
If these errors happen at the receiving terminal:
0-83
0-84
0-85
0-86

to a timeout in the V.34 control
channel restart sequence.
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting.

to abnormal signaling in V.34
phase 4 control channel startup.
The signal did not stop within 10 s.

to abnormal signaling in V.34
control channel restart.
The signal did not stop within 10 s.
The line was disconnected

because the other terminal
requested a data rate using
MPh that was not available in
the currently selected symbol
rate.
Try increasing the tx level.

Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the same error is
frequent when receiving from multiple senders.
Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.

If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.

If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
The other terminal was incompatible.

Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.
135
Code
0-87
Meaning
The control channel started after
an unsuccessful primary
channel.
The receiving terminal restarted the control channel
because data reception in the primary channel was
not successful.
This does not result in an error communication.
0-88
The line was disconnected

because PPR was transmitted/
received 9 (default) times within
the same ECM frame.
2-11
Only one V.21 connection flag

was received
Replace the FCU.
2-12
Modem clock irregularity
Replace the FCU.
Try using a lower data rate at the start.

Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.

2-13
Modem initialization error
Update the modem ROM.

Replace the FCU.
136
2-23
JBIG compression or
reconstruction error
2-24
JBIG ASIC error
2-25
JBIG data reconstruction error

(BIH error)
2-26

(Float marker error)
JBIG data error
2-27

(End marker error)
Update the MBU ROM.
2-28

(Timeout)
2-29
JBIG trailing edge maker error
2-50
The machine resets itself for a

fatal FCU system error
Check the senders JBIG function.
FCU defective
Check the destination device.
If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the FCU.
Fax Error Codes
Code
Meaning
2-51
The machine resets itself

because of a fatal
communication error
If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the FCU.
2-53
Snd msg() in the manual task is

an error because the mailbox
for the operation task is full.
The user did the same operation many times, and this
gave too much load to the machine.
Check the line connector.
4-01
Line current was cut

Replace the FCU or the NCU.
4-10
Communication failed because

of an ID Code mismatch
(Closed Network) or Tel. No./
CSI mismatch (Protection
against Wrong Connections)
Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSIs

programmed correctly, then resend.
The machine at the other end may be defective.
5-10
DCR timer expired
Replace the FCU.
5-20
Storage impossible because of

a lack of memory
Temporary memory shortage.
5-21
Memory overflow
5-23
Print data error when printing a

substitute rx or confidential rx
message
5-25
SAF file access error
6-00
G3 ECM - T1 time out during

reception of facsimile data
6-01
G3 ECM - no V.21 signal was

received
6-02
G3 ECM - EOR was received
Test the SAF memory.

Test the SAF memory.
Ask the other end to resend the message.
Replace an SD card or HDD.
Replace the FCU.
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.

Replace the FCU.

6-04
G3 ECM - RTC not detected
Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.

Replace the FCU.
137
Code
Meaning
Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.
6-05
G3 ECM - facsimile data frame

not received within 18 s of CFR,
but there was no line fail
Replace the FCU.

Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer
Cross reference
6-06
G3 ECM - coding/decoding
error
Defective FCU.
6-08
G3 ECM - PIP/PIN received in

reply to PPS.NULL
The other end pressed Stop during communication.
The other terminal may be defective.
The other terminal may be defective.

Check for a noisy line.
6-09
G3 ECM - ERR received
Adjust the tx levels of the communicating machines.

See code 6-05.
Check for line noise.
6-10
G3 ECM - error frames still

received at the other end after
all communication attempts at
2400 bps
Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or the

dedicated tx parameter for that address).
6-21
V.21 flag detected during high

speed modem communication
6-22
The machine resets the

sequence because of an
abnormal handshake in the V.
34 control channel
6-99
V.21 signal not stopped within

6s
13-17
SIP user name registration error
The other terminal may be defective or incompatible.

Check for line noise.
If the same error occurs frequently, replace the FCU.
Replace the FCU.
Double registration of the SIP user name.
138
Capacity for user-name registration in the SIP server is

not sufficient.
Fax Error Codes
Code
Meaning
Incorrect initial setting for the SIP server.
13-18
SIP server access error
13-24
SIP authentication password

error
The input password for the authentication does not

match the password registered in the SIP server.
SMTP Send Error
Error occurred during sending to the SMTP server.

Occurs for any error other than 14-01 to 16. For
example, the mail address of the system administrator
is not registered.
14-00
Defective SIP server.
Failed to connect to the SMTP server (timeout) because

the server could not be found.
The PC is not ready to transfer files.

14-01
SMTP Connection Failed
SMTP server not functioning correctly.

The DNS IP address is not registered.
Network not operating correctly.
Destination folder selection not correct.
SMTP server operating incorrectly, or the destination
for direct SMTP sending is not correct.
14-02
No Service by SMTP Service

(421)
Contact the system administrator and check that the

SMTP server has the correct settings and operates
correctly.
Contact the system administrator for direct SMTP
sending and check the sending destination.
139
Code
Meaning
Failed to access the SMTP server because the access
is denied.
SMTP server operating incorrectly. Contact the system
administrator to determine if there is a problem with the
SMTP server and to check that the SMTP server settings
are correct.
14-03
Access to SMTP Server Denied

(450)
Folder send destination is incorrect. Contact the system

administrator to determine that the SMTP server
settings and path to the server are correct.
Device settings incorrect. Confirm that the user name
and password settings are correct.
Direct SMTP destination incorrect. Contact the system
administrator to determine if there is a problem at the
destination at that the settings at the destination are
correct.
14-04
Access to SMTP Server Denied

(550)
SMTP server operating incorrectly

Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly
Failed to access the SMTP server because the HDD on
the server is full.
Insufficient free space on the HDD of the SMTP server.
Contact the system administrator and check the
amount of space remaining on the SMTP server HDD.
14-05
SMTP Server HDD Full (452)
Insufficient free space on the HDD where the

destination folder is located. Contact the system
administrator and check the amount of space
remaining on the HDD where the target folder is
located.
Insufficient free space on the HDD at the target
destination for SMTP direct sending. Contact the
system administrator and check the amount of space
remaining on the target HDD.
The designated user does not exist.
14-06
140
User Not Found on SMTP

Server (551)
The designated user does not exist on the SMTP server.

The designated address is not for use with direct SMTP
sending.
Fax Error Codes
Code
Meaning
Failed to access the SMTP server because the
transmission failed.
PC not operating correctly.
14-07
Data Send to SMTP Server

Failed (4XX)

Destination folder setting incorrect.
Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly.
Failed to access the SMTP server because the
transmission failed.
14-08
Data Send to SMTP Server

Failed (5XX)
Destination folder setting incorrect.

Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly.
Software application error.
POP-Before-SMTP or SMTP authorization failed.
14-09
Authorization Failed for

Sending to SMTP Server
14-10
Addresses Exceeded
Number of broadcast addresses exceeded the limit for

the SMTP server.
14-11
Buffer Full
The send buffer is full so the transmission could not be

completed. Buffer is full due to using Scan-to-Email
while the buffer is being used send mail at the same
time.
14-12
Data Size Too Large
Transmission was cancelled because the detected size

of the file was too large.
14-13
Send Cancelled
Processing is interrupted because the user pressed

Stop.
14-14
Security Locked File Error
Update the software because of the defective

software.
14-15
Mail Data Error
Incorrect setting for file transfer
The transmitting a mail is interrupted via DCS due to

the incorrect data.
software.
141
Code
14-16
14-17
14-18
Meaning
Maximum Division Number

Error
When a mail is divided for the mail transmission and
the division number of a mail are more than the
specified number, the mail transmission is interrupted.
software.
software.
Incorrect Ticket
Access to MCS File Error
The access to MCS file is denied due to the no

permission of access.
software.
Failed to create the MCS file because:
14-30
MCS File Creation Failed
The number of files created with other applications on

the Document Server has exceeded the limit.
HDD is full or not operating correctly.
Software error.
UFS file could not be created:
14-31
UFS File Creation Failed
Not enough space in UFS area to handle both Scanto-Email and IFAX transmission.
HDD full or not operating correctly.
Software error.
14-32
Cancelled the Mail Due to Error

Detected by NFAX
Error detected with NFAX and send was cancelled due

to a software error.
14-33
No Mail Address For the

Machine
Neither the mail address of the machine nor the mail

address of the network administrator is registered.
14-34
Address designated in the

domain for SMTP sending does
not exist
Operational error in normal mail sending or direct

SMTP sending.
Check the address selected in the address book for
SMTP sending.
Check the domain selection.
142
Fax Error Codes
Code
Meaning
Due to an FCU mail job task error, the send was cancelled:
14-50
Mail Job Task Error
Address book was being edited during creation of the

notification mail.
Software error.
Not even one return notification can be downloaded:
14-51
UCS Destination Download

Error
The address book was being edited.
14-60
Send Cancel Failed
The cancel operation by the user failed to cancel the

send operation.
14-61
Notification Mail Send Failed

for All Destinations
All addresses for return notification mail failed.
14-62
Transmission Error due to the

existence of zero line page
When the 0 line page exists in received pages with G3

communication, the transmission is interrupted.
15-01
POP3/IMAP4 Server Not

Registered
At startup, the system detected that the IP address of

the POP3/IMAP4 server has not been registered in
the machine.
15-02
POP3/IMAP4 Mail Account

Information Not Registered
The POP3/IMAP4 mail account has not been

registered.
15-03
Mail Address Not Registered
The mail address has not been registered.
15-10
DCS Mail Receive Error
Error other than 15-11 to 15-18.
The number for the specified destination does not exist

(it was deleted or edited after the job was created).
The DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server could not be found:

15-11
Connection Error
The IP address for DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server is not

stored in the machine.
The DNS IP address is not registered.
POP3/IMAP4 send authorization failed:
Incorrect IFAX user name or password.
15-12
Authorization Error
Access was attempted by another device, such as the

PC.
POP3/IMAP4 settings incorrect.
143
Code
Meaning
15-13
Receive Buffer Full
Occurs only during manual reception. Transmission

cannot be received due to insufficient buffer space. The
buffer is being used for mail send or Scan-to-Email.
15-14
Mail Header Format Error
The mail header is not standard format. For example,

the Date line description is incorrect.
15-15
Mail Divide Error
The e-mail is not in standard format. There is no

boundary between parts of the e-mail, including the
header.
15-16
Mail Size Receive Error
The mail cannot be received because it is too large.
15-17
Receive Timeout
May occur during manual receiving only because the

network is not operating correctly.
15-18
Incomplete Mail Received
Only one portion of the mail was received.
15-31
Final Destination for Transfer

Request Reception Format Error
The format of the final destination for the transfer

request was incorrect.
The transmission cannot be delivered to the final destination:
144
Destination file format is incorrect.
15-39
Send/Delivery Destination
Error
15-41
SMTP Receive Error
Reception rejected because the transaction exceeded

the limit for the Auth. E-mail RX setting.
15-42
Off Ramp Gateway Error
The delivery destination address was specified with

Off Ramp Gateway OFF.
15-43
Address Format Error
Format error in the address of the Off Ramp Gateway.
15-44
Addresses Over
The number of addresses for the Off Ramp Gateway

exceeded the limit of 30.
15-61
Attachment File Format Error
The attached file is not TIFF format.
Could not create the destination for the file

transmission.
Fax Error Codes
Code
Meaning
Could not receive transmission due to:
Resolution error
Image of resolution greater than 200 dpi without
extended memory.
15-62
TIFF File Compatibility Error
Resolution is not supported.

Page size error
The page size was larger than A3.
Compression error
File was compressed with other than MH, MR, or
MMR.
The TIFF file sent as the attachment could not be received

because the TIFF header is incorrect:
15-63
TIFF Parameter Error
The TIFF file attachment is a type not supported.

The TIFF file attachment is corrupted.
Software error.
15-64
TIFF Decompression Error
The file received as an attachment caused the TIFF

decompression error:
The TIFF format of the attachment is corrupted.
Software error.
15-71
Not Binary Image Data
The file could not be received because the attachment

was not binary image data.
15-73
MDN Status Error
Could not find the Disposition line in the header of the

Return Receipt, or there is a problem with the firmware.
15-74
MDN Message ID Error
Could not find the Original Message ID line in the

header of the Return Receipt, or there is a problem with
the firmware.
Mail Job Task Read Error
Could not receive the transmission because the

destination buffer is full and the destination could not
be created (this error may occur when receiving a
transfer request or a request for notification of
reception).
15-80
145
Code
15-81
Meaning
Repeated Destination
Registration Error
Could not repeat receive the transmission because the
destination buffer is full and the destination could not
be created (this error may occur when receiving a
transfer request or a request for notification of
reception).
Could not receive the file for transfer to the final destination:
15-91
Send Registration Error
The format of the final destination or the transfer

destination is incorrect.
Destinations are full so the final and transfer
destinations could not be created.
4
15-92
Memory Overflow
Transmission could not be received because memory

overflowed during the transaction.
15-93
Memory Access Error
Transaction could not complete due to a malfunction

of SAF memory.
15-94
Incorrect ID Code
The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for transfer

request, because the ID code in the incoming e-mail
did not match the ID code registered in the machine.
15-95
Transfer Station Function
The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for transfer

because the transfer function was unavailable.
Divide the original into more than one page.
22-00
Original length exceeded the

maximum scan length
Check the resolution used for scanning. Lower the scan

resolution if possible.
Add optional page memory.
Wait for the files in the queue to be sent.
22-01
Memory overflow while

receiving
Delete unnecessary files from memory.

Transfer the substitute reception files to an another fax
machine, if the machines printer is busy or out of order.
Add an optional SAF memory card or hard disk.
22-02
146
Tx or rx job stalled due to line

disconnection at the other end
The job started normally but did not finish normally;

data may or may not have been received fully.
Restart the machine.
Fax Error Codes
Code
Meaning
Update the ROM
22-04
The machine cannot store

received data in the SAF
22-05
No G3 parameter confirmation
answer
23-00
Data read timeout during

construction
Restart the machine.
25-00
The machine software resets

itself after a fatal transmission
error occurred
Update the ROM
F0-xx
V.34 modem error
Replace the FCU.
Replace the FCU.

Defective FCU board or firmware.
Replace the FCU.
Replace the FCU.
Update the SG3 modem ROM.

F6-xx
SG3 modem error
Replace the SG3 board.

Try communicating another V.8/V.34 fax.
147
IFAX Troubleshooting
Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part of the network is
causing the problem.
Communication Route
General LAN
Item
1. Connection with the
LAN
2. LAN activity
Action [Remarks]
Check that the LAN cable is connected to the
machine.
Check that the LEDs on the hub are lit.
Check that other devices connected to the LAN
can communicate through the LAN.
Check the network settings on the PC.
1. Network settings on
the PC
2. Check that PC can

connect with the
Between IFAX and PC machine
[Is the IP address registered in the TCP/IP properties

in the network setup correct?
Check the IP address with the administrator of
the network.]
Use the ping command on the PC to contact
the machine.
[At the MS-DOS prompt, type ping then the IP address
of the machine, then press Enter.]
Check the LAN parameters
3. LAN settings in the

machine
Check if there is an IP address conflict with other

PCs.
[Use the Network function in the User Tools.
If there is an IP address conflict, inform the
administrator.]
Check the LAN parameters
Between machine and LAN settings in the

e-mail server
machine
Check if there is an IP address conflict with other

PCs.
[Use the Network function in the User Tools.
If there is an IP address conflict, inform the
administrator.]
148
IFAX Troubleshooting
Communication Route
Item
1. E-mail account on
the server
Action [Remarks]
Make sure that the machine can log into the email server.
Check that the account and password stored in
the server are the same as in the machine.
[Ask the administrator to check.]
Between machine and

e-mail server
Make sure that the client devices which have an

account in the server can send/receive e-mail.
2. E-mail server
1. E-mail account on
the Server
[Ask the administrator to check.

Send a test e-mail with the machines own number as
the destination. The machine receives the returned email if the communication is performed successfully.]
Make sure that the PC can log into the e-mail

server.
Check that the account and password stored in
the server are the same as in the machine.
[Ask the administrator to check.]
Between e-mail server

and internet
2. E-mail server
3. Destination e-mail
address
Make sure that the client devices which have an

account in the server can send/receive e-mail.
[Ask the administrator to check.
Send a test e-mail with the machines own number as
the destination. The machine receives the returned email if the communication is performed successfully.]
Make sure that the e-mail address is actually
used.
Check that the e-mail address contains no
incorrect characters such as spaces.
Use the ping command to contact the router.
Between e-mail server

Router settings
and internet
Check that other devices connected to the router

can sent data over the router.
[Ask the administrator of the server to check.]
149
Communication Route
Item
Error message by eBetween e-mail server

mail from the network of
and internet
the destination.
Action [Remarks]
Check whether e-mail can be sent to another
address on the same network, using the
application e-mail software.
Check the error e-mail message.
[Inform the administrator of the LAN.]
150
IP-Fax Troubleshooting
IP-Fax Transmission
Cannot send by IP Address/Host Name
Check Point
Action
LAN cable connected?
Check the LAN cable connection.
Specified IP address/host name correct?
Check the IP address/host name.
Firewall/NAT is installed?
Cannot breach the firewall. Send by using

another method (Fax, Internet Fax)
Transmission sent manually?
Manual sending not supported.
IP address of local machine registered?
Register the IP address.
Remote terminal port number setting other than

1720?
Send by specifying the port number.
Specified port number correct?
Confirm the port number of the remote fax.
DNS server registered when host name specified? Contact the network administrator.
Remote fax a T.38 terminal?
10 Remote fax switched off or busy?
Check whether the remote fax is a T38

terminal.
Check that the remote fax is switched on.
Request the network administrator to increase
the bandwidth.
11 Network bandwidth too narrow?
Raise the delay level.

IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3
IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the DCS
speed. Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to 1.
12 Remote fax cancelled transmission?
Check whether the remote fax cancelled the

transmission.
151
Cannot send via VoIP Gateway

Check Point
Action
VoIP Gateway T.38 standard?
Contact the network administrator.
VoIP Gateway installed correctly?
VoIP Gateway power switched on?
Is the IP address/host name of the specified

Gateway correct?
Number of the specified fax correct?
Check the remote fax number.

IP address of local fax registered?
10 DNS registered when host name specified?
11 Remote fax a G3 fax?
Check that the remote fax is a G3 fax.
12 G3 fax is connected to VoIP gateway?
Check that G3 fax is connected.
13 Remote G3 fax turned on?
Check that G3 fax is switched on.

Request the network administrator to increase
the bandwidth.
Raise the network delay level.

IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the DCS
speed. Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to 1.
Cannot send by Alias Fax number.

Check Point
1
152
Action
Confirm the Alias of the remote fax.
Number of specified Alias fax correct?
Firewall/NAT installed?

Gatekeeper installed correctly?
Gatekeeper power switched on?
IP address/host name of Gatekeeper correct?
DNS server registered when Gatekeeper host

name specified?
Enable H.323 SW is set to on?
Error Code: 13-14
Check the settings.

See User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0
10 IP address of local fax registered?
Register the IP address of the local fax.
11 Alias number of local fax registered?
Register the Alias number of the local fax.
12 Remote fax registered in Gatekeeper?
13 Remote fax a T.38 terminal?
Check whether the remote fax is a T38

terminal.
14 Remote fax switched off or busy?

Request the system administrator to increase
the bandwidth.
Raise the delay level.

Lower the modem transmission baud rate.
IPFAX SW 05

transmission.
153
IP-Fax Reception
Cannot receive by IP Address/Host name.
Check Point
Action
Cannot breach the firewall. Send by using another

method (Fax, Internet Fax)
IP address of local fax registered?
Port number specified at remote sender fax (if

Request the sender to specify the port number.
required)?
Specified port number correct (if required)?
Request the sender to check the port number.

DNS server registered when host name

specified on sender side?
The sender machine displays this error code

if the sender fax is a Ricoh model.
Request the system administrator to increase the
bandwidth.
Network bandwidth too narrow?
Lower the start modem reception baud rate on the

receiving side.
IPFAX SW06
Remote fax cancelled transmission?

transmission.
Cannot receive by VoIP Gateway.

Check Point
Action
Cannot breach the firewall. Request the remote

fax to send by using another method (Fax, Internet
Fax)
154
VoIP Gateway installed correctly?
VoIP Gateway power switched on?
IP address/host name of specified VoIP

Gateway correct on senders side?
Request the remote fax to check the IP address/

host name.
DNS server registered when host name

specified on sender side?
Network bandwidth too narrow?
Request the network administrator to increase the

bandwidth.
G3 fax connected?
Check that G3 fax is connected.
G3 fax power switched on?
Check that G3 fax is switched on.
Cannot receive by Alias Fax number.

Check Point
Action
Cannot the breach firewall. Request the remote fax

to send by using another method (Fax, Internet Fax)
Gatekeeper installed correctly?

when the sender fax is a Ricoh model.
Power to Gatekeeper switched on?
IP address/host name of Gatekeeper correct

on the senders side?

Request the sender to check the IP address/host
name.
155

6
DNS server registered when Gatekeeper host

name specified on senders side?

Request the sender to check the settings.
Enable H.323 SW is set to on?
User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0

Only if the remote sender fax is a Ricoh fax.
Local fax IP address registered?
Local fax Alias number registered?
Register the Alias number.

Request the system administrator to increase the
bandwidth.
Lower the start modem reception baud rate on the

receiving side.
IPFAX SW06

transmission.
12 Local fax registered in Gatekeeper?
156


System Service Mode
SP1-XXX (Bit Switches)
"Bit Switches"
1
Mode No.
Function
System Switch
101
001 032
00 1F
Change the bit switches for system settings for the fax option
(
"Bit Switches")
Ifax Switch
102
001 016
00 0F
Change the bit switches for internet fax settings for the fax
option
(
"Bit Switches")
Printer Switch
103
001 016
00 0F
Change the bit switches for printer settings for the fax option
( "Bit Switches")
Communication Switch
104
001 032
00 1F
Change the bit switches for communication settings for the fax
option
(
"Bit Switches")
G3-1 Switch
105
001 016
00 0F
Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of the standard
G3 board
(
"Bit Switches")
IP fax Switch
111
001 016
00 0F
Change the bit switches for optional IP fax parameters

(
"Bit Switches")
157
SP2-XXX (RAM Data)

2
Mode No.
Function
RAM Read/Write
101
Change RAM data for the fax board directly. (

"Service RAM Addresses")
001
Memory Dump
102
001
G3-1 Memory Dump
Print out RAM data for the fax board.

(
"Service RAM Addresses")
G3-1 NCU Parameters
103
001 023
CC, 01 22
NCU parameter settings for the standard G3 board.

( "NCU Parameters")
SP3-XXX (Tel Line Settings)

3
101
102
Mode No.
Function
Service Station
001
Fax Number
Enter the fax number of the service station.
Serial Number
000
Enter the fax units serial number.
PSTN-1 Port Settings

001
Select Line
002
PSTN Access
Number
Enter the PSTN access number for the
003
Memory Lock
Disabled
If the customer does not want to receive transmissions

using Memory Lock on this line, turn this SP on.
103
158
Select the line type setting for the G3-1 line. If the
machine is installed on a PABX line, select PABX,
PABX(GND) or PABX(FLASH).
G3-1 line.
System Service Mode
IPFAX Port Settings
107
201
001
H323 Port
002
SIP Port
003
RAS Port
004
Gatekeeper port
005
T.38 Port
006
SIP Server Port
007
IPFAX Protocol
Priority
Select "H323" or "SIP".
FAX SW
001 032
00 1F
SP4-XXX (ROM Versions)

4
Mode No.
Function
101
002 007
FCU ROM Version
Displays the FCU ROM version.
102
002 065
Error Codes
Displays the latest 64 fax error codes.
103
002 004
G3-1 ROM Version
Displays the G3-1 modem version.
SP5-XXX (Initializing)
5
Mode No.
Function
Initialize SRAM
101
102
001
Initializes the bit switches and user parameters, user data in the SRAM,
files in the SAF memory, and clock.
Erase All Files

001
Erases all files stored in the SAF memory.
159
103
Reset Bit Switches

001
Resets the bit switches and user parameters.
Factory setting
104
105
Resets the bit switches and user parameters, user data in the SRAM and
files in the SAF memory.
001
Reset All Bit Switches
001
Initializes all the current bit switch settings.
Reset Security Bit Switches

106
Initializes only the security bit switches. If you select automatic output/
display for the user parameter switches, the security settings are
initialized.
001
SP6-XXX (Reports)
6
Mode No.
Function
System Parameter List

101
001
Touch the ON button to print the system parameter

list.
Service Monitor
102
001
Touch the ON button to print the service monitor

report.
G3 Protocol Dump List
103
001
002
160
G3-1 (All
Communications)
Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for

the G3-1 line.
G3-1
Prints the protocol dump list of the last communication

for the G3-1 line.
(1 Communication)
System Service Mode
All Files print out

Prints out all the user files in the SAF memory, including
confidential messages.
105
001
Do not use this function, unless the customer is

having trouble printing confidential messages or
recovering files stored using the memory lock
feature.
Journal Print out

106
001
All Journals
The machine prints all the communication records on

the report.
002
Specified Date
The machine prints all communication records after the

specified date.
Log List Print out
107
001
All log files
002
Printer
003
SC/TRAP Stored
004
Decompression
005
Scanner
006
JOB/SAF
007
Reconstruction
008
JBIG
009
G3CCU
010
Fax Job
011
CCU
012
Scanner Condition
These log print out functions are for designer use only.
161
IP Protocol Dump List

108
001
All Communications
Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for

the IP fax line.
002
1 Communication
Prints the protocol dump list of the last communication

for the IP fax line.
SP7-XXX (Test Modes)

These are the test modes for PTT approval.
7
162
Function
101
G3-1 Modem Tests
102
G3-1 DTMF Tests
103
Ringer Test
104
G3-1 V34 (S2400baud)
105
G3-1 V34 (S2800baud)
106
G3-1 V34 (S3000baud)
107
G3-1 V34 (S3200baud)
108
G3-1 V34 (S3429baud)
109
Message Test
Bit Switches
Bit Switches
Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as Not used, as this may cause the
machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local regulations. Such bits
are for use only in other areas, such as Japan.
Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the System Parameter List printed
by the machine.
System Switches
System Switch 00 [SP No. 1-101-001]

No
FUNCTION
Dedicated transmission parameter

programming
COMMENTS
Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated transmission
parameters.
Reset this bit to 0 after programming dedicated transmission

parameters.
Not used
Do not change
Technical data printout on the

Journal
0: Disabled
1: Instead of the personal name, the following data are

listed on the Journal for each G3 communication.
1: Enabled
163
e.g. 0000 (1) // 32 (2) V34 (3) // 288 (4) // 264 (5) // L0100 (6) 03 (7) 04 (8)
(1): EQM value (Line quality data). A larger number means more errors.
(2): Symbol rate (V.34 only)
(3): Final modem type used
(4): Starting data rate (for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps)
(5): Final data rate
(6): Rx revel (refer to the note after this table for how to read the rx level)
(7): Total number of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
(8): Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
EQM and rx level are fixed at FFFF in tx mode.
The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at 00 for transmission records and ECM
reception records.
Rx level calculation
Example: 0000 // 32 V34 // 288/264 // L 01 00 03 04
The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after L indicates the rx level.
The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N by -16 to get
the rx level.
In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 0100 [H]) is 256.
So, the actual rx level is 256/-16 = -16 dB
3
4
Not used
Do not change this setting.
Line error mark print
When "1" is selected, a line error mark is printed on the

printout if a line error occurs during reception.
0: OFF, 1: ON (print)
G3/G4 communication parameter This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the key parameters
display
(see below). This is normally disabled because it cancels
the CSI display for the user.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
164
Be sure to reset this bit to 0 after testing.
Protocol dump list output after each This is only used for communication troubleshooting. It
shows the content of the transmitted facsimile protocol
communication
signals. Always reset this bit to 0 after finishing testing.
0: Off
If system switch 09 bit 6 is at 1, the list is only printed if
1: On
there was an error during the communication.
Bit Switches
Not used
System Switch 01 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

No
0-1
FUNCTION
Not used
Do not change these settings.
Force after transmission stall

2
0: Off
1: On
3-5
COMMENTS
Not used
With this setting on, the machine resets itself automatically

if a transmission stalls and fails to complete the job.
Memory read/write by RDS

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0
(0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.
Always disabled
User selectable
(0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked out, but the
user can temporarily switch RDS on to allow RDS operations
to take place. RDS will automatically be locked out again
after a certain time, which is stored in System Switch 03.
Note that if an RDS operation takes place, RDS will not
switch off until this time limit has expired.
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1
(1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access the machine.
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1
6-7
User selectable
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0
Always enabled
No
FUNCTION
0-7
Length of time that RDS is

temporarily switched on when bits 6
and 7 of System Switch 02 are set
to User selectable
COMMENTS
00 - 99 hours (BCD).
This setting is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System Switch 02
are set to User selectable.
The default setting is 24 hours.
165
No
0-2
4-7
FUNCTION
Not used
COMMENTS
Printing dedicated tx parameters on 1: Each Quick/Speed dial number on the list is printed with
the dedicated tx parameters (10 bytes each).
Quick/Speed Dial Lists
The first 10 bytes of data are the programmed dedicated
0: Disabled
tx parameters; 34 bytes of data are printed (the other 24
1: Enabled
bytes have no use for service technicians).
Not used
No
FUNCTION
Not used
Inclusion of communications on the

Journal when no image data was
exchanged.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
COMMENTS
Automatic error report printout

Printing of the error code on the
error report
0: Communications that reached phase C (message tx/rx)

of the T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.
1: Communications that reached phase A (call setup) of T.
30 protocol are listed on the Journal. This will include
telephone calls.
0: Error reports will not be printed.
1: Error reports will be printed automatically after failed
communications.
1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.
0: No 1: Yes
4
166
Not used
Bit Switches
Power failure report
1: A power failure report will be automatically printed after

the power is switched on if a fax message disappeared from
the memory when the power was turned off last.
Conditions for printing the protocol

This switch becomes effective only when system switch 00
dump list
bit 6 is set to 1.
0: Print for all communications
1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a protocol dump
1: Print only when there is a
list only for communications with errors.
communication error
Priority given to various types of

remote terminal ID when printing
reports
7
0: RTI > CSI > Dial label > Tel.

Number
1: Dial label > Tel. number > RTI >
CSI
This bit determines which set of priorities the machine uses

when listing remote terminal names on reports.
Dial Label: The name stored, by the user, for the Quick/
Speed Dial number.
System Switch 0A [SP No. 1-101-011]

No
0-3
4
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Not used
Dialing on the ten-key pad

when the external telephone is
off-hook
0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while the external

telephone is off-hook. Use this setting when the external
telephone is not by the machine, or if a wireless telephone
is connected as an external telephone.
1: The user can dial on the machines ten-key pad when

the handset is off-hook.
5
On hook dial
0: On hook dial is disabled.
6-7
Not used
Do not change the factory settings.
System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
167
System Switch 0E [SP No. 1-101-015]

No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0-1
Not used
Do not change the settings.
Not used
This machine does not have the capture function.
Action when the external handset

goes off-hook
0: Manual tx and rx operation
1: Memory tx and rx operation (the
display remains the same)
4-7
Not used
0: Manual tx and rx are possible while the external handset

is off-hook. However, memory tx is not possible.
1: The display stays in standby mode even when the
external handset is used, so that other people can use the
machine for memory tx operation.
Note that manual tx and rx are not possible with this setting.
System Switch 0F [SP No. 1-101-016]

No
168
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Bit Switches
Country/area code for functional settings

(Hex)
0-7
00: France
11: USA
01: Germany
12: Asia
02: UK
13: Japan
03: Italy
14: Hong Kong
04: Austria
15: South Africa
05: Belgium
16: Australia
06: Denmark
17: New Zealand
07: Finland
18: Singapore
08: Ireland
19: Malaysia
Cross reference
09: Norway
1A: China
NCU country code:
0A: Sweden
1B: Taiwan
0B: Switz.
1C: Korea
0C: Portugal
20: Turkey
0D: Holland
21: Greece
0E: Spain
22: Hungary
0F: Israel
23: Czech
10: ---
24: Poland
This country/area code determines the factory

settings of bit switches and RAM addresses.
However, it has no effect on the NCU parameter
settings and communication parameter RAM
addresses.
SP No. 2-103-001 for G3-1

No
0-7
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Threshold = N x 128 KB + 256 KB

Threshold memory level for parallel
N can be between 00 - FF(H)
memory transmission
Default setting: 02(H) = 512 KB
169
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
TTI printing position

0
0: Superimposed on the page data Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints information that the
1: Printed before the data leading customer considers to be important (G3 transmissions).
edge
Not used
Japan Only
2-7
Not used

No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
TTI: 08 to 92 (BCD) mm
Input even numbers only.
0-7
TTI printing position in the main scan This setting determines the print start position for the TTI from
the left edge of the paper. If the TTI is moved too far to the
direction
right, it may overwrite the file number which is on the top
right of the page. On an A4 page, if the TTI is moved over
by more than 50 mm, it may overwrite the page number.
System Switch 13 - Not used (do not change these settings)

No
0
FUNCTION
Not used
1: Disabled
2-3
170
Going into the Energy Saver mode

automatically
0: Enabled
Not used
COMMENTS
1: The machine will restart from the Energy Saver mode

quickly, because the +5V power supply is active even in the
Energy Saver mode.
Bit Switches
Interval for preventing the machine

from entering Energy Saver mode if
there is a pending transmission file.
Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0
If there is a file waiting for transmission, the machine does
not go to Energy Saver mode during the selected period.
After transmitting the file, if there is no file waiting for
transmission, the machine goes to the Energy Saver mode.
1 min
4-5
Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1
30 min1
Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 0
1 hour
Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 1
24 hours
6-7
Not used
Do not change

No
0
FUNCTION
Parallel Broadcasting
0: Disabled
COMMENTS
1: The machine sends messages simultaneously using all
available ports during broadcasting.
1: Enabled
1-7
Not used

No
0-6
FUNCTION
Not used
Special Original mode

7
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
COMMENTS
1: If the customer frequently wishes to transmit a form or

letterhead which has a colored or printed background,
change this bit to 1. Original 1 and Original 2 can be
selected in addition to the Text, Text/Photo and Photo
modes.
171
System Switch 1A - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 1B [SP No. 1-101-028]
In this switch setting, there is a limitation. Do not select the same image quality in two modes.
e.g) these setting combination is not allowed:
[Bit1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Text] [Bit3: 0, Bit 2:0 = Photo/ Diffusion]
[Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 = Text]
No.
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Image Quality in Text mode

0-1
This setting determines the desirable scanning image

quality when the text mode is selected with the
operation panel.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = Text/ Sharp

Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Text
Image Quality in Photo mode

2-3
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = Photo/ Diffusion

Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = Photo/ Dithering

quality when the special original mode is selected with
the operation panel.
Image Quality in Special Original

mode
4-6

quality when the photo mode is selected with the
operation panel.
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Mode
Text
Text/ Sharp
Photo/ Diffusion
Photo/ Dithering
Dropout color
Not used
System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 1D [SP No. 1-101-030]
172
Bit Switches
No
FUNCTION
RTI/CSI/CPS code display
COMMENTS
0: Enable
0: RTI, CSI, CPS codes are displayed on the top line of the
LCD panel during communication.
1: Disable
1: Codes are switched off (no display)
Not used
Destination telephone number

display limitation
0: OFF, 1: ON
4-7
When "1" is selected, the destination telephone number

display is limited and redial is disabled.
Operation selection without PIN

0: When "0" is selected without PIN code registration,
code registered
transmission is interrupted and an alert message shows on
0: Transmission interrupted
the LCD.
1: No interrupted transmission
Not used
System Switch 1E [SP No. 1-101-031]

No
FUNCTION
Communication after the Journal

data storage area has become full
0: Impossible
1: Possible
COMMENTS
0: When this switch is on and the journal history becomes
full, the next report prints. If the journal history is not deleted,
the next transmission cannot be received. This prevents
overwriting communication records before the machine can
print them.
1: If the buffer memory of the communication records for
the Journal is full, fax communications are still possible. But
the machine will overwrite the oldest communication
records.
Note: This setting is effective only when Automatic Journal
printout is enabled but the machine cannot print the report
(e.g., no paper).
Action when the SAF memory has

become full during scanning
0: The current page is erased.
1: The entire file is erased.
0: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning, the

successfully scanned pages are transmitted.
1: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning, the file
is erased and no pages are transmitted.
This bit switch is ignored for parallel memory transmission.
173
RTI/CSI display priority

0: RTI 1: CSI
This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI, is displayed

on the LCD while the machine is communicating in G3 nonstandard mode.
File No. printing

3
0: Enabled
1: File numbers are not printed on any reports.
1: Disabled
If authorized reception is enabled but the user has stored

Action when authorized reception is no acceptable sender RTIs or CSIs, the machine will not be
enabled but authorized RTIs/CSIs able to receive any fax messages.
are not yet programmed
If the customer wishes to receive messages from any sender
0: All fax reception is disabled
1: Faxes can be received if the
sender has an RTI or CSI
that includes an RTI or CSI, and to block messages from

senders that do not include an RTI or CSI, change this bit to
1, then enable Authorized Reception.
Otherwise, keep this bit at 0 (default setting).
5-7
Not used
Do not change the settings
System Switch 1F [SP No. 1-101-032]

No
COMMENTS
Not used
0: When an original jams, or the SAF memory overflows

Report printout after an original jam during scanning, a report will be printed.
during SAF storage or if the SAF
Change this bit to 1 if the customer does not want to have
memory fills up
a report in these cases.
0: Enabled
Memory tx Memory storage report
1: Disabled
Parallel memory tx Transmission result report
Not used
Received fax print start timing
0: The machine prints each page immediately after the

machine receives it.
4-6
174
FUNCTION
(G3 reception)
0: After receiving each page
1: After receiving all pages
1: The machine prints the complete message after the

machine receives all the pages in the memory.
Not used
Bit Switches
0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code other than

SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit automatically resets
Action when a fax SC has occurred itself.
7
1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code, the fax unit
stops.
0: Automatic reset
1: Fax unit stops
Cross Reference
Fax SC codes - See Troubleshooting
I-Fax Switches
I-fax Switch 00 - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-001]
I-fax Switch 01 [SP No. 1-102-002]

FUNCTION
No
Original Line Resolution of TX

Attachment File
200x100 Standard
200x200 Detail
200x400 Fine
300 x 300 Reserve
400 x 400 Super Fine
600 x 600 Reserve
Reserve
COMMENTS
These settings set the maximum resolution of the original that
the destination can receive.
0: Not selected
1: Selected
If more than one of these three bits is set to 1, the higher
resolution has priority. For example, if both Bit 0 and Bit 2
are set to 1 then the resolution is set for "Bit 2 200 x 400.
175
mm/inch
This setting selects mm/inch conversion for mail transmission.
0: Off (No conversion), 1: On (Conversion)
When on (set to 1), the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail. There is no
switch for converting inches to millimeters.
Unlike G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiver to determine the
setting, mail cannot negotiate between terminals; the mm/inch selection is determined by the
sender fax.
7
When this switch is Off (0):

Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
Images scanned in mm are sent in mm.
Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
Images received in mm are transmitted in mm.

When this switch is On (1):
Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
Images scanned in mm are converted to inches.
Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
Images received in mm are converted to inches.
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
RX Text Mail Header Processing

This setting determines whether the header information is printed with text e-mails when they are
received.
0: Prints only text mail.
0
1: Prints mail header information attached to text mail.

When a text mail is received with this switch On (1), the From address and Subject address
are printed as header information.
When a mail with only binary data is received (a TIFF-F file, for example), this setting is ignored
and no header is printed.
176
Bit Switches
Output from Attached Document at E-mail TX Error
This setting determines whether only the first page or all pages of an e-mail attachment are printed
at the sending station when a transmission error occurs. This allows the customer to see which
documents have not reached their intended destinations if sent to the wrong e-mail addresses, for
example.
0: Prints 1st page only.
1: Prints all pages.
Text String for Return Receipt
This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms the transmission
was received normally at the destination.
00: Dispatched
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with dispatched
in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; dispatched

The dispatched string is included in the Subject string.
2-3
01: Displayed
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with displayed
in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; displayed
The displayed string is included in the Subject string.
10: Reserved
11: Reserved
A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to 00 (for dispatched)
received by Microsoft Outlook 2000 may cause an error. If any setting other than
displayed (01) causes a problem, change the setting to 01 to enable normal sending of the
Return Receipt.
Media accept feature
This setting adds or does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail to confirm a
reception.
0: Does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail
1: Adds the media accept feature to the answer mail.
Use this bit switch if a problem occurs when the machine receives an answer mail, which contains
the media accept feature field.
177
5-6
Not Used
Image Resolution of RX Text Mail
This setting determines the image resolution of the received mail.
0: 200 x 200
1: 400 x 400
The 1 setting requires installation of the Function Upgrade Card in order to have enough SAF
(Store and Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x 400 resolution.
I-fax Switch 03 - Not used (do not change the settings) [ SP No. 1-102-004]

No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Subject for Delivery TX/Memory Transfer

This setting determines whether the RTI/CSI registered on this machine or the RTI/CSI of the
originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents.
0
0: Puts the RTI/CSI of the originator in the Subject line. If this is used, either the RTI or CSI is used.
Only one of these can be received for use in the subject line.
1: Puts the RTI/CSI registered on this machine in the Subject line.
When this switch is used to transfer and deliver mail to a PC, the information in the Subject line
that indicates where the transmission originated can be used to determine automatically the
destination folder for each e-mail.
Subject corresponding to mail post database
0: Standard subject
1: Mail post database subject
The standard subject is replaced by the mail post database subject in the following three cases:
1) When the service technician sets the service (software) switch.
2) When memory sending, delivery specified by F code or SMTP reception is done.

3) With relay broadcasting (1st stage without the Schmidt 4 function).
This switch does not apply for condition 3) when the RX system is set up for memory sending,
delivery by F-code, sending with SMTP RX and when operators are using FOL (to prevent
problems when receiving transmissions).
178
Bit Switches
2-7
Not Used

No
0
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients

Determines whether the e-mail addresses of the destinations that receive transmissions
broadcasted using SMTP protocol are recorded in the Journal.
For example:
"1st destination + Total number of destinations: 9" in the Journal indicates a broadcast to 9
destinations.
0: Not recorded
1: Recorded
1
I-Fax Automatic Re-dial Setting

0: OFF
Determines whether the I-fax automatically redials when

an error occurs.
1: ON
2-7
Not used
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Memory Threshold for POP Mail Reception
0-7
This setting determines the amount of SAF (Store and Forward) memory. (SAF stores fax messages
to send later for transmission to more than one location, and also holds incoming messages if they
cannot be printed.) When the amount of SAF memory available falls below this setting, mail can
no longer be received; received mail is then stored on the mail server.
00-FF (0 to 1024 KB: HEX)
The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine the amount of memory.
179

No
0-3
4-7
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Not used
Restrict TX Retries
This setting determines the number of retries when

connection and transmission fails due to errors.
01-F (1-15 Hex)
I-fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-011]
I-fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-012]
I-fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-013]
I-fax Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-014]
I-fax Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-015]
I-fax Switch 0F [SP No. 1-102-016]
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Delivery Method for SMTP RX Files

0
This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered or output
immediately.
0: Off. Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery.
1: On. Files received via SMTP are delivered immediately to their destinations.
1-7
Not used
Printer Switches
Printer Switch 00 [SP No. 1-103-001]
No
180
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Bit Switches
0: If a 2 page RX transmission is split, [*] is printed in the

bottom right corner of the 1st page and only a [2] is printed
in the upper right corner of the 2nd page.
Select page separation marks
0
0: Off
1: If a 2 page RX transmission is split into two pages, for

example, [*] [2] is printed in the bottom right corner of the
1st page and only a [2] is printed in the upper right corner
of the 2nd page.
1: On
This helps the user to identify pages that have been
split because the size of the paper is smaller than the
size of the document received. (When A5 is used to
print an A4 size document, for example.)
Repetition of data when the

received page is longer than the
printer paper
1: Default. 10 mm of the trailing edge of the previous page

are repeated at the top of the next page.
0: Off
0: The next page continues from where the previous page

stopped without any repeated text.
1: On
3-7
Prints the date and time on received This switch is only effective when user parameter 02 - bit 2
(printing the received date and time on received fax
fax messages
messages) is enabled.
0: Disabled
1: The machine prints the received and printed date and
1: Enabled
time at the bottom of each received page.
Not used
Printer Switch 01 - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-103-002]
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
181
1st paper feed station usage for fax 0: The paper feed station can be used to print fax messages
printing
and reports.
0: Enabled
1: The specified paper feed station will not be used for

printing fax messages and reports.
1: Disabled
2nd paper feed station usage for

fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
2-7
Not used
Do not disable usage for a paper feed station which

has been specified by User Parameter Switch 0F (15),
or which is used for the Specified Cassette Selection
feature.

No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0: Incoming pages are printed without length reduction.
1-3
Length reduction of received data
(Page separation threshold: Printer Switch 03, bits 4 to 7)
0: Disabled
1: Incoming page length is reduced when printing.
1: Enabled
(Maximum reducible length: Printer Switches 04, bits 0 to

4)
Not used

Page separation threshold (with reduction disabled with
switch 03-0 above).
4-7
Page separation setting when sub

scan compression is forbidden
For example, if this setting is set to "10", and A4 is the

selected paper size:
00-0F (0-15 mm: Hex)
If the received document is 10 mm or less longer than A4,

then the 10 mm are cut and only 1 page prints.
Default: 6 mm
If the received document is 10 mm longer than A4, then the

document is split into 2 pages.
Printer Switch 04 SP No. 1-103-005
No
182
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Bit Switches
Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03-0 above.
<Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + (N x 5mm)
N is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4.
0-4
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Setting
0 mm
5 mm
20 mm
155 mm
For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper

<Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + 0.75 x (N x 5mm)
Length of the duplicated image on the next page, when page separation has taken place.
Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = 4 mm
5-6
Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = 10 mm
Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = 15 mm
Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = Not used
Not used.
Printer Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)

No
1-7
FUNCTION
Printing while a paper cassette is
pulled out, when the Just Size
Printing feature is enabled.
0: Printing will not start
1: Printing will start if another
cassette has a suitable size of
paper, based on the paper size
selection priority tables.
Not used.
COMMENTS
Cross reference
Just size printing on/off User switch 05, bit 5
183

No
0-3
FUNCTION
Not used.
List of destinations in the

Communication Failure Report for
broadcasting
4
COMMENTS
0: All destinations
1: Only destinations where communication failure occurred

are printed on the Communication Failure Report.
1: Only destinations where

communication failure occurred
5-7
Not used.
Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-103-011]
Printer Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-103-012]
Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-103-013]
Printer Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-103-014]
Printer Switch 0E [SP No. 1-103-015]
No
FUNCTION
Paper size selection priority
0: Width
1: Length
184
COMMENTS
0: A paper size that has the same width as the
received data is selected first.
1: A paper size which has enough length to print all
the received lines without reduction is selected first.
Paper size selected for printing A4 width

This switch determines which paper size is selected
fax data
for printing A4 width fax data, when the machine
0: 8.5" x 11" size
has both A4 and 8.5" x 11" size paper.
1: A4 size
Bit Switches
1: If all paper sizes in the machine require page

separation to print a received fax message, the
machine does not print the message (Substitute
Reception is used).
Page separation
2
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette, the

machine automatically prints the fax message.
Printing the sample image on reports
Same size means the sample image is printed at

100%, even if page separation occurs.
Bit 4: 0, Bit 3: 0 = The upper half only

3-4
Bit 4: 0, Bit 3: 1 = 50% reduction in sub- User Parameter Switch 19 (13H) bit 4 must be set
scan only
to 0 to enable this switch.
Bit 4: 1, Bit 3: 0 = Same size
5-6
Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions for more on

this feature.
Not used
Equalizing the reduction ratio among

separated pages
0: When page separation has taken place, all the

pages are reduced with the same reduction ratio.
(Page Separation)
1: Only the last page is reduced to fit the selected

paper size when page separation has taken place.
Other pages are printed without reduction.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Printer Switch 0F [SP No. 1-103-016]

No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Smoothing feature
Bit 1: 0 Bit 0: 0 = Disabled
0-1
Bit 1: 0 Bit 0: 1 = Disabled

Bit 1: 1 Bit 0: 0 = Enabled
(0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the machine receives

halftone images from other manufacturers fax machines
frequently.
Bit 1: 1 Bit 0: 1 = Not used

2-7
Not used
Communication Switches
Communication Switch 00 [SP No. 1-104-001]
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
185
Compression modes available in

receive mode
Bit 1: 0 Bit 0: 0 = MH only
0-1
Bit 1: 0 Bit 0: 1 = MH/MR

Bit 1: 1 Bit 0: 0 = MH/MR/MMR
These bits determine the compression capabilities to be

declared in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.
Bit 1: 1 Bit 0: 1 = MH/MR/MMR/

JBIG
transmit mode
Bit 3: 0 Bit 2: 0 = MH only
2-3
Bit 3: 0 Bit 2: 1 = MH/MR

Bit 3: 1 Bit 2: 0 = MH/MR/MMR
These bits determine the compression capabilities to be

used in the transmission and to be declared in phase B
(handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.
Bit 3: 1 Bit 2: 1 = MH/MR/MMR/

JBIG
4
Not used
JBIG compression method:

Reception
5
0: Only basic supported

1: Basic and optional both
supported
JBIG compression method:

Transmission
0: Basic mode priority
Change the setting when communication problems occur

using JBIG compression.
Change the setting when communication problems occur

using JBIG compression.
1: Optional mode priority

7
Not used

No
1-5
186
FUNCTION
ECM
0: Off 1: On
Not used
COMMENTS
If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all
communications.
In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression are
switched off automatically.
Bit Switches
Maximum printable page length

available
6-7
Bit 7: 0 Bit 6: 0 = No limit

Bit 7: 0 Bit 6: 1 = B4 (364 mm)
Bit 7: 1 Bit 6: 0 = A4 (297 mm)
The setting determined by these bits is informed to the

transmitting terminal in the pre-message protocol exchange
(in the DIS/NSF frames).
Bit 7: 1 Bit 6: 1 = Not used

No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
If there are more consecutive error lines in the received
page than the threshold, the machine will send a negative
response. The Low and High threshold values depend on
the sub-scan resolution, and are as follows.
G3 Burst error threshold

0: Low 1: High
Acceptable total error line ratio

0: 5% 1: 10%
100 dpi
6(L) 12(H)
200 dpi
12(L) 24(H)
300 dpi
18(L) 36(H)
400 dpi
24(L) 48(H)
If the error line ratio for a page exceeds the acceptable

ratio, RTN will be sent to the other end.
Treatment of pages received with

errors during G3 reception
2
0: Deleted from memory without

printing
0: Pages received with errors are not printed.
1: Printed
4-7
0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN is received.

Hang-up decision when a negative
1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if it receives
code (RTN or PIN) is received
during G3 immediate transmission RTN or PIN.
This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if ECM is
0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up
being used.
Not used
187
No
0-7
FUNCTION
Maximum number of page
retransmissions in a G3 memory
transmission
COMMENTS
00 - FF (Hex) times.
This setting is not used if ECM is switched on.
Default setting - 03(H)
Communication Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)


No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Adjusts the interval of the I-fax dialing.
0-7
I-Fax dial interval setting
The interval of I-fax dialing is calculated by following

formula.
[Interval time = specified value with this switch x 2 sec]
Communication Switch 0A [SP No. 1-104-011]

No
1-7
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Point of resumption of memory

transmission upon redialing
0: The transmission begins from the page where

transmission failed the previous time.
0: From the error page

1: From page 1
1: Transmission begins from the first page, using normal

memory transmission.
Not used
Communication Switch 0B Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 0C Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 0D [SP No. 1-104-014]
188
Bit Switches
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 kbytes
(e.g., 06(H) = 24 kbytes)
0-7
One page is about 24 kbytes.

The available memory threshold,
below which ringing detection (and The machine refers to this setting before each fax reception.
therefore reception into memory) is If the amount of remaining memory is below this threshold,
the machine cannot receive any fax messages.
disabled
If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect ringing
signals and go into receive mode even if there is no memory
available. This will result in communication failure.
Communication Switch 0E [SP No. 1-104-015]

No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s
0-7
Minimum interval between

automatic dialing attempts
(e.g., 06(H) = 12 s)
This value is the minimum time that the machine waits before
it dials the next destination.
Communication Switch 0F Not used (do not change the settings.)

No
0-7
FUNCTION
Memory transmission: Maximum
number of dialing attempts to the
same destination
COMMENTS
01 FE (Hex) times
Communication Switch 11 Not used (do not change the settings.)

No
0-7
FUNCTION
Memory transmission: Interval
between dialing attempts to the
same destination
COMMENTS
01 FF (Hex) minutes
189
Communication Switch 13 Not used (do not change the settings.)

No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0: In immediate transmission, data scanned in inch format
are transmitted without conversion.
Inch-to-mm conversion during

transmission
In memory transmission, data stored in the SAF memory in

mm format are transmitted without conversion.
Note: When storing the scanned data into SAF memory,
the fax unit always converts the data into mm format.
1: The machine converts the scanned data or stored data
in the SAF memory to the format which was specified in the
set-up protocol (DIS/NSF) before transmission.
5
1-5
Not used
Available unit of resolution in which

fax messages are received
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0 = mm
6-7
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1 = inch

Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0 = mm and inch
(default)
For the best performance, do not change the factory

settings.
The setting determined by these bits is informed to the
transmitting terminal in the pre-message protocol exchange
(in the DIS/NSF frames).

Communication Switch 15 Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1B [SP No. 1-104-028]
No
190
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Bit Switches
Extension access code (0 to 7) to

turn V.8 protocol On/Off
0-7
0: On
1: Off
If the PABX does not support V.8/V.34 protocol procedure,

set this bit to 1 to disable V.8.
Example: If 0 is the PSTN access code, set bit 0 to 1.
When the machine detects 0 as the first dialed number,
it automatically disables V.8 protocol. (Alternatively, if 3
is the PSTN access code, set bit 3 to 1.)
Communication Switch 1C [SP No. 1-104-029]

No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0-1
Refer to communication switch 1B.

Extension access code (8 and 9) to
Example: If 8 is the PSTN access code, set bit 0 to 1.
turn V.8 protocol On/Off
When the machine detects 8 as the first dialed number,
0: On
it automatically disables V.8 protocol. (If 9 is the PSTN
1: Off
access code, use bit 1.)
2-7
Not used
Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-1 Switches
G3 Switch 00 [SP No. 1-105-001]
No
0-1
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Monitor speaker during

communication (tx and rx)
(0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through the

communication.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = Disabled
(0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in the T.30

protocol.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Up to Phase B

Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = All the time
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = Reserved
(1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on all through
the communication. Make sure that you reset these bits after
testing.
191
Monitor speaker during memory

transmission
3-7
Not used
1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory

transmission.
G3 Switch 01 [SP No. 1-105-002]

No
0-3
5
5
FUNCTION
Not used
COMMENTS
DIS frame length

0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes
1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will not be
transmitted (set to 1 if there are communication problems
with PC-based faxes which cannot receive the extended
DIS frames).
Not used
Forbid CED/AMsam output

1: On (Forbid output)
Do not change this setting (Default: 0: Off), unless

communication problem is caused by a CED or ANSam
transmission.
Not used
0: Off
G3 Switch 02 [SP No. 1-105-003]

No
FUNCTION
G3 protocol mode used
1-6
7
0: Standard and non-standard
COMMENTS
Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can only
communicate with machines that send T.30-standard
frames only.
1: Standard only
1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in nonstandard mode communication)
Not used
Short preamble
Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile Manual for

details about Short Preamble.
G3 Switch 03 [SP No. 1-105-004]

No
192
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Bit Switches
DIS detection number

0
(Echo countermeasure)
0: 1
1: 2
1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the second
DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
Not Used

0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.
V.8 protocol
2
0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same DIS frame

twice.
Note:
0: Disabled
Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always bad

enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbps or lower.
1: Enabled
ECM frame size
3
0: 256 bytes
Keep this bit at 0 in most cases.
1: 64 bytes
0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS) mode,

the machine sends a CTC to drop back the modem rate after
receiving a PPR, if the following condition is met in
communications at 14.4, 12.0, 9.6, and 7.2 kbps.
CTC transmission conditions
4
0: After one PPR signal received

1: After four PPR signals received
(ITU-T standard)
NTransmit- Number of transmitted frames

NResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted
1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to drop
back the modem rate after receiving four PPRs.
PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.
This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.
Modem rate used for the next page

1: The machines tx modem rate will fall back before
after receiving a negative code
sending the next page if a negative code is received. This
(RTN or PIN)
bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
0: No change 1: Fallback
Not Used
193
Select detection of reverse polarity

in ringing
0: Off
This switch is used to prevent reverse polarity in ringing on

the phone line (applied to PSTN-G3 ringing). Do not
change this setting
0: No detection
1: On
1: Detection
Outside Japan
Inside Japan only
G3 Switch 04 [SP No. 1-105-005]

No
0-3
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Training error detection threshold 0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits

If the number of error bits in the received TCF is below this
threshold, the machine informs the sender that training has
succeeded.
4-7
Not used
G3 Switch 05 [SP No. 1-105-006]

No
194
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Bit Switches
Initial Tx modem rate
0-3
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
bps
2.4k
4.8k
7.2k
9.6k
12.0k
14.4k
16.8k
19.2k
21.6k
24.0k
26.4k
28.8k
31.2k
33.6k
These bits set the initial starting modem rate for

transmission.
Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you need
to change this for specific receivers.
If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8
protocol should be disabled manually.
Cross reference
V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
Other settings - Not used

Initial modem type for 9.6 k or 7.2
kbps.
4-5
Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 = V.29

Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1 = V.17
These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2 kbps,
if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.
Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 0 = V.34

6-7
Not used
G3 Switch 06 [SP No. 1-105-007]

No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
195
Initial Rx modem rate
0-3
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
bps
2.4k
4.8k
7.2k
9.6k
12.0k
14.4k
16.8k
19.2k
21.6k
24.0k
26.4k
28.8k
31.2k
33.6k
These bits set the initial starting modem rate for

reception.
Use a lower setting if high speeds pose
problems during reception.
If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is
selected, V.8 protocol should be disabled
manually.
Cross reference:
196
Bit Switches
Modem types available for reception
4-7
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Setting
V.27ter
V.27ter, V.
29
V.27ter, V.
29, V.33
V.27ter, V.
29, V.17/
V.33
The setting of these bits is used to inform the

transmitting terminal of the available modem
type for the machine in receive mode.
If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be
disabled manually.
Cross reference:
V.27ter, V.
29, V.17/
V33, V.34

G3 Switch 07 [SP No. 1-105-008]
No
FUNCTION
PSTN cable equalizer

(tx mode: Internal)
0-1
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = None
COMMENTS
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies
because of the length of wire between the modem and the
telephone exchange.
Use the dedicated transmission parameters for specific
receivers.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Low
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the

following symptoms occurs.
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = Medium
Communication error
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = High
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.

This setting is not effective in V.34 communications.
197

(rx mode: Internal)
2-3
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = None

Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = Low
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 0 = Medium
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 1 = High
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies

because of the length of wire between the modem and the
telephone exchange.
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the
following symptoms occurs.
Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.
This setting is not effective in V.34 communicatio
(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)

0: Disabled
Keep this bit at 1.
1: Enabled
5
Not used
Parameter selection for dial tone 0: This uses the fixed table in the ROM for dial tone detection.
detection
1: This uses the specific parameter adjusted with SRAM
0: Normal parameter
(69ECBEH - 69ECDEH). Select this if the dial tone cannot be
detected when the "Normal parameter: 0" is selected.
1: Specific parameter
Not used
G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3 Switch 0A [SP No. 1-105-011]
No
198
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Bit Switches
Maximum allowable carrier drop

during image data reception
0-1
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 200
These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop time.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = 400
Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is frequent.
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = 800

Select cancellation of high-speed RX

if carrier signal lost while receiving This switch setting determines if high-speed receiving
ends if the carrier signal is lost when receiving during
0: Off
non-ECM mode
1: On
Not used
Maximum allowable frame interval

during image data reception.
This bit set the maximum interval between EOL (end-ofline) signals and the maximum interval between ECM
frames from the other end.
0: 5 s 1: 13 s
5
Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is frequent.
Not used
When the sending terminal is controlled by a computer,

there may be a delay in receiving page data after the
local machine accepts set-up data and sends CFR. This
Reconstruction time for the first line in is outside the T.30 recommendation. But, if this delay
occurs, set this bit to 1 to give the sending machine more
receive mode
time to send data.
0: 6 s 1: 12 s
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should come
within 5 s of CFR.
Not used
G3 Switch 0B Not used (do not change the settings).

G3 Switch 0C Not used (do not change the settings).
G3 Switch 0D Not used (do not change the settings).
G3 Switch 0E [SP No 1-105-015]
199
Set CNG send time interval

Some machines on the receiving side may not be able to automatically switch the 3-second CNG
interval.
0-7
3000-2250ms: 3000-50xNms
High order bit
3000 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) < N < FF (2250 ms)

00-0E(3000-3700ms: 3000+50xNms
Low order bit
3000 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) < N < 0F (3700 ms)
G3 Switch 0F [SP No. 1-105-016]

No
FUNCTION
Alarm when an error occurred in
Phase C or later
0: Disabled
COMMENTS
If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each error

communication, change this bit to 1.
1: Enabled
2-3
Alarm when the handset is off-hook

If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the handset is offat the end of communication
hook at the end of fax communication, change this bit to
0: Disabled
1.
1: Enabled
Not used
Sidaa manual calibration setting

4
0: Off
1: On
5-6
Not used
1: manually calibrates for communication with a line,

whose current change occurs such as an optical fiber line.
IP Fax Switches
IP Fax Switch 00 [SP No. 1-111-001]
No.
0
200
FUNCTION
Not used
COMMENTS
Bit Switches
IP Fax Transport
Selects TCP or UDP protocol for IP-Fax
0: TCP, 1: UDP
IP Fax single port selection
0: OFF, 1: ON (enable)
IP Fax double ports (single data port)
selection
Selects single data port.
Selects whether IP-Fax uses a double port.
4
IP Fax Gatekeeper
IP Fax T30 bit signal reverse
0: LSB first, 1: MSB first
IP Fax max bit rate setting
0: Not affected, 1: Affected
IP Fax received telephone number

confirmation
0: No confirmation,
1: Confirmation
Enables/disables the communication via the

gatekeeper for IP-Fax.
Reverses the T30 bit signal.
When "0" is selected, the max bit rate does not affect
the value of the DIS/DCS.
When "1" is selected, the max bit rate affects the

value of the DIS/DCS.
When "0" is selected, fax data is received without
checking the telephone number.
When "1" is selected, fax data is received only when
confirming that the telephone number from the
sender matches the registered telephone number in
this machine. If this confirmation fails, the line is
disconnected.
IP-Fax Switch 01
No.
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
201
Select IP FAX Delay Level
0-3
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Setting
Level 0
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Raise the level by selecting a higher setting if too

many transmission errors are occurring on the
network.
If TCP/UDP is enabled on the network, raise this
setting on the T.30 machine. Increasing the delay
time allows the recovery of more lost packets.
If only UDP is enabled, increase the number of
redundant packets.
Level 1 to 2: 3 Redundant packets
Level 3: 4 Redundant packets
Selects the preamble wait time.
[00 to 0f]
4-7
IP Fax preamble wait time setting
There are 16 values in this 4-bit binary switch

combination.
Waiting time: set value level x 100 ms
Max: 0f (1500 ms) Min: 00 (No wait time)
The default is "0000" (00H).

No.
FUNCTION
IP Fax bit signal reverse setting

0
0: Maker code setting

1: Internal bit switch setting
COMMENTS
When "0" is selected, the bit signal reverse method
is decided by the maker code.
When "1" is selected, the bit signal reverse method
is decided by the internal bit switch.
(When communicating between IP Fax devices, LSB
first is selected.)
IP Fax transmission speed setting

1
0: Modem speed
Selects the transmit speed for IP Fax communication.
1: No limitation
SIP transport setting
2
0: TCP
1: UDP
202
This bit switch sets the transport that has priority for
receiving IP Fax data.
This function is activated only when the sender has
both TCP and UDP.
Bit Switches
CCM connection
3
6-7
1: CCM connection
When "1" is selected, only the connection call

message with H.323 or no tunneled H.245 is
transmitted via CCM.
Message reception selection from nonregistered SIP server
0: This answers the INVITE message from the SIP

server not registered for the machine.
0: Answer
1: Not answer
1: This does not receive the INVITE message from the

SIP server not registered for the machine and send a
refusal message.
ECM communication setting
0: This does not limit the type of the image

compression with ECM communication.
0: No CCM connection
0: No limit for image compression

1: Limit for image compression
1: When the other end machine is Ciscco, this permits

the image compression other than JBIG or MMR with
ECM communication.
Not used

No.
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Effective field limitation for G3 standard

Limits the effective field for standard G3 function
function information
information.
0: OFF, 1: 4byte (DIS)
Switching between G3 standard and
G3 non standard
0: Enable switching
Enables/disables switching between G3 standard

and G3 non-standard.
1: G3 standard only
2
3
Not used.
ECM frame size selection at transmitting

0: 256byte, 1: 64byte
DIS detection times for echo prevention
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times
Selects the ECM frame size for sending.
Sets the number of times for DIS to detect echoes.
203
CTC transmission selection

5
0: PPRx1
When "1" is selected, the transmission condition is

based on the ITU-T method.
1: PPRx4
Shift down setting at receiving negative

code
0: OFF, 1: ON
When "0" is selected, the transmission condition is

decided by error frame numbers.
Not used
Selects whether to shift down when negative codes

are received.

No.
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
0
1
2
Sets the TCF error threshold level.

TCF error threshold
[00 to 0f]
The default is "1111" (0fH).
3
4-7
Not used

No.
204
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Bit Switches
Modem bit rate setting for transmission

Sets the modem bit rate for transmission. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).
0-3
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
2400 bps
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
12.0 Kbps
14.4 Kbps
16.8 Kbps
19.2 Kbps
21.6 Kbps
24.0 Kbps
26.4 Kbps
28.8 Kbps
31.2 Kbps
33.6 Kbps
Modem setting for transmission

Sets the modem for transmission.
The default is "00" (V29).
4-5
Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 = V29

Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1 = V17
Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 0 = V34*
*V34 is not supported for IP-Fax communication.
6-7
Not used
205
No.
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Modem bit rate setting for reception

Sets the modem bit rate for reception. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).
206
0-3
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
2400 bps
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
12.0 Kbps
14.4 Kbps
16.8 Kbps
19.2 Kbps
21.6 Kbps
24.0 Kbps
26.4 Kbps
28.8 Kbps
31.2 Kbps
33.6 Kbps
Bit Switches
Modem setting for reception

Sets the modem type for reception. The default is "0100" (V27ter, V29, V17).
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
V27ter
V27ter, V29
V27ter, V29, V33

(invalid)
V27ter, V29, V17
V27ter, V29, V17,

V34*
4-7
*V34 is not supported for IP-Fax communication.

No.
0
FUNCTION
TSI information
0: Not added, 1: Added
COMMENTS
Adds or does not add TSI information to NSS(S).
DCN transmission setting at T1 timeout

1
0: Not transmitted,
Transmits or does not transmit DCN at T1 timeout.
1: Transmitted
2
Not used
Hang up setting at DIS reception

disabled
0: No hang up
Sets whether the machine disconnects after DIS

reception.
1: Hang up after transmitting DCN

4
Number of times for training

0: 1 time, 1: 2 times
Selects the number of times training is done at the

same bit rate.
Space CSI transmission setting at no CSI

When "0" is selected, frame data is enabled.
registration
When "1" is selected, the transmitted data is all
0: Not transmitted,
spaces.
1: Transmitted
207
6-7
Not used

No.
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
T1 timer adjustment
Adjusts the T1 timer.
The default is "00" (35 seconds).
0-1
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 35 sec
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = 40 sec

Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = 50 sec
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = 60 sec
T4 timer adjustment
Adjust the T4 timer.
2-3
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = 3 sec
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = 3.5 sec

Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 0 = 4 sec
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 1 = 5 sec
Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 0 = 180 sec
Adjusts the fail safe timer. This timer sets the interval
between "setup" data transmission and T.38 phase
decision. If your destination return is late on the
network or G3 fax return is late, adjust the longer
interval timer.
Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 1 = 240 sec
Not used
T0 timer adjustment
Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 = 75 sec
4-5
6-7
208
Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1 = 120 sec
NCU Parameters
NCU Parameters
The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units that the machine
uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The factory settings for each country are also
given. Most of these must be changed by RAM read/write (SP2-102), but some can be changed
using NCU Parameter programming (SP2-103); if SP2-103 can be used, this will be indicated in the
Remarks column. The RAM is programmed in hex code unless (BCD) is included in the Unit column.
209
Address
Function
Country/Area code for NCU parameters
Use the Hex value to program the country/area code directly into this address, or use
the decimal value to program it using SP2-103-001
Country
Decimal
Hex
France
00
00
Germany
01
UK
Decimal
Hex
USA
17
11
01
Asia
18
12
02
02
Hong Kong
20
14
Italy
03
03
South Africa
21
15
Austria
04
04
Australia
22
16
Belgium
05
05
New Zealand
26
17
Denmark
06
06
Singapore
24
18
Finland
07
07
Malaysia
25
19
Ireland
08
08
China
26
1A
Norway
09
09
Taiwan
27
1B
Sweden
10
0A
Korea
28
1C
Switzerland
11
0B
Turkey
32
20
Portugal
12
0C
Greece
33
21
Holland
13
0D
Hungary
34
22
Spain
14
0E
Czech
35
23
Israel
15
0F
Poland
36
24
Unit
Remarks
/Area
5
680500
Address
210
Country
Function
680501
Line current detection time
680502
Line current wait time
680503
Line current drop detect time
/Area
20 ms
Line current detection is

disabled.
Line current is not detected if
680501 contains FF.
NCU Parameters
Address
680504
Function
PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit
(high byte)
680505
PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit

(low byte)
680506
PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit

(high byte)
Unit
Remarks
Hz (BCD)
If both addresses contain FF

(H), tone detection is
disabled.
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
680507
PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit

(low byte)
680508
PSTN dial tone detection time
680509
PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW)
68050A
PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH)
68050B
PSTN dial tone continuous tone time
68050C
PSTN dial tone permissible drop time
68050D
PSTN wait interval (LOW)
68050E
PSTN wait interval (HIGH)
68050F
PSTN ring-back tone detection time
20 ms
Detection is disabled if this

contains FF.
680510
PSTN ring-back tone off detection time
20 ms
680511
PSTN detection time for silent period

after ring-back tone detected (LOW)
20 ms
680512
PSTN detection time for silent period

after ring-back tone detected (HIGH)
20 ms
680513
PSTN busy tone frequency upper limit

(high byte)
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
680514
PSTN busy tone frequency upper limit

(low byte)
20 ms
If 680508 contains FF(H),

the machine pauses for the
pause time (address
68050D / 68050E).
Italy: See Note 2.
211
Address
680515
212
Function
PSTN busy tone frequency lower limit
(high byte)
680516
PSTN busy tone frequency lower limit

(low byte)
680517
PABX dial tone frequency upper limit

(high byte)
680518
PABX dial tone frequency upper limit

(low byte)
680519
PABX dial tone frequency lower limit

(high byte)
Unit
Remarks
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
68051A
PABX dial tone frequency lower limit

(low byte)
68051B
PABX dial tone detection time
68051C
PABX dial tone reset time (LOW)
68051D
PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH)
68051E
PABX dial tone continuous tone time
68051F
PABX dial tone permissible drop time
680520
PABX wait interval (LOW)
680521
PABX wait interval (HIGH)
680522
PABX ringback tone detection time
20 ms
680523
PABX ringback tone off detection time
20 ms
680524
PABX detection time for silent period

after ringback tone detected (LOW)
20 ms
680525
PABX detection time for silent period

after ringback tone detected (HIGH)
20 ms
20 ms
If 68051B contains FF, the

machine pauses for the
pause time (680520 /
680521).

disabled.
disabled.
NCU Parameters
Address
680526
Function
PABX busy tone frequency upper limit
(high byte)
680527
PABX busy tone frequency upper limit

(low byte)
680528
PABX busy tone frequency lower limit

(high byte)
680529
PABX busy tone frequency lower limit

(low byte)
68052A
Busy tone ON time: range 1
68052B
Busy tone OFF time: range 1
68052C
68052D
68052E
68052F
680530
680531
680532
Busy tone continuous tone detection time
Unit
Remarks
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
20 ms
20 ms
Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cycles required for
detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or OFF-ON-OFF must be
detected twice).
Tolerance ()
680533
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 75% Bits 2 and 3 must always be kept at 0.

Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 50% Bits 2 and 3 must always be kept at 0.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 25%
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 12.5%
Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detection
213
Address
680534
214
Function
International dial tone frequency upper
limit (high byte)
680535
International dial tone frequency upper

limit (low byte)
680536
International dial tone frequency lower

limit (high byte)
680537
International dial tone frequency lower

limit (low byte)
680538
International dial tone detection time
680539
International dial tone reset time (LOW)
68053A
International dial tone reset time (HIGH)
68053B
International dial tone continuous tone

time
68053C
International dial tone permissible drop

time
68053D
International dial wait interval (LOW)
68053E
International dial wait interval (HIGH)
68053F
Country dial tone upper frequency limit

(HIGH)
680540
Country dial tone upper frequency limit

(LOW)
680541
Country dial tone lower frequency limit

(HIGH)
680542
Country dial tone lower frequency limit

(LOW)
680543
Country dial tone detection time
680544
Country dial tone reset time (LOW)
680545
Country dial tone reset time (HIGH)
680546
Country dial tone continuous tone time
Unit
Remarks
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
Hz (BCD)

disabled.
20 ms
If 680538 contains FF, the

pause time (68053D /
68053E).
Belgium: See Note 2.

disabled.
Hz (BCD)
disabled.
20 ms
If 680543 contains FF, the

pause time (680548 /
680549).
NCU Parameters
Address
Function
Unit
680547
Country dial tone permissible drop time
680548
Country dial wait interval (LOW)
680549
Country dial wait interval (HIGH)
68054A
Time between opening or closing the DO

1 ms
relay and opening the OHDI relay
20 ms
Remarks
See Notes 3, 6 and 8.

SP2-103-012 (parameter
11).
See Note 3.
68054B
Break time for pulse dialing
1 ms
12).
See Note 3.
68054C
Make time for pulse dialing
1 ms
13).
See Notes 3, 6 and 8.

68054D
68054E
Time between final OHDI relay closure

and DO relay opening or closing
Minimum pause between dialed digits

(pulse dial mode)
1 ms
14).
This parameter is only valid
in Europe.
20 ms
See Note 3 and 8.

15).
68054F
Time waited when a pause is entered at

the operation panel
16). See Note 3.
680550
DTMF tone on time
17).
1 ms
680551
DTMF tone off time
680552
Tone attenuation level of DTMF signals

while dialing
18).
-N x 0.5 3.5 19).
dBm
See Note 5.
215
Address
Function
Unit
Remarks
20).
680553
Tone attenuation value difference

between high frequency tone and low
frequency tone in DTMF signals
-dBm x 0.5
The setting must be less than

5dBm, and should not
exceed the setting at
680552h above.
See Note 5.
680554
PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation level after -N x 0.5 3.5 SP2-103-022 (parameter
dialling
dBm
21). See Note 5.
680555
ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation level after

-dBm x 0.5
dialling
See Note 5
680556
Not used
680557
Time between 68054Dh (NCU

parameter 14) and 68054Eh (NCU
parameter 15)
1 ms
This parameter takes effect

when the country code is set
to France.
680558
Not used
680559
Grounding time (ground start mode)
20 ms
The Gs relay is closed for this

interval.
68055A
Break time (flash start mode)
1 ms
The OHDI relay is open for

this interval.
68055B
International dial access code (High)
68055C
International dial access code (Low)
68055D
PSTN access pause time
For a code of 100:

BCD
68055B - F1
68055C - 00
20 ms
This time is waited for each

pause input after the PSTN
access code. If this address
contains FF[H], the pause
time stored in address
68054F is used.
Do not set a number more
than 7 in the UK.
216
NCU Parameters
Address
Function
Unit
Remarks
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = -25.0 dBm

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = -35.0 dBm
68055E
Progress tone detection level, and

cadence detection enable flags
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = -30.0 dBm

Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = -40.0 dBm
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = -49.0 dBm
Bits 2, 0 - See Note 2.
68055F
To
Not used
Long distance call prefix (HIGH)
BCD
For a code of 0:
680564
680565
680566
Long distance call prefix (LOW)
BCD
Not used
680565 FF
680566 - FF
680567
to
680571
680572
Acceptable ringing signal frequency:

range 1, upper limit
02).
680573

range 1, lower limit
03).
680574

range 2, upper limit
680575

range 2, lower limit
05).
Number of rings until a call is detected
06).
680576
1000/ N
(Hz).
04).
The setting must not be zero.

See Note 4.
680577
Minimum required length of the first ring 20 ms
07).
217
Address
Function
Unit
Remarks
680578
Minimum required length of the second

and subsequent rings
680579
Ringing signal detection reset time

(LOW)
68057A
Ringing signal detection reset time

(HIGH)
68057B
to
680580
Not used
680581
Interval between dialing the last digit

and switching the Oh relay over to the
external telephone when dialing from
the operation panel in handset mode.
20 ms
Factory setting: 500 ms
20 ms
20 ms
08).
09).
10).
Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection time

Bit 1:0, Bit 0: 0 = 200 ms
Bit 1:0, Bit 0: 1 = 800 ms
Other Not used
680582
Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection time
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = 200 ms

Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = 800 ms
Other Not used
Bits 4 to 7 - Not used
680583
To
Not used
BCD (Hz)

disabled.
6805A0
6805A1
6805A2
218
Acceptable CED detection frequency

upper limit (high byte)
upper limit (low byte)
NCU Parameters
Address
6805A3
Function
lower limit (high byte)
6805A4

lower limit (low byte)
6805A5
CED detection time
6805A6
Acceptable CNG detection frequency

upper limit (high byte)
6805A7

upper limit (low byte)
6805A8

lower limit (high byte)
6805A9

lower limit (low byte)
6805AA
Unit
BCD (Hz)
Remarks
disabled.
20 ms 20 ms Factory setting: 200 ms
BCD (Hz)

disabled.
BCD (Hz)

disabled.
Not used
6805AB
CNG on time
20 ms
6805AC
CNG off time
20 ms
6805AD
Number of CNG cycles required for

detection
The data is coded in the same

way as address 680533.
6805AE
Not used
6805AF
Acceptable AI short protocol tone

(800Hz) detection frequency upper limit
(high byte)
Hz (BCD)
6805B0

(800Hz) detection frequency upper limit
(low byte)

disabled.
6805B1

(800Hz) detection frequency lower limit
(high byte)
Hz(BCD)

disabled.
6805B2

(800Hz) detection frequency lower limit
(low byte)
219
Address
Function
Unit
Remarks
6805B3
Detection time for 800 Hz AI short

protocol tone
20 ms
6805B4
PSTN: Tx level from the modem
-N 3 dBm
01).
6805B5
PSTN: 1100 Hz tone transmission level
6805B6
PSTN: 2100 Hz tone transmission level
6805B7
PABX: Tx level from the modem
- dBm
6805B8
PABX: 1100 Hz tone transmission level
- N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B8 (dB)
6805B9
PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmission level
- N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B9 (dB)
6805BD
Modem turn-on level (incoming signal

detection level)
-37-0.5N
(dBm)
6805BE to
6805C6
Not used
- N 6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B5 3.5 (dB)

See Note 7.
- N6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B6 3 (dB)
See Note 7.
Bits 0 to 3 Not used

6805C7
Bit 4 = V.34 protocol dump 0: Simple, 1: Detailed (default)

Bits 5 to 7 Not used.
6805C8 to
6805D9
Not used
6805DA
T.30 T1 timer
1s
6805E0 bit
3
220
Maximum wait time for post message
0: 12 s
1: 30 s
1: Maximum wait time for

post message (EOP/EOM/
MPS) can be changed to 30
s.
Change this bit to "1" if
communication errors occur
frequently during V.17
reception.
NCU Parameters
Address
Function
Unit
Bit 2
6805E4
6805E5
Bit 2 sets the level of the

call signal, Bit 3 sets the
call signal impedance
Bit 0 sets the ring

detection method, Bit 1
sets the ring detection
method when fixed.
Bit 3
Bit 0
Bit 1
RT=0 (Low)
RT=1 (High)
RZ=0 (High)
RZ=1
(Composite)
Auto
Fixed
Use RDTP
Use RDTN
Remarks
If any setting is changed,

select a setting that is higher
than the default setting.
Bits 2 to 7: Not used
NOTES
1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.
2. Italy and Belgium only
RAM address 68055E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.
Bit 2 - 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)
Bit 1 - Not used
Bit 0 - 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)
If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses are changed.
680508 (if bit 0 = 1) or 680538 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off state
duration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address 680533.
68050B (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
68050C (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053C (if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68054A to 68054F) are the values for 10 pps. If 20 pps is used,
the machine automatically compensates.
4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the time specified by this parameter.
5. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.
The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:
High frequency tone:
0.5 x N680552/6805543.5 dBm
221
0.5 x N680555 dBm

Low frequency tone:
0.5 x (N680552/680554 + N680553) 3.5 dBm
0.5 x (N680555 + N680553) dBm
N680552, for example, means the value stored in address 680552(H)
6. 68054A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Ds closing and Di opening
68054D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Ds opening and Di closing
7. Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz (e.g., 800Hz tone for AI short protocol) refer to
the setting at 6805B5h. Tones which frequency is higher than 1500Hz refer to the setting at 6805B6h.
8. 68054A, 68054D, 68054E: The actual inter-digit pause (pulse dial mode) is the sum of the period
specified by the RAM addresses 68054A, 68054D, and 68054E.
222
Dedicated Transmission Parameters

There are two sets of transmission parameters: Fax and E-mail
Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmable parameters allocated to it.
If transmissions to a particular machine often experience problems, store that terminals fax number as a
Quick Dial or Speed Dial, and adjust the parameters allocated to that number.
The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the eight bytes will be described.
Programming Procedure
1. Set the bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 1.
2. Enter Address Book Management mode ([User Tools]> System Settings> Administrator Tools >
Address Book Management).
3. Select the address book that you want to program.
4. Press the "Dest." Key to enter the fax and e-mail parameter settings.
5. For the fax parameter, select "Fax Settings", for the E-mail parameter, select "E-mail Settings".
6. Press the "OK" key, and then press "Start" key. Make sure that the LED of the Start button lights green.
7. The settings for the switch 00 are now displayed. Press the bit number that you wish to change.
8. To scroll through the parameter switches, either:
9. Select the next switch: press "Next" or Select the previous switch: "Prev." until the correct switch is
displayed. Then go back to step 6.
10. After the setting is changed, press "OK" key.
11. After finishing, reset bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 0.
Parameters
Fax Parameters
The initial settings of the following fax parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters are disabled.
Switch 00
FUNCTION AND COMMENTS
223
ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)

If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting, adjust this byte.
The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1 second.
Range:
0 to 120 s (00h to 78h)
FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.
Do not program a value between 79h and FEh.
Switch 01
No
COMMENTS
Tx level
0-4
224
FUNCTION
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
15
Disabled
If communication with a particular remote

terminal often contains errors, the signal
level may be inappropriate. Adjust the Tx
level for communications with that
terminal until the results are better.
If the setting is "Disabled", the NCU
parameter 01 setting is used.
Do not use settings other than listed
on the left.
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss

at higher frequencies because of the
length of wire between the modem and
the telephone exchange when calling the
number stored in this Quick/Speed Dial.
Cable equalizer
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = None
5-7
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = Low

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = Medium
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = High
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = Disabled
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one

or more of the following symptoms
occurs.
Communication error with error codes
such as 0-20, 0-23, etc.
Do not use settings other than listed
on the left.
If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch
setting is used.
Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
225
Initial Tx modem rate
0-3
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
bps
Not used
2400
4800
7200
9600
12000
14400
16800
19200
21600
24000
26400
28800
31200
33600
Disabled
If training with a particular remote terminal always

takes too long, the initial modem rate may be too
high. Reduce the initial Tx modem rate using these
bits.
For the settings 14.4 or kbps slower, Switch 04 bit
4 must be changed to 0.
Do not use settings other than listed on the
left. If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch
setting is used.
Other settings: Not used

4-7
Not used
Switch 03
No
226
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Inch-mm conversion before tx
0-1
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Inch only
The machine uses inch-based resolutions for scanning. If

"inch only" is selected, the printed copy may be slightly
distorted at the other end if that machine uses mm-based
resolutions.
If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is used.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = Inch-mm

conversion available

DIS/NSF detection method
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = Second DIS or
NSF
(0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line are interfering
with the set-up protocol at the start of transmission. The
machine will then wait for the second DIS or NSF before
sending DCS or NSS.
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = First DIS or NSF

2-3
0: Off
If transmissions to a specific destination always end at a

lower modem rate (14,400 bps or lower), disable V.8
protocol so as not to use V.34 protocol.
1: Disabled
0: V.34 communication will not be possible.
V.8 protocol
4

transmit mode
0: MH only
1: Disabled
ECM during transmission
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0 = Off
6-7
This bit determines the capabilities that are informed to the

other terminal during transmission.
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1 = On
For example, if ECM is switched on but is not wanted when

sending to a particular terminal, use the (0, 0) setting.
V.8/V.34 protocol and JBIG compression are
automatically disabled if ECM is disabled.
Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)

227

E-mail Parameters
The initial settings of the following e-mail parameters are all "0" (all parameters disabled).
Switch 00
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
MH Compression mode for email attachments

Switches MH compression on and off for files attached to e0: Off
mails for sending.
1: On
MR Compression mode for email attachments

Switches MR compression on and off for files attached to e0: Off
mails for sending.
1: On
MMR Compression mode for

e-mail attachments
Switches MMR compression on and off for files attached to
0: Off
e-mails for sending.
1: On
3-6
Not used
Designates the bits to

reference for compression
The "0" selection (default) references the settings for Bits 00,
method of e-mail attachments 01, 02 above. The "1" selection ignores the selections of Bits
00, 01, 02.
0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6)
1: No registration.
Switch 01
No
228
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Original width of e-mail

attachment: A4
0: Off
Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as A4.
1: On

attachment: B4
0: Off
Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as B4.
1: On

attachment: A3
0: Off
Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as A3.
1: On
3-6
Not used

reference for original size of
e-mail attachments
01, 02 above. The "1" selection ignores the selections of Bits
00, 01, 02.
1: No registration.
Switch 02
No
FUNCTION
Line resolution of e-mail
attachment: 200 x 100
0: Off
COMMENTS
Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as 200 x100.
1: On

0: Off
Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as 200 x 200.
1: On
229

0: Off
1: On
3
Not used

0: Off
1: On
5-6
5
7
Not used

reference for original size of
e-mail attachments
01, 02, 04 above. The "1" selection ignores the selections of
Bits 00, 01, 02, 04.
1: No registration.
Switch 04
No
FUNCTION
Full mode address selection

0
0: Full mode address

1: No full mode (simple mode)
COMMENTS
If the other ends have the addresses, which have the full mode
function flag ("0"), this machine determines them as full mode
standard machines.
This machine attaches the "demand of reception
confirmation" to a message when transmitting.
This machine updates the reception capability to the
address book when receiving.
1-7
Not used
Switch 05
No
230
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Directr transmission selection

to SMTP server
0: ON
Allows or does not allow the direct transmission to SMTP

server.
1: OFF
1-7
Not used

231
Service RAM Addresses

Do not change the settings which are marked as "Not used" or "Read only."
680000(H) - Machine code
680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only)
680001(H) - Revision number (BCD)
680002(H) - Year (BCD)
680003(H) - Month (BCD)
680004(H) - Day (BCD)
680005(H) - Machine code 2 (check ram2)
680006 to 680015(H) - Machine's serial number (16 digits - ASCII)

680016(H) - Language code
Bit0: Japanese, Bit1: English (UK), Bit2: English (USA), Bit3: French,
Bit4: German, Bit5: Spanish, Bit6: Italian, Bit7: Dutch, Bit8: Swedish,
Bit9: Norwegian, Bit10: Danish, Bit11: Finnish, Bit12: Czech,
Bit13: Hungarian, Bit14: Polish, Bit15: Portuguese, Bit16: Russian,
Bit17: Traditional Chinese, Bit18: Simplified Chinese, Bit19: Hangul
680018(H) - Total program checksum (low)
680019(H) - Total program checksum (high)
680020 to 68003F(H) - System bit switches
680050 to 68005F(H) - Printer bit switches
680060 to 68007F(H) - Communication bit switches
680080 to 68008F(H) - G3 bit switches
680090 to 68009F(H) - G3-2 bit switches: Not used
6800A0 to 6800AF(H) - G3-3 bit switches: Not used
6800D0(H) - User parameter switch 00 (SWUER_00) : Not used
6800D1(H) - User parameter switch 01 (SWUSR_01) : Not used
6800D2(H) - User parameter switch 02 (SWUSR_02)
Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages
0: OFF, 1: ON (Print)
Bit 1: Center mark printing on received copies
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
232
Bit 2: Reception time printing
Bit 3: TSI print on received messages 0: OFF, 1: ON (Print)
Bit 4: Checkered mark printing
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Not used
6800D3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic report printout)
Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Not used

Bit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Journal 0: Off, 1: On
6800D4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (SWUSR_04: Automatic report printout)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Automatic communication failure report and transfer result report output 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Indicates the parties 0: Not indicated, 1: Indicated
Bit 5: Include sender's name on reports 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 0: Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Bits 1 and 2: Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages (Paper end, toner end,
jam, and during night mode)
233
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 0 = The machine receives all the fax messages.

Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1 = The machine receives the fax messages with RTI or CSI.
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0 = The machine receives the fax messages with the same ID code.
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 1 = The machine does not receive anything.
Bits 3 and 4: Not used
Bit 5: Just size printing 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Add paper display when a cassette is empty 0: Off, 1: On
6800D6(H) - User parameter switch 06 (SWUSR_06): Not used
Bit 2: Parallel memory transmission 0: Off, 1: On

Bits 0 and 1: Not used.
Bit 2: Authorized reception
0: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature are accepted.
1: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature are accepted.
Bits 3 to 7: Not used.
6800D9(H) - User parameter switch 09 (SWUSR_09): Not used
6800DA(H) - User parameter switch 10 (SWUSR_0A)
Bit 3: Page reduction 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Use both e-mail notification and printed reports to confirm the transmission results 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Not used
6800DB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B)
Bit 2: White original detection 0: Off, 1: On (alarm and alert message on the LCD)
Bit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Not used
6800DC(H) - User parameter switch 12 (SWUSR_0C): Not used
234
6800DD(H) - User parameter switch 13 (SWUSR_0D): Not used

6800DE(H) - User parameter switch 14 (SWUSR_0E)
Bit 0: Message printout while the machine is in Night Printing mode 0: On, 1: Off
Bit 1: Maximum document length detection 0: Double letter, 1: Longer than double-letter (well log) up
to 1,200 mm
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: Fax mode settings, such as resolution, before a mode key (Copy/Fax/Printer/Scanner) is pressed
0: Not cleared, 1: Cleared
6800DF(H) - User parameter switch 15 (SWUSR_0F)
Bits 0, 1 and 2: Cassette for fax printout
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = 1st paper feed station
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = 2nd paper feed station
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = 3rd paper feed station

Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 4th paper feed station
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = LCT
Other settings Not used
Bit 5: Using the cassette specified by bits 0, 1 and 2 above only 0: On, 1: Off
6800E0(H) User parameter switch 16 (SWUSR_10)
Bit 2: Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4/LT size paper is not available. 0:
A3 has priority, 1: B4 has priority
6800E1(H) User parameter switch 17 (SWUSR_11)
Bit 2: Inclusion of the "Add" button when a sequence of Quick/Speed dials is selected for broadcasting
0: Not needed, 1: Needed
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: Reconfirmation of an address before press "Start" key. 0: Not displayed, 1: Displayed
235
Bit 7: Press "Start" key without an original when using the on hook dial or the external telephone,
0: displays "Cannot detect original size". 1: Receives fax messages.
6800E2(H) - User parameter switch 18 (SWUSR_12)
Bit 0: TTI date 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: TTI sender 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: TTI file number 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: TTI page number 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Journal format
0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions

1: The Journal is separated into G3-1, G3-2, and G3-3 communications
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: 90 image rotation during B5 portrait Tx (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Off,
1: On
Bit 4: Reduction of sample images on reports to 50% in the main scan and sub-scan directions. (This switch
is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Technician adjustment (printer switch 0E bits 3 and 4), 1: 50%
reduction
Bit 5: Use of A5 size paper for reports (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 0: Automatic printing of the LAN fax result report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Not used.
Bits 2 to 5: Store documents in memory which could not be printed from PC fax (LAN fax) driver
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Setting
0 min.
1 min.
14 min.
15 min.
Bits 6 and 7: Not used.

236

Bit 0: Print results of sending reception notice request message 0: Disabled (print only when error occurs),
1: Enabled
Bit 1: Respond to e-mail reception acknowledgment request 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: File format for forwarded folders 0: TIFF, 1:PDF
Bit 4: Transmit Journal by E-mail 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Network error display 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed
Bit 7: Transmit error mail notification 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Bit 0: Dial tone detection (PSTN 1) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

Bits 4 to 7: Setting the number of times of address input using numeric key 0: Off, 1 to 15: On
6800E7(H) - User parameter switch 23 (SWUSR_17): Not used
6800E8(H) - User parameter switch 24 (SWUSR_18): Not used
Bit 4: RDS operation 0: Not acceptable, 1: Acceptable for the limit specified by system switch 03
This bit is only effective when RDS operation can be selected by the user
(see system switch 02).
6800EA(H) and 6800EB(H) - User parameter switches 26 and 27 (SWUSR_1A and 1B): Not used
6800EC(H) - User parameter switch 28 (SWUSR_1C)
- Ringing times setting in the TEL line priority mode: 00 to 99 (BCD)
6800ED(H) - User parameter switch 29 (SWUSR_1D): Not used
6800EE(H) and 6800EF(H) - User parameter switches 30 and 31 (SWUSR_1E and 1F): Not used
6800F0(H) - User parameter switch 32 (SWUSR_20)
Bit 0: Quotation priority for a destination when there is no destination of the specified type
0: Paper output priority = Priority order: 1. IP-fax destination, 2. Fax Number, 3. E-mail address, 4. Folder
1: Electric putout order = Priority order: 1. E-mail address, 2. Folder, 3. IP-fax destination, 4. Fax number
237
6800F1(H) - User parameter switch 33 (SWUSR_21): Not used

6800F2(H) - User parameter switch 34 (SWUSR_22)
Bit 0: Gatekeeper server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: SIP server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
680100 to 68010F(H) - G4 Parameter Switches Not used
680110 to 68012F(H) - G4 Internal Switches Not used
680130 to 68016F(H) - Service Switches (SCU) Not used
680170 to 68017F(H) - IFAX Switches
680180 to 68018F(H) - IP-FAX Switches
680190 to 6801AF(H) - Service station's fax number (SP3-101)
6801B0 to 6801B9(H) - Own fax PABX extension number

6801BA to 6801C3(H) - Own fax number (PSTN) Not used
6801C4 to 6801D7(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4) Not used
6801D8 to 6801E3(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G3) Not used
6801E4 to 6801EF(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G3) Not used
6801F0 to 6801FB(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G4) Not used
6801FC to 680207(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G4) Not used
680208 to 68021B(H) - PSTN-1 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
68021C to 68022F(H) - PSTN-2 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - Not used
680230 to 680246(H) - PSTN-3 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - Not used
680247 to 680286(H) - TTI 1 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
680287 to 6802C6(H) - TTI 2 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - Not used
6802C7 to 680306(H) - TTI 3 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - Not used
680307 to 68031A(H) - PSTN-1 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
68031B to 68032E(H) - PSTN-2 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII) - Not used
68032F to 680342(H) - PSTN-3 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII) - Not used
680343(H) - Number of PSTN-1 CSI characters (Hex)
680344(H) - Number of PSTN-2 CSI characters (Hex) - Not used
680345(H) Number of PSTN-3 CSI characters (Hex) - Not used
If the number of characters is less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 64 for TTI), add a stop code (00[H])
after the last character.
238
680370(H) ID for transmission and reception (Read only Do not change the settings)
680374 to 680375(H) - Envelopment ID for the envelopment reception (BCD)
680380 to 680387(H) - Last power off time (Read only)
680380(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H) - 12-hour clock (PM)
680381(H) - Year (BCD)
680382(H) - Month (BCD)
680383(H) - Day (BCD)
680384(H) Hour
680385(H) Minute
680386(H) Second
680387(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, /// , 06: Sunday
680394(H) - Optional equipment Not used
680395(H) - Optional equipment (Read only Do not change the settings)

Bit 4: G3-2 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 5: G3-3 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 6 and 7: Not used
680401 to 68040D Not used
680410(H) - G3-1 Modem ROM version (Read only)
680412(H) - G3-2 Modem ROM version Not used
680414(H) - G3-3 Modem ROM version Not used
680420(H) - Number of multiple sets print (Read only)
680476(H) - Time for economy transmission Not used
68048C(H) - Dial in (BCD)
680492(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680493(H) - Reception monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680494(H) - On-hook monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680495(H) - Dialing monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680496(H) - Buzzer volume 00 - 07(H)
680497(H) - Beeper volume 00 - 07(H)
6804A8(H) - Machine code (Check ram 4)
6804D2(H) - Serial number (Max. 8 characters ASCII)
685E6C to 685E6F(H) - Transmission counter (HEX)
239
685E70 to 685E73(H) - Reception counter (HEX)

685EDC to 685EDF(H) - E-mail transmission counter (HEX)
685EE0 to 685EE3(H) - E-mail reception counter (HEX)
688E8E to 68918D(H) - SIP server address (Read only)
688E8E(H) - Proxy server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
688F0E(H) - Proxy server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
688F8E(H) - Redirect server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
68900E(H) - Redirect server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
68908E(H) - Registrar server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
68910E(H) - Registrar server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
68918E(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
68920E(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

68928E(H) - Arias Number (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
68930E(H) - SIP user name (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
68938E(H) - SIP authentication password (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
68938E(H) - SIP digest authentication password (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
68940E(H) - Gateway address information (Max. 7100 characters - ASCII)
68AFCA(H) - Stand-by port number for H.232 connection
68AFCCH) - Stand-by port number for SIP connection
68AFCE(H) - RAS port number
68AFD0(H) - Gatekeeper port number
68AFD2(H) - Port number of data waiting for T.38
68AFD4(H) - Port number of SIP server
68AFD6(H) - Priority for SIP and H.323 0: H.323, 1: SIP
68AFD7(H) - SIP function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
68AFD8(H) - H.323 function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
68AFD9(H) - SIP digest authentication function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
68AFDA(H) - IP-Fax backup data 00 - 600 (H)
69ECBE(H) - 69ECDE(H) - Dial tone detection parameter (Max. 11 x 3 lines)
This initializes following order. [0x04, 0x40, 0x03, 0x60, 0x64, 0xf4, 0x01,0x64, 0x04, 0xc8, 0x00]
240
EN

D115, D116 Service Manual (SPANISH)

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

D115, D116 Service Manual (SPANISH)

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

More Service Manuals at www.service-manual.

Advertencias importantes sobre seguridad

Condiciones de seguridad sanitarias

Cumplimiento de las normas de seguridad elctricas

Eliminacin segura y ecolgica

Apague el interruptor principal antes de comenzar a realizar cualquiera de los procedimientos

Manual de tecnologa Core

Precaucin, Notas, etc.

1. Informacin del producto

5. Manual de referencia del mantenimiento del sistema

Carga/descarga de los datos de la NVRAM........................................................................................142

1. Informacin del producto

Consulte "Apndices" para obtener la siguiente informacin:

1. Informacin del producto

Placa del controlador GW [C]

Unidad de fax [E]

Unidad de alimentacin de papel, 500

Slo para Norteamrica

Componentes del sistema

Caja del controlador

Ranura USB 2.0/SD

Opcional slo para D115

Tarjeta SD para la unidad de impresora/

Red LAN inalmbrica

Placa Ethernet Gigabit

Disco duro con tarjeta de

Estndar slo para D115

Uno de los cuatro

Una la tarjeta de seguridad a la tarjeta SD de

1. Informacin del producto

Disposicin de los componentes

20. Sensor de densidad de imagen (ID)

21. Rodillo de registro

3. CCD (en la SBU)

22. Sensor de registro

23. Bandeja bypass

24. Rodillo de alimentacin de papel bypass

25. Sensor de papel agotado en bypass

26. Almohadilla de friccin bypass

8. Sensor de la tapa del cristal de exposicin

27. Sinfines de mezclado

28. Almohadilla de friccin (principal)

10. Rodillo de salida

29. Rodillo de alimentacin de papel

11. Sensor de salida

30. Sensor de fin de papel

12. Motor del escner

31. Sensor TD (densidad de tner)

13. Rodillo de calor

32. Placa inferior

14. Rodillo de presin

33. Motor del espejo poligonal

15. Lmina de limpieza

34. Unidad lser

16. Tambor OPC

35. Cartucho de suministro de tner (o cargador

17. Placa de descarga

36. Sinfn de recogida de tner

18. Rodillo de transferencia

37. Sensor de posicin inicial del escner

19. Rodillo de revelado

2. Rodillo de alimentacin de papel

4. Sensor de presencia de original

10. Rodillo de registro